XELERIS

g GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 2414377-100
Revision 3
Xeleris™ Functional Imaging Workstation

Version 1.1
Service Manual
Copyright© 2005 by GE Medical Systems

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibration and testing shall be
performed by qualified Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly
sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use
its own specially trained field engineer. All of Vendor’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of
the applicable electrical codes.
The purchase of equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., Vendor’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service
companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage in Shipment” on ALL
copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a Vendor’s representative or hospital
receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any
event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company
will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
Call Vendor’s representative immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date,
consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extend of damage.
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY IF A CUSTOMER´S
WARNING SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH. IT IS
THE CUSTOMER´S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NÉST DISPONIBLE QUÉN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE LÁNGLAIS, CÉST AU CLIENT QUÍL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
NE PAS TENTER DÍNTERVENTION SUR LES EQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE NÁ PAS ETE CONSULTE ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, LÓPERATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES A DES
DANGERS ELECTRIQUES, MECANIQUES OU AUTRES.
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual iii Rev. 3

GE Medical Systems Direction 2414377-100
DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER
WARNUNG SPRACHE.
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVIÇO SÓ ÉDISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS. CASO O

ATENÇÃO PROVEDOR DE SERVIÇOS DO USUÁRIO NECESSITE DE UMA TRADUÇÃO,
ESTA É DE RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE.
NÃO TENTE UTILIZAR O EQUIPAMENTO ANTES DE CONSULTAR E
COMPREENDER O MANUAL DE SERVIÇO.
A NÃO OBSERVÂNCIA DESTE PODE ACARRETAR LESÕES AO PROVEDOR
DE SERVIÇOS, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE CAUSADAS POR CHOQUE
ELÉTRICO, MECÂNICO OU DE OUTRA NATUREZA.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLO IN LINGUA

AVVERTENZA INGLESE.
SPETTA ALLÚTENTE PROCURARSI UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA NEL CASO
IN CUI LÁDDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE DOVESSE RICHIEDERLA.
NON TENTARE DI METTERE IN FUNZIONE LÁPPARECCHIATURA PRIMA DI
AVER CONSULTATO IL MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE ED AVERNE
COMPRESO PIENAMENTE IL CONTENUTO.
LA MANCATA OSSERVANZA DI QUESTA AVVERTENZA PUÒ PROVOCARE
LESIONI AL PERSONALE DI MANUTENZIONE, ALLÓPERATORE O AL
PAZIENTE, DERIVANTI DA SCOSSE ELETTRICHE, URTI O RISCHI DI ALTRA
NATURA.
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL
OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR
CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual iv Rev. 3

Revision History
P.C.N Rev Date Description Chapters/Pages Appr.
02033 000 Dec. 2004 M4 Release All E. Aloni
02050 1 Feb. 2005 M4 Release (includes Laptop) Updates to Rev. 000 E. Aloni
may be found in the
following
sections:
8.1; 8.14.4; 8.15.1.2
9.15; 9.23; 9.23.1
9.23.1.10; 9.23.1.3
9.23.1.11; 9.29
9.29.1; 9.31; 9.31.3
9.33; 9.33.1; 9.33.1.2
9.33.1.6; 9.33.1.7
9.4; 9.7.1; 9.7.2; 9.7.3
9.9; 9.6; A6; Appendix
B.1; Appendix B.2;
Appendix C
2017171 2 June 2005 M4 Release Version 1.1324 All E. Aloni
2026594 3 March 2006 Isolation Transformer 1.2.1; 2.7.1; 3.2.1; 3.2.2; E. Aloni
5.2.3; 5.2.6; 5.2.8; 11.1
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual v Rev. 3

Notes
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual vi Rev. 3

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 – Introduction
1.1 How to Use this Manual..................................................................................1–2
1.1.1 Other Documentation .................................................................................1–2
1.1.2 Conventions................................................................................................1–3
1.1.3 Where to Look............................................................................................1–4
1.2 The Xeleris System .........................................................................................1–5
1.2.1 System Components...................................................................................1–5
1.3 System Accounts.............................................................................................1–6
Chapter 2 – Safety Guidelines and Regulations

2.1 General Safety Guidelines ..............................................................................2–1
2.2 Hazards............................................................................................................2–3
2.2.1 General Hazards .........................................................................................2–3
2.2.2 Electrical Hazards ......................................................................................2–3
2.3 Electrical Precautions......................................................................................2–3
2.4 Installation Safety Measures ...........................................................................2–4
2.4.1 Seismic Anchoring .....................................................................................2–4
2.5 Safety Definitions ...........................................................................................2–4
2.6 IEC Symbols ...................................................................................................2–5
2.7 Regulatory Information...................................................................................2–6
2.7.1 Standard Compliance .................................................................................2–6
2.7.2 CE Conformity ...........................................................................................2–7
2.7.3 USA Regulations........................................................................................2–7
2.7.4 Assistance in HIPAA Conformance...........................................................2–8
2.7.4.1 HIPAA issues Support...........................................................................2–8
2.7.4.2 Site Responsibility.................................................................................2–9
Chapter 3 – Theory of Operation

3.1 Supported Xeleris Platforms ...........................................................................3–1
3.2 Hardware Description .....................................................................................3–2
3.2.1 System Block Diagram...............................................................................3–2
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

GE Medical Systems vii Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
3.2.2 Hardware Components ..............................................................................3–4

3.2.2.1 DASM/LCAM.......................................................................................3–6
3.2.3 Cabling and Linking...................................................................................3–7
3.2.3.1 DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out ......................................................3–7
3.2.3.2 SCSI Address Assignment ....................................................................3–9
3.3 Software Description.....................................................................................3–10
3.3.1 Software Structure....................................................................................3–10
3.3.2 License Keys ............................................................................................3–12
3.3.3 Database ...................................................................................................3–13
3.3.3.1 Database Structure...............................................................................3–13
3.3.4 Xeleris Supported Networks ....................................................................3–14
3.3.5 DICOM.....................................................................................................3–15
3.4 Supported Network Protocols .......................................................................3–20
Chapter 4 – Installing Hardware Options

4.1 Warnings and safety Precautions ....................................................................4–2
4.1.1 Lifting or Moving the Workstation ............................................................4–2
4.1.2 Electrical Shock Hazards ...........................................................................4–2
4.1.3 Removing and Replacing the Hood Cover................................................4–3
4.1.4 Static Electricity .........................................................................................4–3
4.2 Installing the SCSI Controller on XW6200 ....................................................4–4
4.3 Installing MOD Archive Devices ...................................................................4–6
4.3.1 Adding an Optical Drive ............................................................................4–6
4.3.1.1 Installing and Configuring the Sony EOD ............................................4–6
4.3.1.2 Installing and Configuring the Pioneer EOD ......................................4–10
4.4 Adding the SCSI Archive Tower ..................................................................4–12
4.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................4–12
4.4.2 Front Panel ...............................................................................................4–13
4.4.3 Rear Panel ................................................................................................4–14
4.4.4 Installation ................................................................................................4–16
4.4.4.1 Installing the Drive(s) into the DS100.................................................4–16
4.4.4.2 Selecting the SCSI ID Number............................................................4–24
4.4.4.3 Connecting the DS100 to the Computer System .................................4–25
4.4.5 Fuse Removal ...........................................................................................4–26
4.5 Adding a DVD-RAM Drive..........................................................................4–27
4.5.1 DVD Drive Installation ............................................................................4–27
4.5.2 DVD-RAM Configuration .......................................................................4–29

GE Medical Systems viii Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
4.6 Installing and Configuring the Second Network Card..................................4–30

4.6.1 Installing the Intel PRO1000 MT Network Card .....................................4–30
4.6.2 Configuring the New Network Connection .............................................4–31
4.7 Installing and Configuring Memory Upgrade on HP XW5000....................4–32
4.7.1 Installing and Configuring Memory Upgrade on Mini-tower..................4–32
4.7.2 Precautionary Measures ...........................................................................4–32
4.7.3 Installing a Memory Module in HP XW5000..........................................4–33
4.7.4 Setting System Swap Size, and Configuration.........................................4–34
4.10 Setting System Swap Size, and Configuration..............................................4–42
4.10.1 Setting Swap File Size..............................................................................4–42
4.11 Legacy Tape Device Connection. .................................................................4–43
4.11.1 Installing an External Device. ..................................................................4–43
Chapter 5 – Installations and Upgrades

5.1 Recording Installation Time............................................................................5–2
5.2 Installing a New Xeleris 1.1 System ...............................................................5–3
5.2.1 Installation Flow Chart ..............................................................................5–4
5.2.2 Installation Overview .................................................................................5–5
5.2.3 Unpacking ..................................................................................................5–6
5.2.3.1 Packing List ...........................................................................................5–6
5.2.3.2 Damage in Transit .................................................................................5–7
5.2.3.3 Product Locator Cards...........................................................................5–7
5.2.4 Isolation Transformer Installation ..............................................................5–7
5.2.4.1 Mounting Procedure ..............................................................................5–8
5.2.5 Network Connection ..................................................................................5–8
5.2.6 Connect Peripheral Tower........................................................................5–10
5.2.6.1 Introduction .........................................................................................5–10
5.2.6.2 Installation Procedure..........................................................................5–10
5.2.7 Plug–in the Activator ...............................................................................5–11

GE Medical Systems ix Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
5.2.8 DASM/LCAM Option..............................................................................5–11

5.2.8.1 Introduction .........................................................................................5–11
5.2.8.2 Installation Procedure..........................................................................5–12
5.2.9 Installing Hardware Options ....................................................................5–12
5.2.10 Logging Into the System ..........................................................................5–13
5.2.11 Upgrading the XPert Patch.......................................................................5–14
5.2.11.1 Scope ...................................................................................................5–14
5.2.11.2 Background..........................................................................................5–14
5.2.11.3 Prerequisites ........................................................................................5–14
5.2.11.4 Time Required .....................................................................................5–14
5.2.11.5 Procedure.............................................................................................5–15
5.2.12 Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software...........................................................5–17
5.2.13 Installing the SW Add-On CD .................................................................5–25
5.2.14 Verifying the Microphone is Enabled ......................................................5–25
5.2.15 Installing Norton AntiVirus .....................................................................5–28
5.2.15.1 Norton AntiVirus 2005 Software Installation and Configuration on HP
XW62005–29
5.2.15.2 Norton AntiVirus 2004 Software Installation on HP XW4100 and IBM
T425–38
5.2.15.3 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP XW4100 and
IBM T425–44
5.2.15.4 Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000...........5–45
5.2.15.5 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2002 on HP XW5000 .....5–46
5.2.16 Completion ...............................................................................................5–48
5.2.16.1 Rating Plates........................................................................................5–48
5.2.16.2 Cabling ................................................................................................5–49
5.2.16.3 Completing the Paperwork ..................................................................5–49
5.2.17 Adding HIPAA Users...............................................................................5–50
5.2.18 Installing Software Options......................................................................5–58
5.2.19 Xeleris 1.1 Configuration.........................................................................5–58
5.2.20 Functional Checks ....................................................................................5–59
5.3 Installing Software Options ..........................................................................5–61
5.3.1 Installing and Configuring ARG (Optional) ............................................5–61
5.3.1.1 ARG Installation..................................................................................5–61
5.3.1.2 ARG Configuration .............................................................................5–61
5.3.2 Installing and Configuring NRP...............................................................5–63
5.3.2.1 NRP Installation ..................................................................................5–63
5.3.2.2 Setting Site Preferences.......................................................................5–63

GE Medical Systems x Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
5.3.2.3 Adding Physicians ...............................................................................5–64

5.3.2.4 Site Protocol Defaults..........................................................................5–65
5.4 Upgrading From Xeleris 1.0 .........................................................................5–66
5.4.1 Full Upgrade.............................................................................................5–66
5.4.1.1 Full Upgrade from Xeleris 1.0 Flowchart ...........................................5–67
5.4.1.2 Backing Up Xeleris 1.0 Configuration................................................5–68
5.4.1.3 Xeleris 1.0 Licenses Backup ...............................................................5–69
5.4.1.4 Recording Xeleris 1.0 Parameters .......................................................5–70
5.4.1.5 Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1 ..................................................5–73
5.4.1.6 Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1..............................................5–73
5.4.1.7 Continuing the Xeleris 1.1 Installation................................................5–74
5.4.2 Software Update on HP............................................................................5–75
5.4.2.1 Software Upgrade from Xeleris 1.0 Flowchart ...................................5–76
5.4.2.2 Automatic Backup of Xeleris 1.0 Configuration.................................5–77
5.4.2.3 Disconnecting the Computer from the Network .................................5–82
5.4.2.4 Installing the Windows XP Operating System....................................5–83
5.4.2.5 Installing the Add-On CD ...................................................................5–84
5.4.2.6 Verifying the Microphone is Enabled .................................................5–84
5.4.2.7 Continuing the Installation Procedure .................................................5–86
5.5 Upgrading From eNTEGRA 2.5...................................................................5–87
5.5.1 Full Upgrade.............................................................................................5–87
5.5.1.1 Flowchart.............................................................................................5–88
5.5.1.2 Backing Up eNTEGRA Configuration ...............................................5–89
5.5.1.3 eNTEGRA Licenses Backup...............................................................5–90
5.5.1.4 Recording eNTEGRA Parameters.......................................................5–91
5.5.1.5 Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1 ..................................................5–92
5.5.1.6 Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1..............................................5–92
5.5.1.7 Continuing the Xeleris 1.1 Installation................................................5–93
5.5.2 Software Upgrade on HP..........................................................................5–93
5.5.2.1 Flowchart.............................................................................................5–94
5.5.2.2 Full Shutdown of the eNTEGRA Application ....................................5–95
5.5.2.3 Automatic Backup of eNTEGRA Configuration ................................5–95
5.5.2.4 Disconnecting the Computer from the Network ...............................5–101
5.5.2.5 Installing the Windows XP Operating System..................................5–101
5.5.2.6 Installing the Add-On CD .................................................................5–102
5.5.2.7 Verifying the Microphone is Enabled ...............................................5–103
5.5.2.8 Resizing the Database........................................................................5–105
5.5.2.9 Continuing the Installation Procedure ...............................................5–105

GE Medical Systems xi Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
5.6 Upgrade from Genie P&R, XPert and Vision.............................................5–106

5.6.1 Full Upgrade...........................................................................................5–106
5.6.1.1 Recording System Configuration ......................................................5–106
5.6.1.2 Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1............................................5–107
5.6.1.3 Continuing the Installation Procedure ...............................................5–107
5.7 Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade ..........................................................5–108
5.7.1 Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software ........................................................5–108
5.7.1.1 Update InSite Configuration from Xeleris 1.0 ..................................5–113
5.7.1.2 Update InSite Configuration from an Earlier Xeleris 1.1 Version ....5–113
5.7.2 Installing the SW Add-On CD ...............................................................5–114
5.7.3 Reinstall Norton Antivirus .....................................................................5–114
Chapter 6 – Xeleris Configuration

6.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................6–1
6.1.1 Required Information .................................................................................6–2
6.1.2 Guidelines for Multiple Xeleris Sites.........................................................6–3
6.2 System Configuration Procedure ....................................................................6–4
6.2.1 Procedure Overview...................................................................................6–4
6.2.2 Importing (Restoring) Information from Previous Configuration .............6–5
6.2.2.1 From eNTEGRA 2.5/Xeleris.................................................................6–5
6.2.2.2 From Vision...........................................................................................6–5
6.2.3 General Configuration (mandatory) ...........................................................6–6
6.2.4 Patient Selector...........................................................................................6–7
6.2.5 Archive Configuration................................................................................6–9
6.2.6 Printer Configuration................................................................................6–12
6.2.6.1 Hardcopy Options................................................................................6–14
6.2.6.2 Imation (3M) Laser Cameras Configuration .......................................6–15
6.2.6.3 Kodak Laser Cameras Configuration ..................................................6–27
6.2.6.4 DuPont Laser Cameras Configuration.................................................6–34
6.2.6.5 Fuji Laser Cameras Configuration ......................................................6–38
6.2.6.6 Konica Laser Cameras Configuration .................................................6–42
6.2.6.7 Polaroid Helios Laser Camera Installation/Configuration ..................6–46
6.2.6.8 Codonics NP1600M Color Printer Installation/Configuration............6–52
6.2.6.9 PostScript™ Compatible Printer Installation/Configuration...............6–58
6.2.6.10 DICOM Printers Except Sony .............................................................6–62
6.2.6.11 Sony DICOM Printer...........................................................................6–70
6.2.7 Database Configuration............................................................................6–74

GE Medical Systems xii Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
6.2.7.1 Remote Database Access by LAN ......................................................6–74

6.2.7.2 Remote Database Access by Modem ..................................................6–77
6.2.8 DICOM Configuration .............................................................................6–91
6.2.8.1 Setting up a DICOM Configuration from a Vision Station.................6–94
6.2.9 StarLink and ApexNet Configuration ......................................................6–95
6.2.9.1 Configuring the Xeleris on Remote OSI Stations ...............................6–97
6.2.10 Configuring DST (SMV) Systems (STP3)............................................6–101
6.2.10.1 Enabling DST-XLi printing via Xeleris ............................................6–102
6.2.11 Configuring Vision (optional) ................................................................6–104
6.2.11.1 Configuring the Remote Vision Database.........................................6–104
6.2.11.2 Configuring the Vision Database Server ...........................................6–107
6.2.11.3 Configuring the Vision Archive ........................................................6–109
6.2.12 Configuring Foreign DB (Optional).......................................................6–110
6.2.13 Configuring Foreign Link (Optional).....................................................6–112
6.2.13.1 Configuring Link to Pegasys ADAC.................................................6–113
6.2.13.2 Configuring Link to ICON Siemens..................................................6–116
6.2.14 Export/Import Remote Station Configuration........................................6–128
6.2.15 Backup....................................................................................................6–129
6.2.15.1 Backup on Hard Disk ........................................................................6–129
6.2.15.2 Backup on Network...........................................................................6–132
6.2.15.3 Backup on Diskette............................................................................6–136
6.2.15.4 Backup on CD-R or CD-RW.............................................................6–136
6.2.15.5 Xeleris Licenses Backup ...................................................................6–137
6.2.16 Setting Favorite Repositories .................................................................6–138
6.2.16.1 Considerations for Setting the Favorite Repositories........................6–138
6.2.16.2 Setting Up Procedure.........................................................................6–139
6.2.17 Setting the Favorite Applications...........................................................6–140
6.2.18 Configuring the Task In-box ..................................................................6–141
6.2.19 Hosts Configuration ...............................................................................6–142
6.2.20 Adding Language Support to the Keyboard...........................................6–142
6.2.21 Configuring Worklist .............................................................................6–143
6.2.22 MMC (Multi Media Creator) Configuration..........................................6–146
6.2.22.1 Configuring the MMC Environment .................................................6–146
6.2.22.2 Configuring the Microphone .............................................................6–149
6.2.22.3 Configuring the E-mail option...........................................................6–150
6.2.22.4 Configuring the Distribution Option settings ....................................6–150
6.3 Remote Connectivity...................................................................................6–151
6.3.1 InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite connection) .............................6–151

GE Medical Systems xiii Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
6.3.1.1 InSite Prerequisites ............................................................................6–151

6.3.1.2 Configuring the Interactive InSite Package (IIP) ..............................6–151
6.3.1.3 Checking Remote Connection availability........................................6–154
6.3.2 Checkout and Connectivity Verification................................................6–159
6.3.3 Troubleshooting .....................................................................................6–159
Chapter 7 – Functional Checks

7.1 Processing Validation .....................................................................................7–2
7.1.1 Checking the Availability of Licensed Options .........................................7–2
7.1.2 Running an Application .............................................................................7–2
7.2 Printing Tests ..................................................................................................7–3
7.2.1 Checking the Default Hardcopy Device.....................................................7–3
7.2.2 Checking Other Hardcopy Devices............................................................7–4
7.3 Archiving Checks............................................................................................7–5
7.3.1 Archiving Data on an Optical Cartridge / DVD.........................................7–5
7.3.2 Archiving Data to a CD-R/RW ..................................................................7–6
7.3.3 Checking the Archive History Log ............................................................7–7
7.3.4 Retrieving and Reviewing an Archived Study ...........................................7–8
7.4 Checking the In-Box Functionality.................................................................7–9
7.4.1 Recording an In-Box Task .........................................................................7–9
7.4.2 Starting the Queued In-box Task .............................................................7–10
7.5 Checking the Color Maps .............................................................................7–11
7.6 Review Template Test ..................................................................................7–12
7.7 Connectivity Tests.........................................................................................7–13
7.7.1 Viewing and Retrieving Data from the Central Database........................7–13
7.7.2 Checking DICOM Transfer......................................................................7–14
7.7.3 Checking the OSI Connectivity................................................................7–15
7.7.4 Checking Connectivity With DST Scanners............................................7–16
7.7.5 Vision .......................................................................................................7–17
7.7.5.1 Checking Connectivity with Remote Vision Database .......................7–17
7.7.5.2 Checking Connectivity with PC-Based SMV Cameras ......................7–18
7.7.6 Foreign DB...............................................................................................7–19
7.7.7 Foreign Link.............................................................................................7–20
7.7.7.1 ADAC Connectivity ............................................................................7–20
7.7.7.2 ICON Connectivity – Transferring Images from ICON to Xeleris .....7–23
7.7.8 Checking Worklist Connectivity ..............................................................7–26
7.7.8.1 Connectivity with Worklist Provider...................................................7–26

GE Medical Systems xiv Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
7.7.8.2 Connectivity with DS Camera.............................................................7–28

7.7.8.3 Connectivity with Xeleris....................................................................7–29
Chapter 8 – Service Tools

8.1 Philosophy.......................................................................................................8–2
8.2 Checking Xeleris Version ...............................................................................8–2
8.3 Checking Xeleris Licenses..............................................................................8–2
8.4 DICOM Ping ...................................................................................................8–3
8.5 Accessing Service Tools from the Service Folder ..........................................8–4
8.6 Archive Doctor................................................................................................8–5
8.7 Create Infinia User ..........................................................................................8–5
8.8 eFlexTrial Manual Download .........................................................................8–6
8.9 System Information.........................................................................................8–7
8.10 Running the R.C.C.D. (Remote Connection Connectivity Diagnostics) ........8–8
8.11 iLinq Operation Check..................................................................................8–11
8.12 User Administrator........................................................................................8–15
8.12.1 Opening the User Manager ......................................................................8–15
8.12.2 Exporting the User Accounts ...................................................................8–15
8.12.3 Importing the User Accounts ...................................................................8–16
8.13 Worklist Tool ................................................................................................8–16
8.13.1 Tool Description.......................................................................................8–16
8.13.2 Worklist Tool Activation .........................................................................8–17
8.14 DICOM Doctor .............................................................................................8–18
8.14.1 Tool Description.......................................................................................8–18
8.14.2 Package Content .......................................................................................8–18
8.14.3 System Requirements...............................................................................8–18
8.14.4 Installation ................................................................................................8–19
8.15 Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB ................................................8–20
8.15.1 Software Licenses ....................................................................................8–20
8.15.1.1 Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB ......................................8–20
8.15.1.2 Installing the Licences.........................................................................8–23
8.15.1.3 Xeleris Licenses Backup .....................................................................8–25
8.16 Checking Network Transfer Jobs..................................................................8–26
8.17 Checking Archiving Jobs ..............................................................................8–26
Chapter 9 – Troubleshooting
9.1 Philosophy.......................................................................................................9–2

GE Medical Systems xv Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
9.2 Operating System Installation Problems.........................................................9–3

9.3 Xeleris Installation Problems ..........................................................................9–3
9.4 Post Installation Problems...............................................................................9–4
9.5 Assigning Drive Letters ..................................................................................9–6
9.6 Setting the Virtual Memory ..........................................................................9–10
9.7 ARG Option Troubleshooting.......................................................................9–11
9.7.1 Database Connection Failed Error Message ............................................9–11
9.7.2 QGS Starting Error...................................................................................9–11
9.7.3 Error During ARG Installation................................................................9–12
9.8 Changing Network Adapter Properties .........................................................9–13
9.9 Monitor Display Disappears After Recovery CD Installation ......................9–13
9.10 Systems with Two Network Cards................................................................9–14
9.11 Archive Repositories Not Attaching .............................................................9–14
9.12 Retrieve and Import Errors ...........................................................................9–14
9.13 Sending Large Print Jobs to a Local Printer .................................................9–15
9.14 Adjusting the Display Properties ..................................................................9–16
9.15 Communication Problems.............................................................................9–16
9.16 Remote Connectivity Problems ....................................................................9–19
9.16.1 Remote Connection Troubleshooting Procedures....................................9–19
9.16.1.1 Modem Installation..............................................................................9–20
9.16.1.2 InSite Uninstall ....................................................................................9–25
9.16.1.3 Re-Installing the InSite Software ........................................................9–26
9.16.1.4 Check Modem Connection ..................................................................9–27
9.16.2 Remote Problem Report ...........................................................................9–27
9.17 Printing Problems..........................................................................................9–28
9.18 Releasing the System When it Gets Stuck ....................................................9–29
9.19 Restoring Previous Configuration.................................................................9–29
9.19.1 Restore from Hard Disk ...........................................................................9–30
9.19.2 Restoring from Network...........................................................................9–33
9.19.2.1 Restoring Directly from a Remote Station ..........................................9–33
9.19.2.2 Restoring by Using the Backup\Restore Tool .....................................9–34
9.19.2.3 Restoring by Using FTP ......................................................................9–35
9.19.3 Restore from Removable Medium ...........................................................9–35
9.19.4 Importing Vision Configuration...............................................................9–36
9.19.4.1 To import the DICOM and Printer configurations: .............................9–36
9.20 License Problems ..........................................................................................9–37
9.21 Creating Problem Reports .............................................................................9–38
9.21.1 Enabling DICOM Problem Analysis........................................................9–38

GE Medical Systems xvi Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
9.21.2 Creating a Problem Report .......................................................................9–39

9.22 Recovering Database.....................................................................................9–40
9.22.1 Scope ........................................................................................................9–40
9.22.2 General .....................................................................................................9–40
9.22.3 Prerequisites .............................................................................................9–40
9.22.4 Procedure..................................................................................................9–40
9.23 Load From Cold ...........................................................................................9–42
9.23.1 Installing Windows ..................................................................................9–42
9.23.1.1 Scope ...................................................................................................9–42
9.23.1.2 Overview .............................................................................................9–42
9.23.1.3 Prerequisites ........................................................................................9–43
9.23.1.4 Time Required .....................................................................................9–43
9.23.1.5 Procedure Overview ............................................................................9–43
9.23.1.6 Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration.......................................9–44
9.23.1.7 Saving Backup Files ............................................................................9–49
9.23.1.8 Creating Xeleris 1.1 Licenses Diskette/CD.........................................9–50
9.23.1.10 Installing the Windows Operating System ..........................................9–51
9.23.1.12 Reconnecting the Computer to the Network .......................................9–53
9.23.1.13 Retrieving Backup Files ......................................................................9–53
9.23.1.14 Continuing the Xeleris Installation......................................................9–53
9.23.1.15 Copy Backup Files ..............................................................................9–53
9.24 Removing the Second Network Card............................................................9–53
9.25 Installing the Second Network Card .............................................................9–54
9.26 Disconnecting Existing Optical Disks or DVD (if applicable).....................9–55
9.27 Reconnecting Existing Optical Disk Drives/DVD (if applicable) ................9–55
9.28 Codonics Status Check..................................................................................9–55
9.28.1 Checking Status........................................................................................9–56
9.29 Disk Space Problems ....................................................................................9–57
9.29.1 Compressing the Einstein Directory to Free Up Disk Space ...................9–57
9.29.2 Removing the Swap File to Free Up Disk Space on Drive C:\ ................9–57
9.30 Verifying Data Storage on CD......................................................................9–58
9.31 Reinstalling the OSI Option ..........................................................................9–59
9.31.1 Overview ..................................................................................................9–59
9.31.2 Remove the old OSI software ..................................................................9–60
9.31.3 Installing the IMPART ISO 8073 Network Driver..................................9–60
9.31.4 Installing the Boldon James ADI Program ..............................................9–62

GE Medical Systems xvii Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
9.32 Recovering Local Database and Archive Log ..............................................9–63

9.33 Operating System Recovery..........................................................................9–64
9.33.1 Installing Windows ..................................................................................9–64
9.33.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................9–64
9.33.1.2 Prerequisites ........................................................................................9–65
9.33.1.3 Procedure Overview ............................................................................9–65
9.33.1.4 Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration.......................................9–66
9.33.1.6 Installing the Windows Operating System ..........................................9–72
9.33.1.8 Reconnecting the Computer to the Network .......................................9–73
9.33.1.9 Continuing the Xeleris Installation......................................................9–73
9.34 Rebuild Archive History ...............................................................................9–74
9.34.1 Overview ..................................................................................................9–74
9.34.2 Supported Media ......................................................................................9–74
9.34.3 Operation Instructions ..............................................................................9–74
9.34.4 Recovered Information in the Archive History........................................9–76
Chapter 10 – Component Return Kit Procedure

10.1 Purpose..........................................................................................................10–1
10.2 General ..........................................................................................................10–1
10.3 Procedure ......................................................................................................10–2
Chapter 11 – Renewal Parts

11.1 Hardware.......................................................................................................11–1
11.2 Documentation ..............................................................................................11–3
11.3 Catalog Product Structure .............................................................................11–4
Appendix A – System Procedures

A.1 Changing Default Computer Name................................................................A–1
A.2 Updating/Setting the Local IP Address and Subnet
Mask for the Network AdapterA–2
A.3 Updating Date Format and Regional Settings................................................A–4
A.4 Assigning Drive Letters .................................................................................A–4
A.5 Setting Group Policy......................................................................................A–9
A.6 Setting Swap File Size .................................................................................A–12

GE Medical Systems xviii Direction 2414377-100
Table of Contents
Appendix B – Norton Antivirus Installation

B.1 Installing Norton AntiVirus ...........................................................................B–1
B.1.1 Norton AntiVirus 2004 Software Installation on HP XW4100 and IBM T42.
B–3
B.1.2 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP XW4100 and IBM
T42B–9
B.1.3 Norton AntiVirus 2005 Software Installation and Configuration on HP
XW6200B–11
B.1.4 Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000 ..............B–21
B.1.5 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2002 on HP XW5000 ......... B–21
Appendix C – Upgrade from Xeleris 1.1 (M3 Version)

C.1 Installing the Add-On CD .............................................................................. C–1
C.2 Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software.................................................................C–1

GE Medical Systems xix Direction 2414377-100
Chapter 1 – Introduction
In this chapter you will find the following information:

z Section 1.1 – How to Use this Manual on page 1–2
Section 1.1.1 – Other Documentation on page 1–2
Section 1.1.2 – Conventions on page 1–3
Section 1.1.3 – Where to Look on page 1–4
z Section 1.2 – The Xeleris System on page 1–5
Section 1.2.1 – System Components on page 1–5
z Section 1.3 – System Accounts on page 1–6
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual 1–1 Rev. 3

Introduction How to Use this Manual
1.1 How to Use this Manual
This Class A Service documentation set provides:

z Xeleris Workstation specific service information.
z Direction to appropriate service documentation included with the
Xeleris PC Workstation.
The beginning of each section in this manual contains a steering guide which
lists the topics covered and where to look for the information. Some of the
information is found within this manual and other information is found in
documentation supplied by manufacturers of the Xeleris System components.
1.1.1 Other Documentation
Each system includes the following manuals:

z Monitor’s User Guide.
z Modem User’s Guide (optional)
For information about installing and troubleshooting the PC/Laptop, refer to

the Windows on-line help, accessed as follows:
1. Click Start > Help and Support > Fixing Problems >
Troubleshooting Problems > List of Troubleshooters
2. Select the appropriate troubleshooter according to the problem found.

1.1.2 Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual

z Keyboard keys to be used are indicated by bold faced characters
between angled brackets. e.g, <Enter>, <Del>, <Ctrl>.
z Soft Buttons to be clicked are indicated by large, bold faced, Arial
characters between square brackets. e.g, [OK], [Cancel].
z Names of windows, dialogs, icons, tabs, menus, menu entries,
parameters are referenced in large bold faced, Arial characters. e.g.
My Computer icon, Network window, Properties entry, File
drop-down menu.
z Literal parameters values to be typed-in or selected are referenced in
large bold faced, Arial characters.
e.g. C:\HP\Drivers\Nero
z Parameters values to be typed in are identified by their name in large,
italic, bold faced Arial characters. e.g. IP Address, Hostname.
z When not explicitly specified, mouse operations such as clicking,
double-clicking, dragging, dropping-down, solacing, checking/
unchecking, should be performed with the Left Mouse button.
z When the Right Mouse Button is to be used, it is explicitly specified.

1.1.3 Where to Look

Table 1–1: Where to Look
Topic Source
Workstation Operation • PC User’s Guide
Xeleris Operation • Xeleris Version 1.1 Operator Manual,

Direction No. 2414240-100
• This Manual, Chapter 7 – Functional
Checks
Site Preparation / pre-Installation • Site Preparation Manual, Direction No.

Check List 2410575-100 or Chapter 3
Xeleris Installation or Upgrade • This Manual, Chapter 5
System Configuration • This Manual, Chapter 6
Configuring the Printers • This Manual, Section 6.2.6
InSite Entitlement • This manual, Section 6.3.1
Backup • This Manual, Section 6.2.15
Windows Software Installation • This Manual, Section 9.33 (HP

XW4100, HP XW6200)
Installing the Clinical Application • This Manual, Section 8.15

Licences
Troubleshooting • This Manual, Chapter 9
Service Tools • This Manual, Chapter 8
Renewal Parts • This Manual, Chapter 11

Introduction The Xeleris System
1.2 The Xeleris System
1.2.1 System Components
The Xeleris platform is a Pentium based PC. Table 1–2 lists the components
that make up the Xeleris system.
Table 1–2: Xeleris System Components
Description Comments
21" High Resolution Color Monitor (CRT)

or
18” / 19” LCD Monitor
PC Processor Unit Contains Pentium 4 CPU, Hard Disk,

Floppy Drive, optional Archive Optical
Disk and DVD or DVD Combo Basic
Keyboard 101 Key PS2/USB compatible
3 Button Mouse PS2 / USB compatible
Isolation Transformer (Optional) 115 V/ 115 V & 220 V/115 V versions
Modem (optional) MT5634ZBA Multitech
DASM/LCAM Optional 952 Lasercam Digital Interface

Introduction System Accounts
1.3 System Accounts
To assist the customer in HIPAA compliance, Xeleris includes four basic

types of User Accounts, installed automatically by the Xeleris software.
For sites under HIPAA rules, an account for each user (physician or
technologists) must be created. Refer to Chapter 14 – Maintaining User
Accounts in the Xeleris Operator Manual.
For sites under HIPAA rules, where new user accounts were created, some existing
Important
applications in the computer (such as MS Word) that were installed as user-
dependent, need to be redefined for the new user. To accomplish this, refer to the
system administrator.
Table 1–3 lists the accounts and associated default passwords defined on the
system.
Table 1–3: Xeleris Accounts and Default Passwords
Account Password Group Usage
xeleris xeleris Workstations Site that are not under HIPAA

rules
wsservice #bigguy1 Administrators FE or OLC engineer during

installation in sites under
HIPAA rules
Administrator dont4get2 Administrators By the site system

administrator in sites under
HIPAA rules
emergency #bigguy1 Workstations In emergency cases in sites

under HIPPA rules.

Chapter 2 – Safety Guidelines and Regulations
The safety precautions and regulatory information included in this chapter

are provided in the following sub-sections:
z Section 2.1 – General Safety Guidelines on page 2-1
z Section 2.2 – Hazards on page 2-3
z Section 2.3 – Electrical Precautions on page 2-3
z Section 2.4 – Installation Safety Measures on page 2-4
z Section 2.5 – Safety Definitions on page 2-4
z Section 2.6 – IEC Symbols on page 2-5
z Section 2.7 – Regulatory Information on page 2-6
Section 2.7.1 – Standard Compliance on page 2-6
Section 2.7.2 – CE Conformity on page 2-7
Section 2.7.3 – USA Regulations on page 2-7
Section 2.7.4 – Assistance in HIPAA Conformance on page 2-8
2.1 General Safety Guidelines

1. The system has been designed and manufactured to ensure maximum
safety of operation. The equipment should be serviced in strict
compliance with the safety precautions, warnings and operating
instructions contained in this Service Manual.
2. The product should be installed, maintained and serviced only by
qualified service personnel according to procedures laid down in this
manual. The owner should make certain that only properly trained, fully
qualified service engineers are authorized to service the equipment.
3. There are no user–serviceable parts inside system components, such as
workstation cabinet or monitor. Any servicing or adjustments required
must be carried out by a competent and suitably qualified service person.
4. The system has been designed to meet all the safety requirements
applicable to medical equipment. However, anyone attempting to
operate the system must be fully aware of potential safety hazards.
5. The system in whole or in part should not be modified in any way
without prior written approval by GE Medical Systems.

Safety Guidelines and Regulations General Safety Guidelines
6. No changes, additions or removal of any system accessories are

permitted without prior written approval of vendor’s local service
manager.
7. Only GE approved optional accessories should be connected. Any other
equipment may cause damage. Installation of any option or peripheral
must be completed by a GE service representative.
8. Do not leave the system with problems that may affect the safety of its
operation. In case you have doubts concerning the system's safe
operation, call the service office for further instructions and notify the
customer that the system is not to be used until the problem is resolved.
9. The service engineer must be well acquainted with the Safety and
Regulation Chapter of the Operator’s Guide.
10. Safe servicing requires that the field engineer has a thorough knowledge
of all equipment controls and safety devices.
11. Care must be taken when handling liquids around the system in the
course of maintenance procedures.
12. Smoking should be prohibited around the equipment.
13. The system should be cleaned regularity to prevent the accumulation of
dust, and the working area should be well ventilated.
14. The maximum allowable ambient temperature is 27oC. The ideal

environment for the system is 24oC (75.2oF) and 40% - 60% relative
humidity.
15. Inform the customer about GE’s maintenance procedure and schedule
the next Planned Maintenance.

Safety Guidelines and Regulations Hazards
2.2 Hazards
2.2.1 General Hazards

z Some repair/replacement procedures require the removal of
protective covers, exposing parts at high temperatures or with pinch
points. Read the safety/warning labels and follow the instructions in
this Service Manual to prevent burns or injuries.
2.2.2 Electrical Hazards

1. Do not remove, or open system covers or plugs, while the unit is
powered ON. Some internal circuits operate at high voltage, capable of
causing severe electric shock and/or serious injury.
2. You must be watchful for any short circuits in the system - this is
especially important if any fuse is blown, or there are circuit breakers
that won't reset.
CAUTION
Conductive fluids that seep into the active circuit components of the system
may cause short circuits, resulting in electrical fires
2.3 Electrical Precautions

1. Verify with hospital engineering department that the designated power
line is stable. If any doubt, connect a line recorder for 24 hours at least.
2. Whenever handling electrostatic devices or circuit boards, use a
grounding strap and wrist band. This grounding strap and wrist band
must be tested for continuity before use and then connected to the main
grounding point of the equipment being installed.
3. Floors with epoxy glue generate static discharges.
Advise hospital and use special spray to avoid discharge.

Safety Guidelines and Regulations Installation Safety Measures
2.4 Installation Safety Measures

1. Read the installation instructions prior to installation.
2. Make sure that the installation area is clean prior to installation.
3. Whenever handling electrostatic devices or circuit boards, use a
grounding strap and wrist band. This grounding strap and wrist band
must be tested for continuity before use and then connected to the main
grounding point of the equipment being installed.
4. Throughout the entire installation you must be careful to properly
replace and service all fuse and cable guards. Similarly, you must
properly fit all cable covers before installation is completed.
2.4.1 Seismic Anchoring
Systems to be installed in areas of the world subject to earthquakes may

require seismic anchoring. The Service Representative should check with
local authorities in the country/region of installation.
2.5 Safety Definitions
Warnings and Cautions are used throughout this manual. The identified
hazards are classified as follows:
WARNING
Warnings are used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific

hazard is known to exist, which may cause severe personal injury, death
or substantial property damage if the instructions are ignored.
CAUTION
Cautions are used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential

hazard may exist, which will or can cause minor personal injury, or
property damage if the instructions are ignored.

Safety Guidelines and Regulations IEC Symbols
2.6 IEC Symbols
The system may have labels with one or more of the following symbols. These
symbols indicate the IEC standards to which the system conforms.
Table 2-1: IEC Symbols
Symbol IEC Standard
Alternating Current
Protective Earthing Point
ON / Power
OFF / Power OFF
Input Power
Output Power
Type B Equipment
Functional Earth Ground
Warning, Caution - consult accompanying documents
Caution – Dangerous Voltage

Safety Guidelines and Regulations Regulatory Information
2.7 Regulatory Information
2.7.1 Standard Compliance
The equipment complies with the following standards & directives:

z IEC60950 , UL60950 & CAN/CSA C22.2 No 60950.
z Directive 89/336EEC
This equipment generates and can radiate radio frequency energy.
If the equipment is found to cause interference (which may be
determined by turning the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified
service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by one or
more of the following measures:
Re-orient or relocate the affected device(s);
Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected
device;
Power the equipment from a source different from that of the
affected device;
and/or
Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further
suggestions
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by

using other than recommended interconnect cables or by
unauthorized change or modifications to this equipment.
Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF signals (cellular

phones, transceivers, or radio-controlled products) in the vicinity of
this equipment as it may cause performance outside the published
specifications. Keep the power to these types of devices turned off
when near this equipment.
The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct

technicians, patients, and other people who may be around this
equipment to fully comply with the above requirement.
Unauthorized change or modifications of the equipment could void

the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

2.7.2 CE Conformity
This product conforms with the requirements of council directive 93/42/EEC

concerning Class IIA medical devices, and therefore bears the CE mark of
conformity.
2.7.3 USA Regulations

z The system was cleared for sale in the USA by the FDA.
CAUTION
Federal US law restricts this device for sale by or on the order of a

physician.
z In the USA, this system should only be used with FDA approved
radiopharmaceuticals.

2.7.4 Assistance in HIPAA Conformance
2.7.4.1 HIPAA issues Support
Xeleris assists the customer in complying with the Health Insurance

Portability and Accountability (HIPAA) privacy regulations, as follows:
z Four basic user accounts are automatically created by Xeleris:
xeleris
wsservice
Administrator
emergency
z For any user (physician, technologist) a new user account should be
created.
z All basic Xeleris users belong to the Workstation Users group,
which has Power User rights.
z When system installation and configuration has been completed, the
site administrator will be responsible for the management of
individual Xeleris users and emergency accounts.
z After 15 minutes of inactivity, a password protected screen saver will
lock the workstation. To unlock the screen, the password that was
active during screen lock or the administrator password must be
entered.
z Xeleris is shipped with a fully validated version of Anti Virus
software, whose installation is part of the Xeleris installation
procedure.
z Auditing is handled via the Windows Event Viewer, which is access
restricted to users of the Administrators group.
The following Xeleris events are logged to the Application log of
Events Viewer:
Changes in Xeleris configuration – one event per change per
configuration tab
Patient View – one event per each patient loaded using an
application (workspace or a clinical application)
Modifying patient attributes – one event per each time patient
attributes are changed
Deleting patients from the study list– one event per each patient
deleted from the study list
DICOM transfer failures – one event per each failure of a DICOM
study transfer
Patient archiving – one event per each study archiving instance
(either successful or failed)
Patient retrieval – one event per each study retrieval instance
(either successful or failed)
Printing – one event per each time a screen is captured or printed

2.7.4.2 Site Responsibility
The site is responsible for:

z Locally Managed Individual Logins and Account Maintenance
The site is responsible for user accounts creation, authorization,
administration and deletion, as well as managing and distributing the
emergency access account.
z Password Control
Xeleris provides default settings for HIPAA compliant passwords.
However, it is left up to the site to manage these settings.
z Backup and Recovery
The site is responsible for periodically backing up patient data via
MOD, CD or DVD archive
z Emergency Access
The site is responsible for managing and protecting the emergency
access account.
z Audit Log Maintenance and Mining
The site is responsible for determining when and how the audit logs
are mined. System level audit logs can be accessed via the Windows
Event Viewer.

Chapter 3 – Theory of Operation
This chapter provides the theory of operation of the Xeleris system.

z Section 3.1 – Supported Xeleris Platforms on page 3-1
z Section 3.2 on page 3-2
Section 3.2.1 – System Block Diagram on page 3–2
Section 3.2.2 – Hardware Components on page 3–4
Section 3.2.3 – Cabling and Linking on page 3–7
z Section 3.3 – Software Description on page 3–10
Section 3.3.1 – Software Structure on page 3–10
Section 3.3.2 – License Keys on page 3–12
Section 3.3.3 – Database on page 3–13
Section 3.3.4 – Xeleris Supported Networks on page 3–14
Section 3.3.5 – DICOM on page 3–15
z Section 3.4 – Supported Network Protocols on page 3–20
3.1 Supported Xeleris Platforms
This manual provides the information required to service only the following
Xeleris hardware platforms:
z HP XW6200
z HP XW4100
z HP XW5000
z IBM T42

Theory of Operation Hardware Description
3.2 Hardware Description
3.2.1 System Block Diagram
The Xeleris workstation is based on a high performance PC, a Color Monitor

and Accessories such as a Modem, and an Erasable Optical Disk (EOD), or
a DVD-RAM Drive.
The Xeleris system supports the DASM and LCAM Digital Lasercam
Interfaces.
Note HP XW6200 does not come with SCSI controller by default. If a SCSI device is to
be connected to the PC, a SCSI controller should be installed.
Note Only one SCSI hardcopy device (either black/white formatter or a digital lasercam
interface) can be attached to the Isolation Transformer (if the Isolation Transformer
is installed).
Figure 3-1 shows the system’s block diagram. Table 3–1 lists the hardware
components.

.
Note:
Only one SCSI hardcopy device
can be attached. Workstation
PC VGA Display Monitor

The cable numbers are used in Adapter Cable
Table 3–3 – Cables Listing. Display Board
5 4
SCSI Controller
(Optional in XW6200)
Keyboard
SCSI
DASM/LCAM Mouse
6 CD-R/W/ DVD combo RS232
Modem
Fast Ethernet Optical Disk 10 (optional)
Adapter 7 Link and/or DVD-RAM
Onboard Ethernet
13 Adapter (NIC)
20 V DC
Telephone Cable
2nd Ethernet Adapter
(NIC) – Optional 11
RS485
12
RS422
8 9
Power
Power
Power
2 Voltage Adapter
Laser Printer
Power
Isolation Transformer
3
Power
Power
DS/PET
1
Local Network
Grounded 110 V / 220 V LAN Socket Grounded 110 V / 220 V Telephone

AC Wall Outlet AC Wall Outlet Socket
Figure 3-1 System Block Diagram

3.2.2 Hardware Components
Table 3–1: Hardware Components
Unit Component XW4100 Specification XW6200 Specification
Motherboard Pentium IV™ Processor XEON-D Processor
1024 Mb RAM 1024 Mb RAM
Ultra SCSI Controller 29160N Ultra SCSI Controller 2906

(optional)
SCSI-III to SCSI-II Adapter Cable optional
Enhanced IDE Controller Enhanced IDE Controller
Onboard Audio Interface Onboard Audio Interface
25 Pin Parallel Port 25 Pin Parallel Port
Two 9–pin serial ports One 9–pin serial port

PC Tower
Five 32–bit PCI expansion slots Five 32–bit PCI expansion slots
NVidia Quadro4 280 NVS 64 MB NVidia Quadro4 280 NVS

AGP Graphic Card 64 MB PCI-E Graphic Card
Broadcom on-board LAN Broadcom on-board LAN

Controller Controller
Intel Pro 1000 TM 2nd NIC - Intel Pro 1000 TM 2nd NIC -
optional optional
Hard Drive 72 Gb Ultra 3 SCSI drive 2 x 80GB SATA Raid0
Flexible Disk 1.44 Mb IDE Floppy drive None
CD–R/W/DVD Combo x 48 x 12 x 48 x 48 x 12 x 48
EOD (optional) Sony 4.1 GB Sony 4.1 GB
DVD-RAM 9.4 GB (2 x 4.7G) 9.4 GB (2 x 4.7G)

(Optional)
Archive Tower StorCase Technology Data Silo® StorCase Technology Data

(Optional) DS100 Silo® DS100
Monitor LCD 19” NEC 75 Hz Type: 19” Color Monitor Type: 19” Color Monitor
Resolution: 1280 x 1024; 75 Hz Resolution: 1280 x 1024; 75 Hz
Keyboard 101 Key PS/2 101 Key USB

User Interface
Mouse 3-button USB 3-button USB
Modem Multitech Global Global
Isolation As per the local Regulatory Kit. As per the local Regulatory Kit.
Transformer
(Optional)
DASM/LCAM Adaptor for old Laser hardcopy Adaptor for old Laser hardcopy
(Optional) devices (Kodak, DuPont, Fuji, devices (Kodak, DuPont, Fuji,
and Konica laser cameras). and Konica laser cameras).

Table 3–2: Laptop Hardware Components
Unit Component Specification
Processor Intel® Pentium-M Dothan Base

Processor 1.8 GHz
Memory 2 x 512 MB / 2x1GB PC2700

(DDR) SDRAM
Network Intel PRO 10/100/1000 LAN

Adapter
IBM 802.11 a/b/g Wireless LAN
mini PC adapter
IBM Integrated Bluetooth II
Audio SoundMax Integrated Digital
Keyboard English, US only
Mouse TrackPoint & UltraMav Touch

Pad
Modem IBM Integrated 56K AMR
Xeleris Notebook External Points • Two USB Ver 2.0

• One Ethernet RJ-45
• One Parallel (EPP, ECP)
IEEE1284 compatible
• One DB-15 External
Display
• Audio Line In/Out &
Microphone Ports
• S-video Out
• Serial Port available within
Port Replicator only
Replicator Port Replicator for IBM ThinkPad
External Mouse IBM Optical Scroll Mouse
Case Embroiled Logo Nylon carrying

case

3.2.2.1 DASM/LCAM
The DASM/LCAM is an intelligent device that interfaces a 3M laser camera

to a SCSI bus. The stand alone DASM/LCAM unit attaches to the workstation
SCSI bus and emulates a SCSI disk drive in both function and form. The
LCAM takes high-level commands sent from the workstation over the SCSI
bus and interfaces them to the laser camera RS-485 digital image serial
interface and RS-422 serial communication interface. In addition, the LCAM
includes a 12-bit in and 8-bit out Look Up Table, Byte Swap Function, and
text and outline annotation capabilities. Refer to Figure 3-2.
SCSI Laser
Interface Image Data
Camera
RS485
Interface 37
Workstation
DRAM pin Laser
withSCSI Laser
1 - 8 MB Camera
Interface Camera 25
pin
Interface
Processor/ Communication
Controller Data RS422
Figure 3-2 LCAM Block Diagram
The DASM/LCAM can only be used with Laser Cameras that support the Imation
Important
952 digital interface protocol.
Note DASM/LCAM requires SCSI controller installed on the computer. If you install this
option on XW6200 you should install a SCSI controller before connecting the printer.
The XW6200 does not have a SCSI controller by default. Refer to section Section
4.2 for SCSI controller installation instructions.
The LCAM contains 1 Mbyte of on-board Data Memory (standard) which

appears to the workstation as a SCSI disk drive responding the SCSI Common
Command Set. Data Memory is used for image storage as well as for host
command and status handshaking. The workstation application makes
command, status, and image transfers by accessing LCAM Data Memory
through the SCSI bus.

3.2.3 Cabling and Linking
The cables used with the Xeleris system are listed in Table 3–3. The numbers
in the table refer to the cable numbers in Figure 3-1.
Table 3–3: Cables Listing
# In Vendor Part GEMS part FRU

Description Length
Figure 3-1 No. No. Code
1 Isolator Transformer Supplied with the isolation 1 1.8 m (5.8 ft)

Power Cable Transformer
2 Computer Power Cable Supplied with the Computer 1 1.8 m (5.8 ft)
3 Monitor Power Cable Supplied with the Monitor 1 1.8 m (5.8 ft
4 VGA Video Cable Supplied with the Monitor 1 1 m (3.3 ft)
5 VGA Video Adapter Supports two monitor

connections
6 Peripheral SCSI Cable Supplied with DASM/LCAM 2 1 m (3.3 ft)

(SCSI-1 to SCSI-2) or 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Supplied with MFHD
DASM/LCAM Adapter N/A 46-296980G1 1 0.3 M (1ft)

Cable terminated by 25-pin
7
and 37-pin Connectors
(Stub Cable)
8 DASM/LCAM Supplied with the Laser N/A N/A

Communication Cable printer. Refer to the Laser
RS-422 (25 pin) printer’s service manual
9 DASM/LCAM Image Data Supplied with the Laser N/A N/A

Cable printer. Refer to the Laser
printer’s service manual
10 Modem Cable RS-232 Supplied by with the Modem. N/A 1.0 m (3.3 ft)
11 Modem Power Cable Supplied by with the Modem. N/A 3 m (9.6 ft)
12 Modem Phone Cable Customer Supplied N/A N/A
13 Category 5 UTP Cable 2215028-4 1 2 m (6.6 ft)
3.2.3.1 DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out
This section provides the pin outs for the connectors and cables used to
interface the Xeleris to a laser printer through the DASM/LCAM.
The pin outs of the 25–pin Connector on the DASM/LCAM Communication

Cable RS-422 are listed in Table 3–4.
The pin outs of the 37–pin Connector on the DASM/LCAM Image Data Cable
RS-485 are listed in Table 3–5.

The pin assignments of the 25-pin to 37-pin Communication Stub Cable are
listed in Table 3–6.
Table 3–4: Pin Outs of the DASM/LCAM Communication RS-422 Cable
25–pin Connector
Pin # Signal
1 Case Ground
2–7 No connection
7 Signal Ground
8 RX (+) – Serial Input to DASM (+ diff)
9 TX (+) – Serial output from DASM (+ diff)
10 – 20 No connection
21 RX (-) – Serial Input to DASM (- diff)
22 TX (-) – Serial output from DASM (- diff)
23 – 25 No connection
Table 3–5: Pin Outs of the DASM/LCAM Image Data RS485 Cable
37–pin Connector
Pin # Signal Pin # Signal
1–2 No connection 20 – 21 No connection
3 DGREP (+) – Transmit 22 DGREP (-) – Retransmit
4 DGDAREQ (+) – Data Request 23 DGDAREQ (-) – Data Request
5 DGMODESEL (+) – Mode Select 24 DGMODESEL (-) – Mode Select
6 DGCLK (+) – Strobe / Clock 25 DGCLK (-) – Strobe / Clock
7 DGPAR (+) – Parity 26 DGPAR (-) – Parity
8 DATA7 (+) 27 DATA7 (-)
9 DATA6 (+) 28 DATA6 (-)
10 DATA5 (+) 29 DATA5 (-)
11 DATA4 (+) 30 DATA4 (-)
12 DATA3 (+) 31 DATA3 (-)
13 DATA2 (+) 32 DATA2 (-)
14 DATA1 (+) 33 DATA1 (-)
15 DATA0 (+) 34 DATA0 (-)
16 – 19 No connection 35 – 37 No connection

Table 3–6: Pin Assignment of the 25-pin to 37-pin Communication Stub Cable
25–Pin 37–Pin
Signal
Connector Pin # Connector Pin #
1–6 1, 4 – 6 No connection
7 7 Signal Ground
8 20 RX (+) – Serial input to DASM (+ diff)
9 21 TX (+) – Serial output from DASM (+ diff)
10 – 12 8 – 12 No connection
13 13 Signal Ground
21 2 RX (-) – Serial input to DASM (- diff)
22 3 TX (-) – Serial output from DASM (- diff)
3.2.3.2 SCSI Address Assignment
Note The XW6200 does not have a SCSI controller by default. Before installing any SCSI
device (like MOD or DASM/LCAM) on XW6200, you should install a SCSI controller
on the computer. Refer to Section 4.2 on page 4-4 for SCSI controller installation
instructions.
Table 3–7 lists the assigned SCSI Addresses for the Xeleris Workstation.
Table 3–7: SCSI IDs
SCSI Bus Device Manufacturer SCSI ID
Ultra 2–Wide Internal Hard Drive (System) 0

(on XW5000 and
XW4100 only)
Pioneer 1
Ultra–Narrow Optical Disk
Sony 2
(SCSI Adapter)
DASM/LCAM or MFHD or MF96 4

Theory of Operation Software Description
3.3 Software Description
3.3.1 Software Structure
Figure 3-3 provides a visual view of how the Xeleris software is structured.
.
Graphical User Interface
(GUI)
Protocol Builder
Clinical Applications
(Object Definition)
(Aladdin)
Application Licenses
Cedara META–4
(Object Control)
Servers
(License Level)
Operating System
(Windows XP)
Hardware
Figure 3-3 Software Structure
The Xeleris application includes servers that provide the following

functionality:
z Processing Server (Preserver), assigned to Port 2020, which manages
the graphical user interface.
z Database Server (DbServer), assigned to port 8100, which controls
the access to the patient database.
z Hardcopy Server (HcServer), assigned to port 4040, which controls
the hardcopy functions.
z Reconstruction Server (Recserve), assigned to port 5050, provides
the required mathematical processing capabilities.
z Communication Server (cpipcserver), assigned to port 3090, which
controls the access to the network for remote database, hardcopy and
file transfer.
z DICOM Server (DicomServer) assigned to port 104, which provides
connectivity to DICOM systems via the Network Server.

z Archive Server (ArServer), assigned to port 4848, which maintains

the local archive.
z Archive Log Server (ArchiveLog), assigned to port 8099, which
manages the Archive Log Index on the disk.
z STP Server (STPServer), assigned to port 5069, which manages the
DST (SMV) cameras connectivity
z TLT Network Consumer Server (TltNetworkConsumer), which
manages the network jobs
z TLT Archive Consumer Server (TltArchiveConsumer), which
manages the archive jobs
z TLT Socket Server (TltSocketServer), which manages the transfer to
the network and archive jobs
z Optical Disk Server (Gemod), assigned to ports 7070 and 7080, which
manages the Optical Disk (SONY and PIONEER).
z Archiving Disk Server (NtfsArs), assigned to ports 6055, 6060, 6065,
6070, 6075 and 6080, which manages the Cache and CD's archive
devices.
z APEXnet Server (ESV), which manages receiving data from SP and
APEX stations and store it in the Xeleris database.
z Starlink Server (GenieLink), which manages receiving data from
Starcam systems and store it in the Xeleris database.
z DST Server (STP3), which manages receiving data from DST (SMV)
systems and store it in the Xeleris database.
z Numa Connect Icon Server, which manages receiving data from
Siemens Icon stations and store it on the Xeleris database.
z Numa Connect Pegasys Server, which manages receiving data from
Adac Pegasys stations and store it on the Xeleris database.
z Vision Server.

Table 3–8 lists the software contents.

Table 3–8: Software Contents
Function Specification
Operating System Microsoft XP
Application Xeleris Processing & Review
DICOM Stations, TCP/IP over Ethernet

Remote Database, (IEE802.3)
Network Printing
Starcam Systems
OSI package
SP Systems
Networking DST (SMV) Systems STPS
ICON AppleTalk
ADAC TCP/IP
PICKER TCP/IP
Vision TCP/IP rshell
3.3.2 License Keys
For a detailed list of the available license keys, refer to Section 8.15.1.2 –
Installing the Licences on page 8–23.

3.3.3 Database
The Xeleris system uses a custom database. Currently there are no simple
tools available to access the database outside the Xeleris application.
The database resides in the D:\Database directory and the capacity can be
set to one of the following values: 46, or 56 GB.
The Xeleris application accesses the database via the database server.
3.3.3.1 Database Structure

z Patient
z Study
z Series
z Dataset
z Multiframe Image
z Curves
z ROI
z Templates

3.3.4 Xeleris Supported Networks
Three separate network protocols are provided:

z TCP/IP – a standard network protocol suite included with the
workstation used for:
DICOM communication
Xeleris Remote Database
Interfile file transfers
Insite remote connectivity
Network printing
z Starlink – a customized network protocol suite based on the OSI
model. It allows the Xeleris system to communicate over the Starlink
network. This is a purchased option for the system.
Compatibility
StarLink is only compatible with Starcam systems running Starlink

Version 4. This is a new version of Starlink that was developed
specifically to interface Starcam system to Xeleris. The following
systems are compatible:
Starcam/Star 2000, 3000, 3200, 4000, 3200i, and 4000i.
Camstar 2000, 3200, 3200i, and 4000i.
Maxxus/Optima (4000i)
Starcam/Star II - Build Standard 1 and 2 only.
M-link Version 2.0 from MedImage.
GE Starlink Agent from Evergreen Technologies.
StarLink provides the following communication actions over the

Starlink network:
Search, fetch and send patient data from Starcam based systems
running Starlink Version 4.
Receive patient data sent from Starcam based systems running
Starlink Version 4.
Send patient data to a Starcam based systems running Starlink
Version 4.

The following are the know compatibility issues and limitations of

StarLink for the Xeleris system:
Due to hardware limitations Starlink Version 4 is not compatible
with Build Standard 0 Starcam systems or Starport systems.
Therefore these system will not be directly compatible with either
the Xeleris system or Starcam systems upgraded to Starlink
Version 4. A Starport Gateway was developed to address this
problem.
P-Link systems can not send data directly to Xeleris. P-Link data
must first be sent to a Starcam system and then to the Xeleris.
z STP3 – a proprietary network protocol. Allows the Xeleris system to
communicate with DST (SMV) cameras.
z Miramar AppleTalk - A protocol that installed by the PC MacLan
software, which enable to communicate with Macintosh systems. This
allows the Siemens Icon systems to send data to the Xeleris over the
AppleTalk network.
This is a purchased option for the system.
z APEXnet - Elscint proprietary OSI based network protocol used to
communicate with SP, SPX and APEX systems. This is a purchased
option for the system.
3.3.5 DICOM
The Xeleris system contains a DICOM server. To describe the functionality

of the DICOM server the following terms will be used:
z Application Entity (AE): This is a networking term used to define a
program that provides a specific application. In DICOM, this is the
server or servers that provide the DICOM services. The server name
is referred to as the AE Title.
z Service Object Pair (SOP) Class: This defines the functionality of
the AE. The SOP Class is a combination of a Information Object (i.e.
Nuclear Image) and a DICOM Message Service Element (DIMSE).
For example the Nuclear Storage SOP Class combines the Nuclear
Image Object and the C-Store DIMSE. This SOP Class allows the
DICOM server to send or receive a Nuclear image depending on it
service role.
z Service Class User (SCU): This is the client role definition for the
AE. If a system supports the Nuclear Storage SOP Class in the SCU
role, it can send a Nuclear Image to a remote system.

z Service Class Provider (SCP): This is the server role definition for
the AE. If a system supports the Nuclear Storage SOP Class in the
SCP role, it can receive a Nuclear Image sent from a remote system.
The Service Object Pair (SOP) Classes which the Xeleris DICOM
Application Entity (AE) supports for both the SCU and SCP role are listed in
Table 3–9.
Table 3–9: SOP Classes Supported for the SCU and SCP Role
AE ROLE SUPPORTED SOP CLASS FUNCTIONALITY
SCU Nuclear Storage SOP Class Images from the database can be
sent to a system that supports the
Nuclear Storage SOP Class in the
SCP role.
Secondary Capture Storage Images created by the screen save

SOP Class tool can be sent to a systems that
supports the Secondary Capture
Storage SOP Class in the SCP role.
Patient/Study Root Query Allows Xeleris to query the database

SOP Class of a remote systems that supports
the Patient/Study Root Query SOP
Class in the SCP role.
Patient/Study Root Fetch Allows Xeleris to Fetch images from

SOP Class a remote systems that supports the
Patient/Study Root Fetch SOP Class
in the SCP role. The only images
types Xeleris can fetch are ones that
are defined by in it's SCP role.
These include Nuclear, Ct, MR and
Secondary Capture.

Table 3–9: SOP Classes Supported for the SCU and SCP Role (Continued)
AE ROLE SUPPORTED SOP CLASS FUNCTIONALITY
SCP Nuclear Storage SOP Class Nuclear images can be received and
stored in the database from a
system that supports the Nuclear
Storage SOP Class in the SCU role.
Secondary Capture Storage Secondary Capture images can be

SOP Class received and stored in the database
from a system that supports the
Secondary Capture Storage SOP
Class in the SCU role.
CT Storage SOP Class CT images can be received and

system that supports the CT Storage
SOP Class in the SCU role.
MR Storage SOP Class MR images can be received and

system that supports the MR
Storage SOP Class in the SCU role.
Patient/Study Root Query Allows remote systems that supports

SOP Class the Patient/Study Root Query SOP
Class in the SCU role to query the
database.
Patient/Study Root Fetch Allows remote systems that supports

SOP Class the Patient/Study Root Fetch SOP
Class in the SCU role and the
Nuclear Storage SOP Class or
Secondary Capture Storage SOP
Class in the SCP role to retrieve
image data from the database.
Note DICOM is now the preferred communication protocol between the cameras GENIE
Acquisition and Millennium VG and the Xeleris workstation.
Processing and review of data on remote Xeleris/Genie P&R systems is carried
out directly in the remote data base.
On the other hand, transfer of data between Xeleris systems or between Xeleris and
GENIE P&R systems is carried out via DICOM.

In order for the Xeleris to send data via DICOM, the AE parameters for that
system must be configured on the sending Xeleris.
Table 3–10 provides a list and description of the required AE parameters.

Table 3–10: AE Parameters
AE PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
System Name This is the name that identifies the system at the user
level (aui). Typically the host name is used but a more
descriptive name can be used. The system name can
contain a maximum of 12 characters using only a-z, A-
Z, 0-9, or "_".
AE Title This defines the system at the DICOM server level.

Check the system's DICOM Conformance statement for
this parameter.
IP Address This is the IP Address of the remote system.
Port # This is the TCP listening port of the system. It is used

by the DICOM server to establish the TCP connection.
Check the system's DICOM Conformance statement for
this parameter.
To enable the local Xeleris system to query and fetch from a remote system
via DICOM, the above AE parameters for the local system must be configured
on the remote system.
DICOM configuration on the local Xeleris is set via the Dicom page of the
Xeleris Configuration dialog (opened by clicking the System Setup
icon on the main navigation panel, followed by clicking [Config...].
Table 3–11 lists the settings of these AE parameters for System Connected
to Xeleris via DICOM.

Table 3–11: DICOM Configuration Parameters
Port Flags (Service

System Type Station Name IP Address Application Entity
# Class)
Xeleris Limitations: Per system’s Host name in upper 104 Send, Query, Fetch
• Less than 12 TCP/IP case letters
characters configuration
eNTEGRA Host name in upper 104 Send, Query, Fetch
• Only letters (a-z, A- case letters
Z), Numbers (0-9) or
Genie P&R underscores (_) are Host name in upper 2030 Send, Query, Fetch
allowed. case letters
XPert As defined by the local 104 Send, Query, Fetch

Case Sensitive
Genie Acq Host name in upper 2030 Query, Fetch

case letters
Millennium VG As defined by the local 104 Query, Fetch,

system administrator. Translate Ch. Set*
Case Sensitive
PowerStation As defined by the local 4104 Send, Query, Fetch

Case Sensitive
Other Systems Refer to the system’s DICOM Conformance statement.

Theory of Operation Supported Network Protocols
3.4 Supported Network Protocols
The Xeleris workstation utilizes two network protocols for communication

to remote systems.
z OSI network protocol used by:
Starlink protocol which is used for communication with Starcam
systems, M–Link systems and Starlink agent systems.
SP based systems residing on the ApexNet LAN.
z TCP/IP network protocol used for:
DICOM communication with other Xeleris systems, GENIE
ACQ systems, Millennium VG systems and other remote DICOM
systems.
Remote Database and Remote Connectivity.
Note Connectivity with DST (SMV) cameras residing on the LAN is done via a proprietary
protocol (STP3). When STP3 is configured on the Xeleris workstation, no other
configurations are required to enable connectivity with DST (SMV) cameras.
For remote Starlink systems, the Xeleris Ethernet Address and system name
must be added to the Starlink configuration of each system. In addition, the
Starlink software on each Starcam system must be upgraded to Starlink
Version 4.
For remote SP systems, the Xeleris Ethernet Address and system name must
be added to each system.
For remote DICOM systems, the Xeleris hostname, IP Address, DICOM AE

and DICOM port number must be configured.
Note The default DICOM AE is the hostname in uppercase. The DICOM port number for
Xeleris is 104.

Chapter 4 – Installing Hardware Options
This chapter contains hardware installation instructions for the following

options:
z Section 4.1 – Warnings and safety Precautions on page 4-2
z Section 4.2 – Installing the SCSI Controller on XW6200 on page 4-4
z Section 4.3 – Installing MOD Archive Devices on page 4-6
z Section 4.4 – Adding the SCSI Archive Tower on page 4-12
z Section 4.5 – Adding a DVD-RAM Drive on page 4-27
z Section 4.6 – Installing and Configuring the Second Network Card
on page 4-30
z Section 4.7 – Installing and Configuring Memory Upgrade on HP
XW5000 on page 4-32
XW4100 on page 4-35
XW6200 on page 4-39
z Section 4.10 – Setting System Swap Size, and Configuration on
page 4-42
z Section 4.11 – Legacy Tape Device Connection. on page 4-43

Installing Hardware Options Warnings and safety Precautions
4.1 Warnings and safety Precautions
4.1.1 Lifting or Moving the Workstation
WARNING
When lifting or moving the workstation, the front bezel should not be
used as a handle or lifting point. Lifting the workstation from the front
bezel or lifting it incorrectly could cause the unit to fall and cause harm
to the user and/or damage to the workstation. To properly and safely lift
the workstation, lift it from the bottom of the unit from either the desktop
or minitower configuration.
Before accessing the components of the workstation, view the following

precautions.
For additional information, it is advised to review the Safety and Regulatory

Guide that came with your workstation.
4.1.2 Electrical Shock Hazards
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the power supply.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock or harm to your eyes which could be caused by
laser light, do not open the laser module. The laser module should be
serviced by service personnel only. Do not attempt to make any
adjustment to the laser unit.
WARNING
For your safety always connect the equipment to a grounded outlet.
Always use a power cord with a properly grounded plug, such as the one
provided with the equipment, or one in compliance with your national
safety standards.
This equipment can be disconnected from the power by removing the
power cord from the power outlet.

Installing Hardware Options Warnings and safety Precautions
4.1.3 Removing and Replacing the Hood Cover
WARNING
Never remove the system hood cover without first disconnecting the
power cord from the power outlet and removing any connection to a
telecommunications network. Always replace the cover before switching
the workstation on again.
4.1.4 Static Electricity
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage electronic components. Turn OFF all
equipment. Do not let your clothes touch the accessory.
To equalize the static electricity, rest the accessory bag on top of the system
while you are removing the accessory from the bag. Handle the accessory
as little as possible and with care.

Installing Hardware Options Installing the SCSI Controller on XW6200
4.2 Installing the SCSI Controller on XW6200

1. Disconnect power from the computer.
2. If necessary, unlock the access panel.
3. Pull up on the handle and lift off the cover.
Figure 4-1 Opening the Access Panel

Installing Hardware Options Installing the SCSI Controller on XW6200
4. Install the SCSI Controller and connector cable as follows:

a. Insert the SCSI Controller into PCI Slot #4.
b. Install the cable connector bracket into PCI Slot #5.
c. Connect the first narrow conector on the flat cable after the bracket
to the internal narrow connector of the 2906 Card.
SCSI controller 4
SCSI cable connector 5

bracket
Connect to connector of 2906 card
Figure 4-2 Installing the SCSI Controller and Connector Cable
5. Replace and lock the computer access panel.

Installing Hardware Options Installing MOD Archive Devices
4.3 Installing MOD Archive Devices
4.3.1 Adding an Optical Drive
Note The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you install MOD archive
device on XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller as described in
Section 4.2 below.
The following optical drives (EODs) can be installed in the PC tower:

z Sony – For instructions refer to Section 4.3.1.1 – Installing and
Configuring the Sony EOD on page 4–6.
z Pioneer – For instructions refer to Section 4.3.1.2 – Installing and
Configuring the Pioneer EOD on page 4–10.
4.3.1.1 Installing and Configuring the Sony EOD
Note Use proper ESD procedures when handling the Optical Drive and working in the PC
Tower. The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you install MOD
archive device on XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller first.
1. Power down the PC.

2. Remove the PC front and side covers. Refer to the PC User’s Guide.

3. Set SCSI ID of the Sony Optical Disk to 2 as per Figure 4-3.
DC Power
SCSI ID Termination (*) SCSI Connector Connector
(*) Must be jumpered when two opticals are mounted.
Jumpers Legend
Jumper pairs 1 – 3:used to set the SCSI ID. The middle pair should be
jumpered.
Jumper pair 11: Termination.
Must be jumpered if the EOD is the last device on the
SCSI chain.
Figure 4-3 Sony EOD Rear Panel – Jumpers and Connectors
4. Verify that all DIP switch settings are OFF. See Figure 4-4.
Rear EOD Panel
1 8
S501
1 8
S502
Front EOD Panel
Figure 4-4 Sony EOD DIP Switches

5.
a. For XW5000 and XW6200:
Insert the Optical Disk into the empty slot in the PC Tower and
fasten in place using the green handle that covers the 5.25 bay. Refer
to the PC User’s Guide.
b. For XW4100:
Unscrew the four black screws from the PC chassis and screw them
on the EOD device then insert the EOD into the empty slot in the PC
Tower.
6. Connect the internal power cable and Narrow SCSI cable to the
connectors on the back of the drive. All connectors are keyed to ensure
that they are inserted correctly.
7. Reassemble the PC Tower cover and reconnect all cables.
8. Power ON the computer.
9. The Green LED on the drive should illuminate during its power-up test.
Verify that the optical disk is identified during the Boot–up sequence.
During the Boot–up sequence a list of SCSI devices appears. The new
device should appear on this list.
10. If the Xeleris application does not open, or system error messages
appear, verify system drive letters, as per Section A.4 on page A-4, and
proceed with the next step.
11. Activate Xeleris.
12. Click [System Setup].
13. At the System Setup pop-up, click [Config...].

14. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Archive tab.
15. In the Archive tab, check Enable Archive Functionality, select
SONY as the Device Type.
16. Only for systems with additional Pioneer MOD and/or DVD.
Otherwise, skip to Step 17.
To select the proper Sony drive letter:
a. Minimize Xeleris, and double-click My Computer on the desktop.
b. Insert a removable medium into the drive.
c. Right-click each removable drive, and select Eject, until the
medium is ejected.

d. Record the correspondent drive letter.

e. Maximize Xeleris, and select the recorded Sony drive letter in the
Drive drop-down box.
WARNING
To avoid system errors, while choosing removable drives, or CD-R/W drive

letters, do not change the drive letters from the Xeleris Configuration menu, and
ensure that the drive letters are assigned correctly. See Section 9.5 – Assigning
Drive Letters on page 9-6.
Failure to correctly assign drive letters will result in computer crash (blue
screen).
17. Click [OK].

18. Click [OK] to acknowledge the displayed message, requesting Full
Xeleris shutdown.
19. Perform full shutdown of Xeleris and reactivate it.
20. Verify peripheral operation as per Section 7.3.1 – Archiving Data on an
Optical Cartridge / DVD on page 7–5.

4.3.1.2 Installing and Configuring the Pioneer EOD
Tower. The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you install MOD
archive device on XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller first (see
Section 4.2).
1. Power down the PC.

2. Remove the PC front and side covers. Refer to the PC User’s Guide.
3. Set SCSI ID of the Optical Disk to 1, as per.
SCSI 2 Type
Connector
DC Power SCSI Connector SCSI ID

Connector
Jumpers Legend
Jumper pairs 1 – 3:used to set the SCSI ID. The right most pair should be
jumpered.
Jumper pair 4: Termination – jumpered if the EOD is the last device on
the SCSI chain.
Jumper pair 8: Must be jumpered to enable SCSI 2 type connection.
Figure 4-5 Pioneer EOD Rear Panel – Jumper and Connectors
4. a. For XW5000 and XW6200:

Insert the Optical Disk into the empty slot in the PC Tower and
fasten in place using the green handle that covers the 5.25 bay. Refer
to the PC User’s Guide.
b. For XW4100:
Unscrew four silver screws from the PC chassis and screw them on
the EOD device then insert the EOD into the empty slot in the PC
Tower.
5. Connect the internal power cable and Narrow SCSI cable to the
connectors on the back of the drive. All connectors are keyed to ensure
that they are inserted correctly.
6. Reassemble the PC Tower and reconnect all cables.

7. Power ON the computer.

8. The LED on the drive should illuminate during its power-up test.
Verify that the optical disk is identified during the Boot–up sequence.
appear, verify system drive letters, as per Section A.4 on page A-4, and
proceed with the next step.
10. Activate Xeleris.

14. In the Archive tab, check Enable Archive Functionality, select
PIONEER as the Device Type.
15. Only for systems with additional Sony MOD and/or DVD.
To select the proper Poineer drive letter:
b. Insert the Pioneer medium into the drive.
c. Right-click each removable drive and select Eject, until the medium
is ejected.
d. Record the correspondent drive.
e. Maximize Xeleris, and select the recorded Pioneer drive letter in the
Drive drop-down box.
WARNING
screen).
16. Click [OK].

Xeleris shutdown.
18. Perform full shutdown of Xeleris and reactivate it.
19. Verify peripheral operation as per Section 7.3.1 – Archiving Data on an
Optical Cartridge / DVD on page 7–5.

Installing Hardware Options Adding the SCSI Archive Tower
4.4 Adding the SCSI Archive Tower
Note The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you install the SCSI
Archive Tower on XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller as described
in Section 4.2.
4.4.1 Overview
The StorCase Technology Data Silo® DS100 series of stand-alone expansion
chassis provide rugged and reliable housing for SCSI storage devices. Each
chassis is constructed of rugged steel and is equipped with auto-switching
power supply, power-on and drive status LEDs, highly-rated cooling fan(s),
and all necessary internal wiring and mounting hardware. Removable front
filler panel(s) facilitate the mounting of fixed media devices.
All DS100 models come with external SCSI ID Selection switch(es) for easy
unit ID selection.
Figure 4-6 Archive Tower – General View

Figure 4-7 Archive Tower, Installation Overview
4.4.2 Front Panel

z Chassis POWER LED – Indicates that power is being supplied to the
DS100 chassis.
z Removable Filler Panels – Accommodate removable media devices
(CD-ROM, DAT drives, etc.)
z Drive Activity Indicator – Provides a visual indication of drive
activity. This LED is housed in the removable filler panel(s) and
provides connectors, which can easily be attached to the installed
drive(s) within the DS100 chassis.
z Drive Fault Indicator – Provides a visual indication of the status of
each installed drive. This LED is housed in the removable filler
panel(s) and provides connectors, which can easily be attached to the
installed drive(s) within the DS100 chassis.

Figure 4-8 Archive Tower Front Panel
4.4.3 Rear Panel

z SCSI ID Select Switch(es) – Provide SCSI ID selection. The DS100
uses two (2), rotating switches, equal to two devices in the chassis.
z Fuse – A fuse located on the rear panel protects the DS100 circuitry
(refer to Section 4.4.5 – Fuse Removal on page 4–26).
z Power switch – Provides power to the DS100 Chassis.
z A/C Connector – Accepts U.S and other available international
standard power cables.
z I/O Connector – The DS100 is available with two HD50 Female
Connectors.

Figure 4-9 Archive Tower Rear Panel

4.4.4 Installation
Perform the following procedures in the given order:

z Section 4.4.4.1 – Installing the Drive(s) into the DS100 on page 4–16
z Section 4.4.4.2 – Selecting the SCSI ID Number on page 4–24
z Section 4.4.4.3 – Connecting the DS100 to the Computer System on
page 4–25
4.4.4.1 Installing the Drive(s) into the DS100
4.4.4.1.1 Removing the DS100 Cover.
WARNING
Remove ALL power from Data Silo before removing the cover. The Data Silo
contains NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS inside the unit.
1. Unplug the DS100 and verify that ALL cables have been disconnected.
2. Turn the DS100 over and place it on a soft clean surface, so that the
bottom is facing upward.
3. Loosen the two (2) screws located on the bottom of the unit. Remove
them completely from the bottom of the chassis.
4. Place the DS100 in an upright position so that it rests on its chassis as
shown below.
5. Remove the screw located on the rear panel of the chassis as shown
below.

6. Carefully slide the top cover forward and off the chassis.
Figure 4-10 Archive Tower – Cover Removal
4.4.4.1.2 Drive Preparation
1. Remove the drive (Sony, Pioneer) from its protective packing.

2. SCSI Drive ID Select Jumpers – Locate the SCSI ID Select Jumper Pins
on the drive, and remove any jumpers on these pins. The DS100 SCSI ID
cable will be attached to these pins on each drive.
3. SCSI ID Cable – Each DS100 is supplied with one SCSI ID Cable per
drive bay. The ID cable permits external unit ID selection via a small
switch, located on the rear panel of the DS100. One end of this cable
connects to the drive SCSI ID pins, and the other end connects to the
DS100 unit ID Select switch.
Note Depending upon the model, the DS100 uses one of two different types of SCSI ID
select switch connectors. One connector contains 0.1" pin spacing (smaller
connector) with a matching SCSI ID cable that will be used for the SONY Device.The
other type of SCSI ID connector contains 2mm pin spacing (larger connector) with
a matching SCSI ID cable, that will be used for the PIONEER device.

For SONY For PIONEER
Figure 4-11 SCSI Cables
4.4.4.1.3 Installing a SCSI Device
1. The unit ID cable contains Black, Brown, Red/Black, and Orange wires.
Attach three (3) connectors from the SCSI ID select cable to the
appropriate drive pins, as described below.
The fourth (orange) wire is not used.
2. Attach the connector with the red/black wires to the drive pin for ID4
The single black wire plugs into the drive pin used to select ID1, the
brown wire plugs into the drive pin for ID2,.
In most cases, the drive manufacturer labels each pair of SCSI ID Select pins
in significant bit order (0,1,and 2). One row of drive pins is the signal row,
and the other row is designated for ground.
The DS100 ID Select cable provides 2-conductor drive connectors. A single

wire attaches to one side of each connector (with the exception of the red/
black connector). The cable side of each connector must align with the signal
pin on the drive. On the red/black connector, the red wire aligns with the
signal pin on the drive, and the black wire aligns with the ground pin.

Figure 4-12 SCSI ID Cable Connection

3. Install the jumpers as shown in the following drawing.
Black
Brown
Red
Black
Figure 4-13 Connections for Sony MOD
Figure 4-14 EOD – Top View
4. Install the jumpers as shown in the following drawing.
Black
Red
Brown
Black
Figure 4-15 Connections for Pioneer MOD

Figure 4-16 Removing the Filler Panel
4.4.4.1.4 Drive installation
DS100 2- bay models require the removal of the drive mounting bracket to
access drive mounting screws.
INSTALLING A DRIVE INTO THE DS100 2-Bay

1. Turn the DS100 over and place it on a soft clean surface, so that the
bottom is facing upward.
2. Loosen but do not remove, the four (4) screws that secure the drive
mounting bracket to the DS100 chassis.
3. Place the DS100 in an upright position so that it rests on its four rubber
feet.
4. Remove the drive mounting bracket from the chassis, by sliding it
toward the chassis back panel, then lifting upward.

Figure 4-17 Removing Drive Mounting Bracket
5. Install the drive(s) into the drive mounting bracket, using four (4)
phillips screws (provided in the kit).
Figure 4-18 Installing Drive into Mounting Bracket
6. After the drive(s) have been fastened into the mounting bracket,
carefully insert the bracket back into the DS100 chassis. Be careful that
no cables are pinched. Position the screws on the bottom of the mounting
bracket through the slots on the bottom of the DS100 chassis, so that the
bracket can slide freely. Do not tighten the drive mounting bracket
screws at this point.
7. Slide the drive mounting bracket as far as it will go towards the front of
the DS100 chassis, to allow access for attaching cables at the rear of the
DS100.

8. Connect the I/O cable(s) to the drive(s). Verify that the pin 1 indicator on
the cable is properly aligned.
Figure 4-19 Installing Bay Drive Mounting Bracket
9. Connect the 4-pin DC power cable(s) from the DS100 to the drive(s).
10. Connect the ID select cable to the ID select interface connector on the
rear panel of the DS100, where the PIONEER device should be
connected to SW1 (Switch1), and the SONY device should be connected
to SW2 (Switch 2).
11. If necessary, reinstall the DS100 cover to check for proper drive bezel/
cover alignment, and make any necessary adjustments.
12. Tighten the screws that fasten the drive mounting bracket to the chassis.
13. Reinstall the DS100 cover and fasten all screws.
14. If one of the external SCSI connections is not connected to another
device, connect the supplied SCSI terminator to the external SCSI
connections.

15. Connect the power cable to the DS100 and turn ON the power switch.
Should there be any unusual sound, turn OFF the DS100 immediately,
disconnect the power cable, and remove the cover to locate the source of
the problem. Verify that the power and ID select cables are securely
fastened and are not contacting the fan. Replace the cover.
4.4.4.2 Selecting the SCSI ID Number
The SCSI ID is an address number that is assigned to each SCSI device. Each
device in the chain must have a unique SCSI ID number.
SCSI ID 7 is usually reserved for the host controller. If the computer system
is already equipped with internal or external SCSI storage devices, some ID
numbers will already be reserved. For instance, the computer system that
came with an internal SCSI hard drive, is designated as SCSI device 0.
The Data Silo SCSI ID selection switches are located on the rear panel of the
chassis enclosure. There are two (2) SCSI selection Switches. The rotating
switches can be adjusted with the provided alignment tool.
Carefully select the appropriate SCSI ID number for the installed devices.
Note that some switch settings may be invalid for your interface type.
Selecting an invalid ID number, or selecting the same number for different
devices, may cause unpredictable results, and the computer system may not
recognize the installed device(s).
Pioneer MOD: Connected to SW1 Rotate the SW1 knob to align the
arrow with number 1
Sony MOD: Connected to SW2 Rotate the SW2 knob to align the
arrow with number 2
Figure 4-20 SCSI ID Selection Switch

Table 4–1: SCSI ID Selection Settings
0 = ID0 8 = ID8
1 = ID1 9 = ID9
2 = ID2 A = ID10
3 = ID3 B = ID11
4 = ID4 C = ID12
5 = ID5 D = ID13
6 = ID6 E = ID14
7 = ID7 F = ID15
4.4.4.3 Connecting the DS100 to the Computer System
Figure 4-21 Typical DS100 Connection

CAUTION
HD connections are easily damaged by improper handling. Visually inspect each

connector for bent contacts, and carefully align prior to insertion.
4.4.5 Fuse Removal
This procedure is performed only if removal of the fuse is required.
WARNING
Remove ALL power from the Archive Tower before removing fuse!
Figure 4-22 Fuse Removal
CAUTION
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace ONLY with SAME TYPE and
RATING of fuse!

Installing Hardware Options Adding a DVD-RAM Drive
4.5 Adding a DVD-RAM Drive
Adding a DVD-RAM drive consists of the following steps:

z DVD Drive Installation on page 4-27
z DVD-RAM Configuration on page 4-29
4.5.1 DVD Drive Installation
For detailed assembling/disassembling instructions, refer to the PC User

Guide.
1. Shutdown the Xeleris and the Computer, turn off the computer and
disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the front and side covers, and then the front panel.
Note The front cover is removed by releasing the three green retaining hooks, accessible
after removing the side cover.
3. Pull out the 5½” bay internal covers.

4. Set the DVD jumper to Cable Select (CS) Mode, defined by the left pair
of pins. See Figure 4-23.
5.
a. For XW5000 and XW6200:
z Install the DVD drive in the PC tower - Insert from the front.
z Pull out the green handle, and insert the drive.
z When the drive is fully in, release the handle.
b. For XW4100:
z Unscrew four black screws for the PC chassis and screw them on
the DVD device.
z Then insert the DVD into the empty slot in the PC Tower.
6. Connect the IDE cable to the DVD drive; then the power cable; then the
Audio cable (if available).
7. Remove the correspondent cover from the computer front panel.
8. Reinstall the computer front panel, and side cover; connect the power
cord and power ON the computer.


appear, verify system drive letters, as per Section A.4 on page A-4,
activate Xeleris, and proceed with the next Section.
Analog Audio IDE Interface
Digital Audio Jumper Connector Power

Output Connector
m m m
m m m
Jumper set to define Cable Select
Figure 4-23 DVD Jumper Setting

4.5.2 DVD-RAM Configuration

1. Open the Xeleris application.

5. In the Archive tab, check Enable Archive Functionality.
6. Verify that the DVD checkbox is enabled, and select it
7. Only for systems with additional Sony MOD and/or Pioneer
MOD:
To select the proper DVD drive letter:
b. Insert the medium into the drive.
c. Right-click each removable drive, and select Eject, until the
medium is ejected.
d. Record the correspondent drive.
e. Maximize Xeleris, and select the above recorded DVD drive letter in
the Drive drop-down box.
WARNING
Ensure that the selected archive drive letters match the installed archive drives,
by minimizing Xeleris, and then double-clicking the My Computer icon.
screen).
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK] to acknowledge the request to perform Full shutdown of
Xeleris.
10. At the System setup window, click [OK] and perform Full Shutdown
of Xeleris.
11. Reactivate Xeleris.
12. At the bottom of the main screen, check the drop down list on the right
(immediate left of the [Delete] button). Verify that the DVD is included
in the Transfer Destinations repositories.

Installing Hardware Options Installing and Configuring the Second Network Card
4.6 Installing and Configuring the Second Network Card
If required, a second network card may be installed on the Xeleris

workstation. The second network card is intended to connect the Xeleris to
a second network environment, such as DS Series systems, PET, etc.
Note If this procedure was done as a part of the Xeleris Installation or Upgrade wizard,
skip Section 4.6.1 and proceed with Section 4.6.2.
4.6.1 Installing the Intel PRO1000 MT Network Card

1. Power down the computer.
2. Remove the computer cover. For additional information refer to the
User’s Guide supplied with the computer.
3. Release the bracket of PCI Slot 3, insert the NIC card and secure in
place.
4. Reassemble the computer cover and power ON the computer.
5. Close all running applications including Xeleris.
6. Continue to Section 4.6.2.
z For PET systems, refer to the section describing Network Card
[6]Configuration for PET connection in the PET Installation manual.
When done proceed to Section 4.6.2 below.
z For DS Series systems, continue to Section 4.6.2 below.

Installing Hardware Options Installing and Configuring the Second Network Card
4.6.2 Configuring the New Network Connection

1. Click [Start], go to [Settings] and click [Control Panel]. In the
Control Panel window, double click [Network Connections].
Windows has installed a LAN connection for each network adapter.
2. Right-click the new LAN connection and then select [Properties] from
the menu.
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click [Properties].
4. Click Use the following IP address, and then type the
corresponding number combination as follows:
IP address aaa.bbb.ccc.xxx aaa.bbb.ccc. corresponds to the first three fields of

the Discovery ST IP address.
xxx should be the same for both the Xeleris network

cards (= the last field of the Local IP address)
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Installing Hardware Options Installing and Configuring Memory Upgrade on HP XW5000
4.7 Installing and Configuring Memory Upgrade on HP

XW5000
4.7.1 Installing and Configuring Memory Upgrade on Mini-tower
The purpose of this section is to instruct how to upgrade the workstation

memory.
The table below shows the memory available for the workstations.
Computer Memory
1 GB located in two out of four of

HP XW5000
the available memory slots
When opening the Workstation cover you will find four memory slots. Two
of them are already fitted with memory modules; the other two are empty.
After removing the computer cover, and before starting to Remove / Replace
the Memory modules, make sure to wrap your wrist with a “Disposable Wrist
Strap” to prevent static damage to the memory modules.
The Installation procedure consists of the following steps, to be performed

in the given order:
z Section 4.7.2 – Precautionary Measures on page 4–32
z Section 4.7.3 – Installing a Memory Module in HP XW5000 on
page 4–33
page 4–42
4.7.2 Precautionary Measures
Before removing the computer cover, perform the following steps:

1. Turn off the computer and any peripherals.
2. Disconnect the computer and peripherals from their power sources.
Additionally, disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from
the computer. This reduces the potential for any personal injury or shock.

3. If you are disconnecting a peripheral from the computer, or removing a

component from the system board, wait 10 to 20 seconds after
disconnecting the computer from AC power – before disconnecting the
peripheral or removing the component – to avoid possible damage to the
system board.
4. Wear a wrist grounding strap, and clip it to an unpainted metal surface,
such as the padlock loop at the back of the chassis. If a wrist grounding
strap is not available, touch any unpainted metal surface on the back of
the computer, or on the computer chassis, such as the power supply, to
discharge any static charge from your body, before touching anything
inside the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted
metal surface on the computer chassis to dissipate any static electricity
that might harm internal components. Also, avoid touching components
or contacts on a card and avoid touching pins on a chip.
5. Verify that the standby power indicator on the system board is not on. If
it is on, you may need to wait 10 to 30 seconds for it to go out.
4.7.3 Installing a Memory Module in HP XW5000

1. Install the memory module:
a. Press the securing clips at each end of the socket outward, until they
snap open (see Figure 4-24).
b. Align the slots at the bottom of the memory module with the two
ridges inside the socket.
c. Press the memory module straight down into the socket until the
securing clips snap into place at both ends of the module.
Securing Clips
Slots (2)
Figure 4-24 Memory Module Installation
2. Position the computer upright.

3. Replace the computer cover and restart the system.
The system detects that the new memory does not match the existing
system configuration information and generates the following message:
The amount of system memory has changed.

Strike the F1 key to continue, F2 to run the setup utility
4. Enter system setup, and check the value for System Memory. The
system should have already changed the value of System Memory to
reflect the newly installed memory. If the new total is correct, skip to
Step 6.
5. If the memory total is incorrect, check the installed modules to ensure
that they are seated properly in their sockets; then repeat Step 2 through
Step 4 of this procedure.
6. When the System Memory total is correct, exit system setup, and
restart the Workstation.
4.7.4 Setting System Swap Size, and Configuration
Refer to Section 4.10.1 – Setting Swap File Size on page 4-42.


XW4100

memory.
Computer Memory
1 GB located in two out of four

HP XW4100 of the available memory slots
(1,3)

in the given order:
page 4–36
page 4–42



system board.

There are four memory sockets in the HP XW4100 workstation. The system
in basic configuration comes with 2x 512MB industry-standard 184-pin, PC
3200 (ECC only) compliant 2.5V unbuffered DDR-SDRAM modules. They
are located in two out of the four available sockets.
Important For optimal dual channel operation DIMMs should be installed in pairs.
For installing the additional memory (2x512MB) in the available two empty
sockets please follow the below procedure:
1. Turn off the workstation and any peripheral devices that are connected to
it.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the
workstation.
3. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the workstation.
4. Lay the unit in the desktop position as shown in Figure 4-25.

5. Pull up and out on the cover latch 1 and at the same time slide the cover
2 away from the bezel and then lift up.
Figure 4-25 Removing the Workstation Cover
6. Remove the anti static wrist band from its plastic bag.
7. One end of the wrist band should be attached firmly to the installer wrist.
The other end should be attached to a metal surface inside the
workstation.
(for example the Power Supply case)
8. Gently push outwards on the socket levers 1 (as shown in Figure 4-26)
until they are wide open.
9. Remove the memory module from its package and align it above the
empty socket 2 as shown in the below illustration.
DIMMs and the DIMM sockets are keyed for proper installation. Make sure
Important
these guides line up when installing a DIMM
10. Gently push inwards the memory module until the socket levers 1 as
shown in the following illustration are tightly locked at the sides of the
memory module.

Figure 4-26 Opening the Socket Levers
11. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to install the second memory module.

12. Replace the hood cover; slide the cover back on until it snaps into place.
13. Position the workstation back in place, reconnect the peripherals and
power cord and power on the system.
14. Upon system boot up and checking the amount of memory a message
appears prompting about the new memory size. Verify the amount is
2048MB and then click F1 to continue.


XW6200

memory.
Computer Memory
1 GB located in two out of four

HP XW6200 of the available memory slots
(1,3)

in the given order:
page 4–40
page 4–42



system board.

There are four memory sockets in the HP XW6200 workstation. The system
in basic configuration comes with 2x 512MB industry-standard 184-pin, PC
3200 (ECC only) compliant 2.5V unbuffered DDR-SDRAM modules. They
are located in two out of the four available sockets.
Important For optimal dual channel operation DIMMs should be installed in pairs.
For installing the additional memory (2x512MB) in the available two empty
sockets please follow the below procedure:
1. Turn off the workstation and any peripheral devices that are connected to
it.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the
workstation.
3. Disconnect all peripheral device cables from the workstation.
4. Lay the unit in the desktop position as shown in Figure 4-25.

5. Pull up and out on the cover latch 1 and at the same time slide the cover
2 away from the bezel and then lift up.
Figure 4-27 Removing the Workstation Cover
6. Remove the anti static wrist band from its plastic bag.
7. One end of the wrist band should be attached firmly to the installer wrist.
The other end should be attached to a metal surface inside the
workstation.
(for example the Power Supply case)
8. Gently push outwards on the socket levers 1 (as shown in Figure 4-26)
until they are wide open.
9. Remove the memory module from its package and align it above the
empty socket 2 as shown in the below illustration.
DIMMs and the DIMM sockets are keyed for proper installation. Make sure
Important
these guides line up when installing a DIMM
10. Gently push inwards the memory module until the socket levers 1 as
shown in the following illustration are tightly locked at the sides of the
memory module.

Installing Hardware Options Setting System Swap Size, and Configuration
Figure 4-28 Installing the Memory Module
11. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to install the second memory module.

12. Replace the hood cover; slide the cover back on until it snaps into place.
13. Position the workstation back in place, reconnect the peripherals and
power cord and power on the system.
14. Upon system boot up and checking the amount of memory a message
appears prompting about the new memory size. Verify the amount is
2048MB and then click F1 to continue.
4.10 Setting System Swap Size, and Configuration
4.10.1 Setting Swap File Size

1. Perform Full Shutdown of Xeleris and close any other open
applications.
2. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop, and select
Properties.
3. From the System Properties panel, click the Advanced tab.
4. From the Performance section, click [Setting].

Installing Hardware Options Legacy Tape Device Connection.
5. Select the Advanced tab, then from the Virtual Memory section,
click [Change...].
6. Select D: from the list of drives.
7. Under Paging File Size for the Selected Drive, enter the following
in the editable fields:
z in the Initial Size (MB) field, type 2058
z in the Maximum Size (MB) field, type 2100
8. Click Set.
9. Select C: from the list of drives.
10. Select No Paging File.
11. Click Set.
12. Click [OK].
13. At the opened System Properties window, click [OK].
14. Confirm system reboot.
4.11 Legacy Tape Device Connection.

The purpose of this section is to provide information on how to connect tape
devices (PowerStation legacy tape devices) to an Xeleris workstation. This
section describes the connection of IBM 4mm Tape Family and QIC 8mm
tape family. Currently Xeleris supports an external tape device.
Note The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you install Legacy Tape
Section 4.2.
4.11.1 Installing an External Device.

Complete all steps in this section to attach an external drive to your PC
WARNING
To reduce the risk of electric shock, make sure that the power to the com-
puter is disconnected.

1. Turn off power to the computer.

2. Fit the external SCSI cable to the host adapter SCSI port located at the
back of the computer.
The connection type should be HD50 Male connection.
External SCSI Cable
Figure 4-29 External SCSI Cable Fitted to Host Adapter SCSI Port
Terminator
External SCSI Cable
Figure 4-30 External SCSI Cable Fitted to Computer.

3. Fit the other end of the external SCSI cable to one of the SCSI
connectors on the QIC drive. The connection type should be Centronics
50 pin male.
z If two devices are needed to be connected to the same computer they
can be chained to one another using a centronics 50 pin male cable
at both ends.
z If the drive is the last device on the SCSI bus, install a terminator on
the remaining SCSI connector on the drive

4. Fit an AC line cord between the tape drive and a source of AC power
(wall outlet).
SCSI ID Selector
5. Set the SCSI ID using a pen tip or the end of a paper clip. Press on the up
or down-arrows on the SCSI ID selector. The recommended SCSI ID for
the tape device is SCSI ID 4 or SCSI ID 5 depending if another tape is
connected to the same computer or not.
6. Power up the tape drive by pressing the ON/OFF switch on the back of
the tape drive to ON (|).
7. Restore power to the computer.
8. Right click on [My Computer] icon and select Properties.
9. Open the Hardware tab.
10. Click Device Manager (Figure 4-32).
Figure 4-31 Device Manager

11. Select Other Devices and from the list, choose TANDBERG IBM
4100 SCSI Sequential device.
12. Right click and select Update Driver...(Figure 4-33)
Figure 4-32 Update Driver
13. Select Install from list or select a specific location [Advanced]

and then click [Next] (Figure 4-33).
Figure 4-33 Install From List

14. Select Don't search, I will choose the driver to install and click
[Next].(Figure 4-34).
Figure 4-34 Update Driver
15. Select Tape Drives and click [Next] (Figure 4-35).
Figure 4-35 Tape Drives

16. From Standard Tape Drives, select 4 millimeter DAT drive and
click [Next] (Figure 4-36).
Figure 4-36 4mm DAT Drive
17. A warning message appears. Click [Yes].(Figure 4-37).
Figure 4-37 Warning

18. After installation is complete, click [Finish] (Figure 4-38).
Figure 4-38 Hardware Update Completed
19. Open the Vision tab on the Xeleris Configuration dialog.

20. From the Devices section, check the Tape checkbox and select the
applicable device from the drop-down list.
Figure 4-39 Selecting Tape Device

21. Click [OK] to close Xeleris configuration and confirm the message to
perform Partial Shutdown.
22. Perform Partial Shutdown and Restart Xeleris.

Chapter 5 – Installations and Upgrades
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing the Xeleris 1.1
system.
Following are the main procedures:

z Section 5.1 – Recording Installation Time on page 5-2
z Section 5.2 – Installing a New Xeleris 1.1 System on page 5-3
z Section 5.3 – Installing Software Options on page 5-61
z Section 5.4 – Upgrading From Xeleris 1.0 on page 5-66
z Section 5.5 – Upgrading From eNTEGRA 2.5 on page 5-87
z Section 5.6 – Upgrade from Genie P&R, XPert and Vision on
page 5-106
z Section 5.7 – Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade on page 5-108
CAUTION
Before beginning installation of Xeleris 1.1, verify that all patient data is backed up.
CAUTION
It is possible that this software version does not include the latest security updates
for the operating system. After completing Xeleris 1.1 installation download and
install the latest security updates from Support Central:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=16201
Select the Security Patches link.
In order to enable Ignite™ feature with GenieAcq cameras, make sure the following
Important
conditions are met:
1. The camera SW version is 4.0 and up
2. Patch LSW000521 is installed on the camera.
The patch spare part number is UGP001609

Installations and Upgrades Recording Installation Time
5.1 Recording Installation Time
Note This section is not applicable for European sites.
The standard installation code is 03. Anything not part of a standard

installation shall be booked against one of the numbers in Table 5–1. It would
not be uncommon on a NORMAL installation to find time booked to one or
more of these codes.
Table 5–1: Non-installation Time Codes
Code Description
04 Site preparation or inspection.
06 Non standard installation
10 Failures during installation.
84 Service incurred because of loss or damage in shipment and filing

claims.
87 Service training — on site, field office, Education Center
91 Costs incurred when modifying products to make them compliant

with local country regulatory standards.
94 Sales activity. Service work performed on behalf of sales, includes

equipment demonstrations and sales assistance.
98 F.M.I. work.
Note Network installation time should be covered by a K1000 catalog number or 06

Money. It should not be charged directly to the Xeleris 1.1 installation.

Installations and Upgrades Installing a New Xeleris 1.1 System
5.2 Installing a New Xeleris 1.1 System
Following are the main procedures:

z Section 5.2.1 – Installation Flow Chart on page 5-4
z Section 5.2.2 – Installation Overview on page 5-5
z Section 5.2.3 – Unpacking on page 5-6
z Section 5.2.4 – Isolation Transformer Installation on page 5-7
z Section 5.2.5 – Network Connection on page 5-8
z Section 5.2.6 – Connect Peripheral Tower on page 5-10
z Section 5.2.7 – Plug–in the Activator on page 5-11
z Section 5.2.8 – DASM/LCAM Option on page 5-11
z Section 5.2.9 – Installing Hardware Options on page 5-12
z Section 5.2.10 – Logging Into the System on page 5-13
z Section 5.2.11 – Upgrading the XPert Patch on page 5-14
z Section 5.2.12 – Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software on page 5-17
z Section 5.2.13 – Installing the SW Add-On CD on page 5-25
z Section 5.2.14 – Verifying the Microphone is Enabled on page 5-25
z Section 5.2.15 – Installing Norton AntiVirus on page 5-28
z Section 5.2.16 – Completion on page 5-48
z Section 5.2.17 – Adding HIPAA Users on page 5-50
z Section 5.2.18 – Installing Software Options on page 5-58
z Section 5.2.19 – Xeleris 1.1 Configuration on page 5-58
z Section 5.2.20 – Functional Checks on page 5-59
z Section 5.3.1 – Installing and Configuring ARG (Optional) on
page 5-61
z Section 5.3.2 – Installing and Configuring NRP on page 5-63

5.2.1 Installation Flow Chart
Site Preparation Complete
Section 5.2.3, Unpacking
Isolation Yes Section 5.2.4, Isolation Transformer Installation

Transformer?
No
Section 5.2.5, Network Connection
Peripheral Yes
Tower? Section 5.2.6, Connect Peripheral Tower
No
Section 5.2.7, Plug–in the Activator
DASM/LCAM Yes
Section 5.2.8, DASM/LCAM Option
Option?
No
Hardware Yes
Section 5.2.9, Installing Hardware Options
Options
No
Section 5.2.10, Logging Into the System
XPert Patch Yes

Section 5.2.11, Upgrading the XPert Patch
No
Section 5.2.12, Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software
Section 5.2.15, Installing Norton AntiVirus
Section 5.2.16, Completion
Adding HIPAA Yes

Section 5.2.17, Adding HIPAA Users
users
No
Software Yes
Section 5.2.18, Installing Software Options
Options?
No
Section 5.2.19, Xeleris 1.1 Configuration
Section 5.2.20, Functional Checks
Figure 5-1 New Installation Flow Chart

5.2.2 Installation Overview
Table 5–2 outlines the steps for installing the Xeleris 1.1 PC hardware. Refer
to the PC User’s Guide for details.
Table 5–2: Installation Overview
Time
Steps Reference
(Min.)
Unpack PC components. 5 PC User’s Guide
Unpack and Position In above Refer to Site Plan diagram

Processor Unit per
customer’s specifications.
Unpack Monitor, 5 Section 5.2.3 – Unpacking on

Keyboard, and Mouse page 5-6
Position Monitor, In above Refer to Site Plan diagram

Keyboard, and Mouse per
Connect PC cables 5 PC User’s Guide.

Figure 3-1
Connect appropriate 5 Section 5.2.5 on page 5-8

Network Transceiver and/ Figure 3-1
or Drop Cable.
Plug–in the Activator In above Section 5.2.7 – Plug–in the Activator

on page 5–11
Total 20
Note A desk is not provided as part of the standard system. Arrangements should have
been made during site preparation.

5.2.3 Unpacking
5.2.3.1 Packing List
Use Table 5–3 to verify that you have received all items.
Table 5–3: Packing List
Contents Documents
General Documents, Software, Licenses and Xeleris 1.1 Operator Manual

Activator Xeleris 1.1 Service Manual
Xeleris 1.1 Site Preparation Manual
Release Notes (CIS)
Monitor Monitor Color Monitor Users Guide

Video Cable
Power Cable
Processor Unit Personal Computer PC User’s Manual

Accessories Kit:
Keyboard
Mouse
Power Cables
Local Kit Isolation Transformer OEM Documentation

(country Power Cables (optional)
dependent)
Modem OEM Documentation
Keyboard (European Options Operator’s Guide in relevant

only) language, and Installation
Instructions
DASM/LCAM (Option) DASM/LCAM Users Guide
CAUTION
Do not discard any packing material until installation is complete.

5.2.3.2 Damage in Transit
At the time of delivery examine all packages for external damage. If damage
to any package is apparent, notify your installation specialist before
continuing.
5.2.3.3 Product Locator Cards
Remove all Product Locator cards, marked INSTALLATION, from each

package and put in a safe place until installation is complete. Details on
completing and mailing these cards are given in Section 5.2.16.3.
5.2.4 Isolation Transformer Installation
If an isolation transformer will not be installed, proceed to Section 5.2.5 –

Network Connection on page 5-8.
Note An isolation transformer is required if the Xeleris 1.1 is located in the patient scanner
area and for CE compliant installations.
Table 5–4: Isolation Transformer Installation
Steps Time (Min.) Reference
Ensure Pre–install Complete 10 Pre–Installation Check List in

the Pre-Installation Manual.
Unpack & Install Isolation 15 Section 5.2.4.1 – Mounting

Transformer Procedure on page 5–8
Connect Isolation Transformer In above. Figure 3-1

to Line Supply
Total 30

5.2.4.1 Mounting Procedure
The isolation transformer can either be mounted on a wall or positioned on

the floor next to the Xeleris 1.1 system.
1. Unpack isolation transformer and position near the workstation location.
2. If the transformer will be mounted on the wall, secure using four 11 mm
x 76 mm (7/16" x 3") anchor screws.
Note The wall mount must support the weight of the isolation transformer (17.2 kg, 38 lbs).
5.2.5 Network Connection
The Xeleris 1.1 PC includes a 10/100 Base–T IEEE 802.3 Ethernet card. This
card provides a RJ45 interface to connect into either a 100 Base–T or 10
Base–T IEEE802.3 HUB via a category 5 unshielded twisted pair (CAT 5)
cable.
The HUB and CAT 5 drop cable should have been installed as part of the site
preparation process. To interface the PC to the HUB:
z Connect one end of the category 5 UTP cable to the RJ45 plug on the
PC’s Ethernet card.
z Connect the other end to either the:
Open port on the HUB.
RJ45 connection provided by LAN installer. This connection
should be tied back to the HUB.
Figure 5-2 provides an example of the LAN connections.
To connect to another IEEE802.3 topology (10Base2 or 10Base 5), the HUB

will need to be interfaced to the current network bus via the HUB’s AUI port
and a topology specific transceiver. This should have been completed during
the site preparation work.
z A 10Base2 or ThinNet LAN consists of a 50 ohm RG58 coax cable
backbone.
z A 10Base5 or ThickNet LAN uses thick 50 ohm coax cable as the
backbone. The node transceivers are connected to the backbone via
a vampire tap or a end point connector.

Starc
Xeleris Xeleris am
Helio
s
CAT 5 UTP Cable
10/100BaseT HUB
AUI Port Connection to other topology
AUI Cable
Thin or Thick Coax Network Bus
10Base5 or 10Base2
10Base5 or 10Base2
Transceiver
Figure 5-2 Xeleris 1.1 LAN Connection Examples

5.2.6 Connect Peripheral Tower
5.2.6.1 Introduction
There may be a peripheral tower containing the Archive Optical Disk and/or
the DASM/LCAM Digital Lasercam Interface that needs to be interfaced to
the system.
If there is no peripheral tower with the system, proceed to the Section 5.2.7
– Plug–in the Activator on page 5-11.
Section 4.2.
5.2.6.2 Installation Procedure

Table 5–5: Peripheral Tower Option Installation Procedure
Time
Steps Reference
(Min.)
Unpack and Position 5

Peripherals Tower per
Open the tower and 5

configure the DASM/
LCAM as follows: Refer to the DASM/LCAM User Manual.
• SCSI ID = 4
• D Host Comm =
RS422
Connect SCSI cable 10 Figure 3-1 and the PC User’s Guide

between the PC and the
peripheral tower.
Install the SCSI terminator
on the tower.
Connect power cord to In Figure 3-1

Isolation Transformer above
(when applicable)
Total 20

5.2.7 Plug–in the Activator
Plug the keyed activator into the parallel port on the rear panel of the
computer. In case of a local connected printer, you plug the printer into the
activator.
5.2.8 DASM/LCAM Option
Note If the DASM/LCAM option is included, refer to Section 6.2.6.1 – Hardcopy Options
on page 6-14 for complete details on interfacing/configuring the DASM/LCAM with
the various compatible Laser Cameras.
Section 4.2.
5.2.8.1 Introduction
The DASM/LCAM is a self–contained unit that provides a digital interface

to a 3M 952 compatible Laser Camera.
z The unit is connected to the PC via the SCSI bus.
z The Laser Camera interface is via a 25 pin RS422 serial
communication (Host) line and a 37 pin digital (Image) line.
If there is no DASM/LCAM option included, proceed to Section 5.2.9 –

Installing Hardware Options on page 5-12.
The DASM/LCAM can not be used if a MFHD or MF96 is also being used due to
Important
SCSI bus conflicts.

5.2.8.2 Installation Procedure

Table 5–6: DASM-LCAM Option Installation Procedure
Time
Steps Reference
(Mi.)
Unpack and Position DASM/LCAM 5
Configure the DASM/LCAM as follows: 5 Refer to the DASM/

• SCSI ID = 4 LCAM Users
Manual.
• Host Comm = RS422
Connect SCSI cable between the PC and 10 DASM/LCAM Users

DASM/LCAM. Manual and the PC
Install the SCSI terminator on the DASM/LCAM User’s Guide.
Connect power cord to Isolation Transformer In above Figure 3-1

(when applicable)
Total 20
Note Refer to Section 6.2 – System Configuration Procedure on page 6-4 for details on
configuring the Xeleris 1.1 system to use the Laser Camera connected to the DASM/
LCAM for filming.
Refer to Section 6.2.6.1 – Hardcopy Options on page 6-14 for complete details on
interfacing/configuring the DASM/LCAM with the various compatible Laser
Cameras.
5.2.9 Installing Hardware Options

After installing the needed components, as described in Chapter 4 – Installing
Hardware Options, proceed to Section 5.2.10 – Logging Into the System on
page 5-13.

5.2.10 Logging Into the System

1. Turn ON the Computer.
2. In the Logon screen, use:
User name: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
Note The above Username and Password must be used by the FE and OLC Engineer,
and shall be used by them for any service activity.
After completion of service activity, site that are not under HIPAA rules shall be
accessed for work, by username: xeleris, password: xeleris. For sites under HIPAA
rules, an account for each user (physician or technologists) must be created. Refer
to Adding HIPAA Users on page 5-50.
Click the [OK] button.
The Xeleris StartUp window with the version number will be

displayed.
When the Xeleris 1.1 application has been loaded, the Data
Management screen is displayed.
When activated, the Xeleris 1.1 application:

z Verifies that the Xeleris 1.1 software and licenses were properly
loaded.
z Initializes the system drivers for any SCSI peripherals (DASM/
LCAM, or Archive EOD) added during the installation process.
z Verifies that all peripherals are alive and not hanging the SCSI
bus.

5.2.11 Upgrading the XPert Patch
5.2.11.1 Scope
This procedure is relevant only for those sites that have XPert installed.
Otherwise proceed to Section 5.2.12 – Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software on
page 5-17.
5.2.11.2 Background
The Transfer Syntax Correction Patch must be installed on all XPert

systems version 5.5, in order to transfer data to/from Xeleris 1.1.
This XPert upgrade can be done before or after the Xeleris 1.1 upgrade.
5.2.11.3 Prerequisites
XPert version 5.5.
5.2.11.4 Time Required
The time required to complete the upgrade of the XPert Patch is 8 minutes.

5.2.11.5 Procedure
The XPert upgrade consists of the following steps, to be performed in the

given order:
z Section 5.2.11.5.1 – Checking Current XPert software Version on
page 5-15 (To be done in the XPert system)
z Section 5.2.11.5.2 – Installing the XPert Patch on page 5-15 (To be
done in the XPert system)
z Section 5.2.11.5.3 – Checking XPert Communication With Xeleris
1.1 on page 5-16 (To be done in the Xeleris 1.1 system)
5.2.11.5.1 Checking Current XPert software Version
If the Main XPert container title is XPert V5.5, the following procedures
need to be performed.
All other XPert versions do not require this...
5.2.11.5.2 Installing the XPert Patch
1. At the XPert V5.5 container menu, click File, select Exit and wait until
the container is closed.
2. Insert the Xeleris 1.1 CD into the XPert CD-ROM drive.
3. To open a command shell, double-click the Main desktop icon, and
double-click OS/2 System.
4. Double-click the Command Prompts icon, and double-click OS/2
Window.
5. At the opened OS/2 Window, type E: <Enter> (where E: is your CD-
ROM drive letter).
6. Type cd options\xpert <Enter>.
7. Type install <Enter>, and wait until you are prompted again.
8. In order to restart the XPert application, double-click the APEX desktop
icon; then, at the Disclaimer Warranty window, click [OK].

5.2.11.5.3 Checking XPert Communication With Xeleris 1.1
The following data transfer checks need to be performed:

z Section a., Sending Data to XPert
z Section b., Getting Data From XPert
a. Sending Data to XPert

1. At the bottom of the main Xeleris 1.1 screen, select the Xpert station as
Transfer Destination repository.
2. Select any WB study from the Local Database.
3. Click the Xpert Station name button.
4. Click the Network icon on the status bar to open the Network
Transfer Log.
The transferred study is listed in the ACTIVE part of the window, and
when archived successfully it appears in the COMPLETED part of the
window.
b. Getting Data From XPert

1. At the top of the main Xeleris 1.1 screen, select the Xpert station as
Source repository.
2. Click the Xpert Station name button.
3. Select any WB study.
4. At the bottom of the main Xeleris 1.1 screen, click [Local].
Transfer Log.
The transferred study is listed in the ACTIVE part of the window, and
window.

5.2.12 Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software
This section is applicable for the following scenarios:

z When performing Full upgrade from Xeleris1.0/eNTEGRA/Other
WS.
z When installing a new Xeleris1.1 system
If you are performing a SW upgrade on HP XW5000 computer, please refer

to the instruction in Section 5.7 – Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade on
page 5-108.
Note For the following procedure, login with

Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
1. Insert the Xeleris 1.1 CD into the CD drive.
Note The system will request confirmation of automatic restore or backup.

• If the following message is displayed, click <No>.
• If the following message is displayed, this is a software upgrade.
Click <Cancel> and follow the instructions in Section 5.7 – Continuing Xeleris 1.1
SW Upgrade on page 5-108

2. Wait until the Xeleris Installation Configuration utility is

automatically loaded. The following window is displayed.
Figure 5-3 Xeleris Installation Configuration – Screen 1
3. Verify that Xeleris Installation / Upgrade is selected.
The Xeleris 1.1 installation is based on the system configuration, displayed in the
Important
System Information group.
If no database is detected, the Xeleris default database is installed.
If a database is detected, it will not be changed.

4. Click [Next]. The following window is displayed:
Figure 5-4 Xeleris 1.1 Installation Configuration – Screen 2
5. From the System Type drop-down menu, select the correspondent

option per site configuration. as follows:
a. NM Workstation - Applicable for sites that have only Nuclear
Medicine cameras. The Database size will be set up to 46 GB.

b. PET System Only - Applicable for sites that have any of the
following cameras PET, DLS, Discovery ST. The Database size will
be set up to 56 GB.
c. Combined NM & PET - Applicable for sites that have Nuclear
Medicine and PET, DLS, Discovery ST cameras. The Database size
will be set up to 56 GB.
6. For sites under HIPAA rules, select Use HIPAA, otherwise select
Don't Use HIPAA.
7. Select the desired help file language.
8. For additional basic system settings, while installing Xeleris 1.1, select
the applicable option as follows (use Table 5–7 below, as a guideline).
Table 5–7: Installation Options by Scenarios
HW Upgrade or New SW Upgrade on

Installation HP XW5000
Configure Windows networking 9 Automatically performed
Change default computer name 9 Automatically performed
Change regional settings 9 Automatically performed
Install additional network card Option Option
Add licenses 9 9
a. Add licenses - Before starting the Xeleris 1.1 software installation,

you will be prompted to insert a diskette (or CD) containing the
licenses files, depending on the computer model.
b. Configure Windows networking - Before starting the Xeleris 1.1
software installation, you will be prompted to enter the Network Site
IP Addresses.
If you are upgrading from Xeleris 1.0, refer to the RCCD report for
the parameters.
c. Change default computer name - Before starting the Xeleris 1.1
software installation, you will be prompted to change the
Computer Name.
If you are upgrading from Xeleris 1.0, refer to the RCCD report for
the parameters.
d. Change regional settings - Before starting the Xeleris 1.1 software
installation, you will be prompted to change the Regional
Settings.

e. Install additional network card - Before starting the Xeleris 1.1

software installation, you will be prompted to configure the Second
Network Card IP Address.
9. Click [Finish].
WARNINGS
If you have selected any of the Installation Options, you will be prompted to
reboot.
Do NOT restart the computer, until all the Xeleris 1.1 installation process has
completed.
Rebooting Xeleris 1.1 before installation is complete will cause a corrupted

Xeleris 1.1 software installation.
Do not remove the CD from the drive until after rebooting and Xeleris
appears.
10. If Configure Windows Networking was selected, the Network

Connection Window opens.
a. Right-click the first local area connection and select [Properties].
b. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP); then click [Properties].
c. Verify that Use the following IP address is selected.
d. Type the following addresses, as defined in the Pre-installation
checklist, or as recorded previously.
IP Address:
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway (Optional)

e. Under the Use the following DNS Server addresses, type the
following:
i Preferred DNS Server IP
ii If there is a Secondary DNS Server, enter its IP address in the
Alternative DNS Server IP.
f. Press [Advanced...].
g. Select the WINS tab.
i Press [Add...].
ii Type in WINS Server IP
iii Press [Add].
iv Repeat steps i to iii for any additional WINS Server.
h. Press [OK] to close the Advanced window.
i. At the Local Area Connection Properties window, click [OK];
then [Close].
j. Close the Network Connection Window.
Note If the At least one of the adapter cards has an empty primary Wins Address
message appears, click [Yes] to continue.
Note If the Network Setting Change message appears, click [No] to prevent computer
restart.
11. If Change default computer name was selected, the Network

window appears, with the Computer Name tab selected. Perform the
following procedure:
a. In the Computer Name tab, click the [Change] button.
b. Overwrite the default computer name by the new host name.
WARNING
Never change the Computer Name to XELERIS!!!
The name is limited to 17 characters: A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9 and "_".
Modifying the Computer Description will not change the Computer Name.
Important

c. Click [OK] and confirm the name changes message.

d. Click [OK].
Note If the System Setting Change message appears, click [No] to prevent computer
restart.
12. If Change regional settings was selected, the Regional and

Language Options window appears. Perform the following
procedure:
a. In the Regional Options tab, select the relevant language and
country.
b. Click [Customize...]; click the Date tab. then ensure that in the
Short date format field, the format: M/d/yyyy is selected. If it is
not available, type it in.
c. Click [OK] twice.
Wrong settings of country and date format may result in connectivity and
Important
study transfer problems.
13. If Install additional network card was selected, the Network

Connection Window opens.
a. Right-click the second local area connection and select
[Properties].
b. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP); then click [Properties].
c. Verify that Use the following IP address is selected.
d. Type the following addresses:
IP Address: aaa.bbb.ccc.xxx
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
where:
aaa.bbb.ccc correspond to the first three fields of the DST IP

address.
xxx should be identical to the last field in the local IP address.

e. Click [Apply] and confirm by clicking [OK].
f. Click [Close].
Note If the At least one of the adapter cards has an empty primary Wins Address
message appears, click [Yes] to continue.

Note If the Network Setting Change message appears, click [No] to prevent computer
restart.
14. If Install licenses was selected, the Install License window appears.
Insert the Xeleris 1.1 license diskette/CD, and click [Yes].
Note The Xeleris 1.1 Installation Configuration Utility installs the Xeleris 1.1 application;
the Xeleris 1.1 Help files; the Database (only if not already installed), and the InSite
software package. The entire process takes approx. 25-35 minutes (depending on
the PC platform, and on the existence of a previous database).
15. If you selected a language other than English, you will be prompted to
insert a language CD. Do the following:
a. Insert the appropriate language CD.
b. Confirm by clicking [OK] on the dialog that appears.
c. Wait for the help file installation to complete.
16. If you are prompted to restart the computer, click [Yes].
Login with
Username wsservice
Password #bigguy1
Note On the first Xeleris 1.1 activation (after installation/upgrade), the resizing database
process is performed. This may take between 25-40 minutes, depending on the
required database size, and computer platform.
Wait for the entire process to complete.
17. If you are performing a new system installation or a full upgrade, change
the Local Machine A.E. Title, as follows:
a. Minimize Xeleris, right-click the My Computer icon located on the
desktop, and select the Properties entry.
b. Record the Full Computer Name (not Computer Description) and
close the window, by clicking [Cancel].
c. Maximize Xeleris, click [System Setup] (the right most button on
the Main Navigation panel).
d. At the System Setup pop-up, click [Config...].
e. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Dicom tab.
f. At the Local Machine group, change the Application Entity, by
entering the recorded Computer Name in CAPITAL LETTERS.
g. Click [OK], and acknowledge Full Xeleris 1.1 shutdown, by clicking
[OK].
h. At the System setup window, click [OK].
i. Remove any media from drives.

18. If you are performing a software upgrade, change the A.E. Title to what
it was before the upgrade (as recorded during system parameter backup).
19. Reconnect the network cable if it was disconnected.
20. Double-click the iLinq Shell icon on the desktop.
21. At system prompt, type: setService <Enter>.
5.2.13 Installing the SW Add-On CD

1. Perform a Partial Xeleris Shutdown.
2. Insert the CD labeled with “Xeleris 1.1 Software Add-On version
1.1324” into the CD drive.
3. Browse to the CD root directory and double-click the Install.bat file.
4. Wait for the confirmation message and click [OK].
5. Wait for the Command Prompt (insite>) to open and type:
iipPatchAdd <Enter>.
6. When installation completes, close the window and start the Xeleris
application.
5.2.14 Verifying the Microphone is Enabled

1. Double-click the Speaker icon on the Windows Task bar.

The volume control dialog opens.
2. If the Microphone control box does not appear, click the Options
menu item. The Volume Control Properties dialog appears.
Check the Microphone checkbox and then click [OK].

3. Make sure that the Microphone controls now appear in the volume
control dialog.


5.2.15 Installing Norton AntiVirus
Note • The Xeleris 1.1 Workstation is shipped with Norton Anti-Virus CD for
WindowsXP. This SW is delivered with one year of free web update, after a
simple subscription process. It should be configured for daily scan for viruses.
• Live update is recommended at least once a week but can be defined
according to the customer workflow and local hospital policy.
• Live update method can be through the web site or media received from
Symantec according to the upgrade contract the customer signed with
Symantec.
• The following Norton Anti-Virus versions are approved and supported on
Xeleris 1.1 and are for WindowsXP.
NA2002OEM for XW5000
NA2004OEM for XW4100 and IBM T42
• Other Anti Virus SW should not be used on Xeleris 1.1 as they might damage
the functionality of the system.
• It is recommended that the customer purchase a Norton Anti-Virus update
contract (continuous subscription for virus definition table) by contacting the
Symantec local representative.
Note Live updates require Internet connection. In order to enable this feature, the Internet
Explorer needs to be configured. Refer to the procedure on page 14-4 of the
Operator Manual.
Installation of Norton AntiVirus on HP XW6200 consists of the following:

z Norton AntiVirus 2005 Software Installation and Configuration on
HP XW6200 on page 5-29
Installation of Norton AntiVirus on HP XW4100 and IBM T42 consists of

the following steps, to be performed in the given order:
z Norton AntiVirus 2004 Software Installation on HP XW4100 and
IBM T42 on page 5-38
z Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP XW4100 and
IBM T42 on page 5-44
Installation of Norton AntiVirus on HP XW5000 consists of the following

steps, to be performed in the given order:
z Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000 on
page 5-45
z Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2002 on HP XW5000 on
page 5-46

5.2.15.1 Norton AntiVirus 2005 Software Installation and Configuration on HP

XW6200
1. If not already done, perform Full Xeleris shutdown, stop all servers and
close all open windows.
2. Insert the Norton AntiVirus 2005 CD into the CD drive and wait for
the disk to "auto start".
Note If the Norton Installation disk does not start automatically, navigate to the current
CD-ROM drive and double click the file cdstart.exe located in the root directory
of the CD.
Figure 5-5 Norton Antivirus 2005 Installation - 1

The Norton Antivirus 2005 Setup screen will appear.
3. Click [Next] to continue the installation process.

4. At the Preinstall Scanner screen click [Next].
Do not press the [Start Scan] button.

5. At the Select the destination folder screen click [Next].
6. Wait for the installion program to finish coping the files.

7. Click the [Finish] button to restart the computer.

8. Logon as administrative user and click [Next].
Note At computer restart, a command line window will appear, starting the Xeleris
application. Close this window immediately by clicking the [x] button before Xeleris
is up in order not to receive Norton Antivirus warning messages. If you do get a
warning message, select ‘allow permanently’. Then, close Xeleris.
9. At the License Agreement screen, select I accept the license

agreement and click [Next].

10. At the registration screen, click the Register Later button.
11. At the Norton Antivirus Subscription screen, note the expiration

date and click [Next].

12. At the Security screen, click [Next].
13. At the Thank You screen, click [Finish].
14. The Live Update window will open. Click [Next] to begin the update
process.
Note In order to run Live Update, the Proxy Settings should be configured and the
computer should be connected to the Internet.

15. Wait for the Antivirus to finish scanning the computer for the first time.
16. Restart the computer.

When the main screen opens, click the [Option] button.

17. Navigate to Auto-Protect and then to Exculsions. Using the [New...]

button, add the following directories:
z D:\Einstein
z D:\Database
z C:\Temp\Xeleris
Verify that the subfolders are included.

18. Navigate to the Script Blocking screen (second item in the System
box) and uncheck the Enable Script Blocking (recommended)
option .
19. Click [OK].

20. Navigate to the Internet Worm Protection screen and uncheck the
Enable Internet worm protection (recommended) option.

21. Click [OK]. The Protection Alert screen will appear.

22. At the Protection Alert set the duration to Permanently and click
[OK].
23. Close the main program window.
5.2.15.2 Norton AntiVirus 2004 Software Installation on HP XW4100 and IBM T42
1. If necessary, perform Full Xeleris shutdown and close all open
windows.
2. Insert the Norton AntiVirus 2004 CD into the CD drive.
The following message appears:

3. Click [No]. The following screen appears:
4. Click Next. The following screen appears:
5. Click Next to verify Installation in the default path.

6. Click Next to start installation. An installation progress bar appears.

7. After successful installation, click Finish. The following screen

appears:
8. Click Next. The License Agreement screen appears:
9. Select I Accept the License Agreement.

10. Click Next. The Registration screen appears:
11. Choose a country, fill up the other fields if required and then click Next.
The following screen appears.
12. Enter your address details in the next registration window if required,
and then click Next. The Ready to send data screen appears.
13. Click Next.
If the following error message appears, you will need to configure your
Internet connection before proceeding.
14. Click Next in the Norton AntiVirus Subscription screen.

15. Accept (or modify) the Post Install tasks and then click Next.

The Configuring Norton AntiVirus screen appears and then a Summary

screen shows the summary of post install tasks and configuration
settings.
16. Click Finish. The Welcome to Live Update screen appears.

17. Click Configure. The Live Update Configuration screen appears.
18. Select the FTP tab:

a. Select I want to customize my settings for LiveUpdate, and
then enter details of the proxy server and port to be used.
b. Click Apply and then click OK.
19. Select the HTTP tab:

20. Proceed to Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP
XW4100 and IBM T42 on page 5-44 after removing the CD from the
drive.

5.2.15.3 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP XW4100 and

IBM T42
1. Double-click the Norton AntiVirus 2004 icon on the desktop.
2. In the Norton AntiVirus window, click [Next].
3. In the License Agreement window, choose the I accept the... radio
button; then click Next.
4. If you want to register your copy of Norton AntiVirus, click Next in the
Please Register window, and follow the instructions.
Otherwise, click Skip, and confirm by clicking Yes.
Note This window shows the expiration date of your copy of Norton AntiVirus.
5. Click Next to continue.
Note This window describes the actions that are required only after installation, as the
described in Section 5.2.15.2 on page 5-38.
6. If your station is connected to the Internet, we recommend running Live

Update. To perform this, choose the Run Live Update radio button.
Choose the Scan for Viruses radio button, and uncheck the
Schedule Weekly Scans...
Click Next to continue.

7. Click Finish to complete this section of configuration.
8. In the Live Update window, click Next.
9. Click Next, and wait for the process to complete...
10. In the Symantec Live Update window, click OK.
11. Click Finish; then OK to reboot.
12. Login to the system with:
Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
windows.
14. Double-click the Norton AntiVrus 2004 icon on your desktop.
15. Click [Options] at the upper side.

16. Choose Script Blocking available on the list at the left side of the
Norton AntiVirus Options window.
17. Unselect the Enable Script Blocking option, and click OK to
confirm.
18. Click the Scan for Viruses link on the left list in the window.
19. Click the Schedule icon at the lower right of the screen.
20. Define a new scanning schedule, by clicking New.
Our recommendation is for a Daily scan, starting at 1 a.m.

21. Click [OK] to confirm the new schedule.
22. For performing an immediate virus scan, click [Scan] at the bottom of
the window.
23. When the scan is completed, click [Finish].
24. Close the window by clicking x.
5.2.15.4 Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000
Please use the original Norton AntiVirus 2002 CD provided with the original
Important
XW5000 computer. Only the Norton AntiVirus 2002 SW should be used on
Xeleris1.1 running on HP XW5000 computer. Do not install other versions of Norton
AntiVirus or other anti virus SW.

windows.
2. Insert the Internet Security CD into the CD drive.
3. In the Compaq... Symantec window, ensure that the Install Norton
AntiVirus radio button is selected, and click OK.
4. In the Norton AntiVirus 2002 Setup window, click Next.
6. Click Next to start installation.
Note Installation in process...
7. Click Next in the Readme Information window.

8. Click Finish to finish installation.

9. Proceed to Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000

on page 5-45 after removing the CD from the drive.
5.2.15.5 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2002 on HP XW5000

5. Click Next to continue
described in Section 5.2.15.2 on page 5-38.

Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
windows.


confirm.
the window.

5.2.16 Completion
Table 5–8: Completion Overview
Steps Time (Min.) Reference
Mount Rating Plate(s) 5 Section 5.2.16.1
Clean Area 5 Section 5.2.16.2.
Complete Product Locators 5 Section 5.2.16.3
Total 15
5.2.16.1 Rating Plates
5.2.16.1.1 Description
Each Xeleris 1.1 workstation is delivered with all software and licenses
loaded onto the workstation. Since software can change independent of any
hardware modification, the software is serialized with its own rating plate
and tracked by the Product Locator. This process allows for software only
field modifications and preserves traceability of software revisions and
options at each site.
5.2.16.1.2 Procedure for Units with an Isolation Transformer
For units with an Isolation Transformer, attach the rating plate for the Xeleris
Base Application Software Set Software Option to the side of the isolation
transformer. See Locating Rating Plate, Figure 5-22.
Xeleris Rating
Plate Location
Figure 5-22 Locating Rating Plate

5.2.16.1.3 Procedure for Units Without an Isolation Transformer
For units without an Isolation transformer, attach the rating plate for the Basic
Xeleris Application Software Set to the Xeleris 1.1 CD-ROM software jewel
case.
5.2.16.2 Cabling
Tidy up all cables paying particular attention to the rear of the Workstation,
particularly the rear interconnection panel.
External cabling should also receive attention and be neatly finished, using
cable ties as necessary.
5.2.16.3 Completing the Paperwork
Complete all Product Locator Cards supplied with the system and options.
Please complete the Installation Audit Form supplied with the unit.
Return together with Installation Card to:

Locator File W-523
General Electric Medical Systems
P O Box 414
Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 USA
Note If all the Product Locator cards are not returned, then the system will not be
configured correctly in the Product Locator database. This will result in the manual
distribution of any software upgrades.

5.2.17 Adding HIPAA Users
Note This section is relevant only for sites that need to comply with HIPAA requirements.
The following procedure should be performed for every User.

1. Minimize Xeleris.
2. Double-click the Service Folder icon on the desktop.
3. Double-click the User Administrator icon (Figure 5-23).
Figure 5-23 User Administrator

4. In the HIPAA Administrator dialog, click [User Manager]

(Figure 5-24).
Figure 5-24 User Manager
5. Select the USER folder and right-click.

6. Click [New User...] (Figure 5-25).
Figure 5-25 New User

7. In the New User dialog, enter the user name and password
(Figure 5-26):
Figure 5-26 User Name and Password
a. Username – the new user name

b. Password – the password to be used by this user (must be 8
characters)
c. Confirm Password – the same password as above, for validation
purposes.
d. Deselect (uncheck) User Must Change Password at Next
Login.
e. Select (check) Password Never Expires.
8. Click [Create].
9. Repeat Steps 6-8 for every new user you wish to add.
10. Click [Close].

11. Select the Groups folder (Figure 5-27).
Figure 5-27 Groups

12. Double-click the Administrators group. (Figure 5-28).
Figure 5-28 Administrator Properties
13. Click [Add]. The Select Users dialog appears (Figure 5-29).
Figure 5-29 Select Users

14. Click the [Advanced...] button (Figure 5-30).
Figure 5-30 Select User Advanced

15. Click [Find Now]. The User List will be displayed (Figure 5-31)
Figure 5-31 User List
16. Select all the users that you added and click [OK].
17. Click [OK] to close the Select Users dialog.
18. Click [OK] to close the Administrator Properties dialog.
19. Repeat steps 12 to 18 for the Workstation Users group.
20. Close the Local Users and Groups by selecting Exit from the File
drop-down menu.
21. Click [Close] in the HIPAA Administrator dialog.
22. Close the Service Folder by selecting Close from the File drop-down
menu or by clicking [x] in the right corner of the dialog.

5.2.18 Installing Software Options
Install software options for the following configurations:

z For sites using NRP or ARG, follow the instructions in Chapter 5 –
Installations and Upgrades, and then continue with Section 5.2.19 –
Xeleris 1.1 Configuration on page 5-58.
z For other site configurations, continue with Section 5.2.19 – Xeleris
1.1 Configuration on page 5-58.
Note Upon completion of this section, proceed with Section 5.2.19 – Xeleris 1.1
Configuration on page 5-58.
5.2.19 Xeleris 1.1 Configuration

1. To complete the Xeleris 1.1 installation and configuration process,
perform the following procedures in the given order:
Note When required to insert configuration information, refer to the data in the printed /
backed-up SystemInfoReport file, if exists.
z Section 6.2.2 – Importing (Restoring) Information from Previous

Configuration on page 6-5
z Section 6.2.3 – General Configuration (mandatory) on page 6-6
z Section 6.2.5 – Archive Configuration on page 6-9
z Section 6.2.6 – Printer Configuration on page 6-12
z Section 6.2.7 – Database Configuration on page 6-74
Section 6.2.7.2 – Remote Database Access by Modem on
page 6-77
z Section 6.2.8 – DICOM Configuration on page 6-91
z Section 6.2.9.1 – Configuring the Xeleris on Remote OSI Stations on
page 6-97
z Section 6.2.10 – Configuring DST (SMV) Systems (STP3) on
page 6-101
z Section 6.2.11 – Configuring Vision (optional) on page 6-104
z Section 6.2.12 – Configuring Foreign DB (Optional) on page 6-110
z Section 6.2.13 – Configuring Foreign Link (Optional) on page 6-112

z Section 6.2.14 – Export/Import Remote Station Configuration on

page 6-128
z Section 6.2.15 – Backup on page 6-129
Section 5.5.1.3 – eNTEGRA Licenses Backup on page 5-90
For systems in sites that have an active InSite capability (refer to
Section 6.3.1.1 – InSite Prerequisites on page 6-151), proceed
with Section 6.3.1 – InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite
connection) on page 6-151
z Section 6.2.17 – Setting the Favorite Applications on page 6-140
z Section 6.2.18 – Configuring the Task In-box on page 6-141
z If the site is under HIPAA rules, show the Site Administrator how to
create and delete User Accounts, as per Chapter 14 – Maintaining
User Accounts in the Xeleris 1.1 Operator Manual.
5.2.20 Functional Checks
This section lists functional checks to verify that the Xeleris 1.1 system is
working properly, as described below. Once all Functional Checks are
completed, send the Installation Report to GE.
z Section 7.1 – Processing Validation on page 7-2, including:
Section 7.1.1 – Checking the Availability of Licensed Options on
page 7-2
Section 7.1.2 – Running an Application on page 7-2
z Section 7.2 – Printing Tests on page 7-3
Section 7.2.1 – Checking the Default Hardcopy Device on
page 7-3
Section 7.2.2 – Checking Other Hardcopy Devices on page 7-4
z Section 7.3 – Archiving Checks on page 7-5
Section 7.3.1 – Archiving Data on an Optical Cartridge / DVD
on page 7-5, if available
Section 7.3.2 – Archiving Data to a CD-R/RW on page 7-6
Section 7.3.3 – Checking the Archive History Log on page 7-7
Section 7.3.4 – Retrieving and Reviewing an Archived Study on
page 7-8
z Section 7.4 – Checking the In-Box Functionality on page 7-9
Section 7.4.1 – Recording an In-Box Task on page 7-9
Section 7.4.2 – Starting the Queued In-box Task on page 7-10
z Section 7.5 – Checking the Color Maps on page 7-11

z Section 7.6 – Review Template Test on page 7-12

z Section 7.7 – Connectivity Tests on page 7-13
Section 7.7.1 – Viewing and Retrieving Data from the Central
Database on page 7-13
Section 7.7.2 – Checking DICOM Transfer on page 7-14
Section 7.7.3 – Checking the OSI Connectivity on page 7-15
Section 7.7.4 – Checking Connectivity With DST Scanners on
page 7-16
Section 7.7.5 – Vision on page 7-17
Section 7.7.6 – Foreign DB on page 7-19
Section 7.7.7 – Foreign Link on page 7-20

Installations and Upgrades Installing Software Options
5.3 Installing Software Options
5.3.1 Installing and Configuring ARG (Optional)
Note If the ARG package is already installed, proceed directly to Section 5.3.1.2 – ARG
Configuration on page 5-61.
The Automatic Report Generator (ARG) for QGS and QPS is used for
generating reports in PDF format. It can be used only by users that have the
QGS and QPS license, as well as the ARG license (csautoreport).
5.3.1.1 ARG Installation

1. After logon perform Xeleris Full Shutdown.
Make sure that the Xeleris 1.1 Install CD in the CD-ROM.
Run script: E:\Options\ARG\InstallARG.vbs (while E: is your CD-
ROM drive).
The script installs the MySQL software, followed by the installation of
MyODBC.
2. At the Welcome window, click [Next].
3. At the Information window, click [Next].
4. At the Choose Destination window, verify that C:\mysql is the
destination folder, and click [Next].
5. Ensure that Typical is selected, and click [Next].
Important 6. Restart the computer.
7. Proceed with Section 5.3.1.2 – ARG Configuration on page 5-61.
5.3.1.2 ARG Configuration

1. Double-click the ARG Administration icon on the desktop.
2. Login with
Username admin
Password Leave empty
3. At the Admin menu, choose the User Manager option.
4. In the ARG User Manager window, click [Add...]

5. At the User Properties window, add the User Account of the

desired physician.
Note Add users for signing physicians ONLY.
a. At the General tab type the Login Name.

The Login Name must not contain any spaces.
b. Type the Full Name.
c. In the User Level menu, select Signing Physician.
d. Click [Change Password].
e. Type the New Password; then type it again to confirm.
f. Click [OK].
Note The following step requires a scanned image (jpeg format) of the physician’s
signature.
g. For entering the physician’s signature into the system, select the
Signature tab; then click [Change], and select a jpeg image of the
scanned signature.
h. Click [OK].
6. To add more physicians repeat Step 4 through Step 5.
7. Click [Close] to close the User Manager window.
8. At the Admin menu, choose the Site Manager option.
9. In the ARG Site Manager window, click [Add...]
a. The Site Properties dialog opens. At the General tab, type the
Name of the site, and the Long Name of the site.
b. At the Image tab, click [Change], and browse for a JPEG image of
the site logo (when available).
c. Click [OK].
10. Still in the Site Manager, select all other sites (e.g. the sample site) and
remove them by clicking [Remove], and clicking [Yes].
11. Click [Close] to close the Site Manager window.
12. At the Admin menu, choose the Global Preferences... option.
a. At the Information field, type the department name and phone
numbers
(e.g., Cardiology Fax: (800) 555-1212 Phone: (800) 555-1212)

b. Click [OK].
13. Close the ARG Administration window.
14. If you were referred to this during the Xeleris 1.1 installation/upgrade,
return to Step 1 in Section 5.2.19 – Xeleris 1.1 Configuration on
page 5-58.
5.3.2 Installing and Configuring NRP
Note Relevant only for sites that purchased the Emory Autoreport NRP option.
The NRP is the reporting software for the ECToolbox, which is a cardiac
NM/PET processing software.
Activating the NRP from the ECToolbox Xeleris protocol requires the
emoryautoreport license file (clinical use).
5.3.2.1 NRP Installation
The NRP is automatically installed with the Xeleris 1.1 installation.
Note At this stage, please check to make sure that you have the Windows default
printer correctly defined. If this printer is not defined, the system will issue
repeated warning messages.
5.3.2.2 Setting Site Preferences

1. Perform Full Xeleris shutdown.
2. Double-click the NRP Administration icon on the desktop.
Note If the default printer in not installed acknowledge twice the “Print Error” message
3. Login with
Username admin
Password heart
If this is the initial prompt, change the password.
4. Select [Connect]
5. From the Admin menu, select the Edit Site Preferences option.

6. At the lower left of the Report Templates tab, select Template from
the Load Template for site... drop down box.
7. Modify the header information to reflect the requirements of the nuclear
Lab. Standard word processing features are available in order to
customize the look.
8. When the modifications are complete be sure to click [Save] at the
bottom of the screen.
Note This procedure (Step 6 through Step 8) can be repeated for each of the five other
templates listed in the Load Template for site... drop down box, at the lower left of
the screen.
In each case be sure to click [Save].
9. When all templates have been loaded, click [Done].
5.3.2.3 Adding Physicians

3. Login with
Username admin
Password heart
You may change this password if required.
4. Click on the Schedule button (large square button at center of screen).
The Search For Report and Patients screen is displayed.
5. Click in the Referring MD text box (lower left of screen); then, type the
first few letters of the last name of the physician, and press <Enter>.
If the name matches an entry in the database, the system completes it.
If there is no match, you are prompted to create a new MD.

6. Click [OK].
7. Fill in the information (i.e., Last Name, First Name and any additional
information).
If the physician job description includes reviewing nuclear studies, click

the applicable check boxes in the MD Status area.
If the newly created physician is not a reviewer, no check boxes have to

be selected.

8. Click the Accept button.

The physician’s name is added to the drop-down list in the report area,
making it easier for the lab technician to select the appropriate reviewing
physician.
5.3.2.4 Site Protocol Defaults

3. Login with
Username admin
Password heart
You may change this password if required.
4. Select the Edit Site Preferences item from the Admin menu.
5. Click the Site Setup tab at the top of the page.
6. In the sites area (upper left) choose the template that will be used as the
default (usually Template1), and click the Default button.
7. Click [OK].
8. Under the selected template, select the corresponding
NRP_Report_Template.
For example, if Template1 was selected, you have to select
NRP_Template1.4W7.
z The default protocol and default exercise protocol are automatically
selected, when a new report is created.
9. Click the Save Setup button (bottom middle) to save the newly defined
defaults.
10. Click [Done].

Installations and Upgrades Upgrading From Xeleris 1.0
5.4 Upgrading From Xeleris 1.0
Two upgrade procedures are described in the following sections:

z Section 5.4.1, Full Upgrade
z Section 5.4.2 – Software Update on HP on page 5-75
5.4.1 Full Upgrade
Note Make sure that the monitor is connected to Outlet #1 on the new computer.
At the end of this procedure, fill in the Deinstallation form of the Product Locator
Important
Card (PLC), and send it accordingly.
Scope:
Applicable when an installed Xeleris 1.0 system is to be replaced by an Xeleris
1.1 system, running on an HP XW4100 or HP XW6200.
Prerequisites:
z HP XW 4100 or HP XW6200 PC Platform with the Operating System
installed
z Xeleris 1.1 basic license package
z Software package, including the released version of Xeleris 1.1.
z Formatted diskette (optional)
z Blank CD-RW (optional)
Procedure Overview:
The current computer will be replaced by an HP XW4100 or HP XW6200

and the Hardware devices will be transferred to the new computer.
Xeleris 1.1 will be installed on the HP computer. After completing the
installation the previously used PC shall be turned over to GE by using
Chapter 10 – Component Return Kit Procedure.
z Archiving Patient Data
z Section 5.4.1.2 – Backing Up Xeleris 1.0 Configuration on page 5-68
z Section 5.4.1.3 – Xeleris 1.0 Licenses Backup on page 5-69
z Section 5.4.1.4 – Recording Xeleris 1.0 Parameters on page 5-70
z Section 5.4.1.5 – Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1 on page 5-73

z Section 5.4.1.6 – Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1 on page 5-73
5.4.1.1 Full Upgrade from Xeleris 1.0 Flowchart
Section 5.4.1.2, Backing Up Xeleris 1.0 Configuration
Section 5.4.1.3, Xeleris 1.0 Licenses Backup
Section 5.4.1.4, Recording Xeleris 1.0 Parameters
Section 5.4.1.5, Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1
Transfer Hard- Yes Section 5.4.1.6, Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1

ware Devices?
No

XPert Patch
Yes
No
Adding HIPAA Yes

users
No
Software Yes
Options?
No
Send Installation Report to GE
Figure 5-32 Upgrading from Xeleris 1.0 Flowchart

5.4.1.2 Backing Up Xeleris 1.0 Configuration
Before upgrading Xeleris 1.1 hardware, you are required to backup the Xeleris
1.0 configuration details. This can be done by performing the procedure
below.
WARNING
After an Xeleris 1.0 backup is completed, check that the backup file was
successfully stored in the chosen medium.
1. Double-click the Xeleris Config icon on the desktop; then, at the

Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Backup/Restore tab.
2. Verify that the Backup radio button is selected.
3. Using the [Browse...] button, browse to a suitable network folder, and
click [OK].
4. Check that all the available options are selected, except the Archive
Index option; then click [Backup].
5. When the Backup completed successfully message appears,
acknowledge it by clicking [OK].
6. Click [OK] to close the Configuration utility.
7. If the Perform Full Xeleris shutdown message appears, click [OK].
8. Double-click the Stop Servers icon on the desktop, and wait until the
Xeleris shell closes.
11. Check the Archive Index option, then click [Backup].
Note During the above procedure, two backup files are created at
E:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup\Xeleris_YYYYMMDD_HHMMmmm.tar.Z
one with all options except the archive log and one with the archive log only.

5.4.1.3 Xeleris 1.0 Licenses Backup
Copy the Xeleris 1.0 licenses as follows:

1. Insert a formatted empty diskette labeled Licences Backup into the
floppy drive.
2. Double-click My Computer icon on the desktop.
3. Browse to D:\Einstein\Licences.
4. Select all the files by pressing <Ctrl><A>.
5. Drop down the Edit menu and select the Copy entry.
7. Double-click 3½ Floppy (A:).
8. Drop–down the Edit menu and select the Paste entry.
9. Wait for the copy process to finish.
10. Remove the Licences Backup diskette from the floppy drive.
Note While installing the Xeleris1.1 system, you will be prompted to install the
Xeleris1.1 licenses.
The basic license for Xeleris1.1 is a new license key and can be found in the
eLicense website at:
http://egems.gehealthcare.com/elicense/index.jsp
After getting Xeleris1.1 licenses, add them to the abovementioned Licenses
Backup Diskette.
For more details on working with Xeleris licenses, refer to Section 8.15 – Working
with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB on page 8-20.

5.4.1.4 Recording Xeleris 1.0 Parameters

z Section 5.4.1.4.1 – Recording System Parameters on page 5-70
z Section 5.4.1.4.2 – Recording Hardcopy Setup (only if manual
changes were done in the HCdefaults.win32 file) on page 5-73
5.4.1.4.1 Recording System Parameters

2. Double-click the SystemInfoReport file to create the report, and wait
until the shell window is closed.
3. Double-click the SystemInfoReport.txt file to display the report.
4. If the system was checked out for InSite remote connection, proceed as
follows:
a. Double-click the RCCD file to create the report, and wait until the
shell window is closed.
b. Double-click the RCCD.txt file to display the report.
Important
Print or save the SystemInfoReport.txt and the RCCD.txt files.
The files contain information that is used for restoring Xeleris 1.1: Configuring
Windows networking, Changing the default computer name, Installing additional
network card options, and also for troubleshooting.

5. Write down all Windows Printers configurations as follows:

a. Select Start > Settings > Printers.
Figure 5-33 Printers and Faxes
b. Right-click a printer and select Properties. The General tab

opens.
c. Write down all the settings in the Features box.

d. Select the Ports tab.
e. If the printer is connected through a TCP/IP port, write down the IP

Address.
f. Repeat steps b to d for all installed printers.

5.4.1.4.2 Recording Hardcopy Setup

(only if manual changes were done in the HCdefaults.win32 file)
1. For systems where manual changes were performed in the following file:
D:\einstein\einstein_Project\exe\config\HCdefault.win32
2. Write down the changed parameters to restore them after Xeleris 1.1 is
upgraded.
5.4.1.4.3 Recording Xeleris 1.0 System Files
1. The following directories and files should be backed up on the network:

z C:\ArcLog – the system archiving index
z C:\mysql\data – only if the ARG option is installed
z D:\Einstein\Einstein_user\resources\PrintTemplates
z D:\Einstein\Einstein_user\resources\Headers
z D:\Einstein\Einstein_user\resources\Favorites.txt
z D:\Einstein\Einstein_user\resources\FavoriteApps.txt
2. Write down the local A.E. Title as shown in the DICOM tab of
Xeleris Configuration dialog.
5.4.1.5 Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1

1. Shut down the computer.
2. Remove the keyed activator from the parallel port on the rear panel of
the Xeleris 1.0. In case of a local connected printer, remove the printer
connector as well.
3. Plug the keyed activator into the parallel port on the rear panel of the
Xeleris 1.1. In case of a local connected printer, you plug the printer
into the activator.
5.4.1.6 Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1
Tower.
In case hardware devices have to be transferred from theXeleris 1.0 to the

Xeleris 1.1, perform the following procedures:.
z Section 5.4.1.6.1 – Transferring the Optical Drive on page 5-74
z Section 5.4.1.6.2 – Transferring the 2nd Network Card on page 5-74

5.4.1.6.1 Transferring the Optical Drive
1. Verify that the Xeleris 1.0 system is shut down.

2. Remove the PC cover. Refer to the PC User’s Guide to remove the
Optical Drive from the Xeleris 1.0.
3. In the Xeleris 1.1 computer, insert the Optical Disk into the empty slot,
and fasten in place using the internal drives bracket. Refer to the PC
User’s Guide.
Note The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you transfer the MOD
device to XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller, as described in
Section 4.2.
4. Connect the internal power cable and SCSI flat cable to the connectors
on the back of the drive. All connectors are keyed to ensure that they are
inserted correctly.
5. Reassemble the PC cover.
Note • For additional hardware configuration information, see Section 4.3.1.1 –

Installing and Configuring the Sony EOD on page 4-6.
• The SCSI jumpers in the Pioneer device differs between Xeleris 1.0 and Xeleris
1.1, as defined in the link above.
5.4.1.6.2 Transferring the 2nd Network Card
Note The second network card is intended to connect the Xeleris 1.1 to a second network
environment, such as Discovery ST systems, PET, etc.
1. Verify that the system is shut down.

2. Remove the PC cover, if necessary. Refer to the PC User’s Guide.
3. Release the bracket of PCI Slot 3, insert the NIC card and secure it.
4. Reassemble the PC cover
5.4.1.7 Continuing the Xeleris 1.1 Installation

Continue with Section 5.2.12 – Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software on
page 5-17. Perform the steps in that section on the computer running Xeleris
1.1.

5.4.2 Software Update on HP
Scope
Applicable when Xeleris 1.1 is installed on an HP XW5000 running Xeleris
1.0.
Prerequisites
z HP XW5000
z Xeleris 1.1 basic package licenses
z HP XW5000 recovery CD
z Formatted diskette/CD (optional)
Note The basic licenses for Xeleris1.1 can be found in the eLicense website at:
After getting Xeleris1.1 licenses, put them on a diskette and add them during
Xeleris1.1 installation.

5.4.2.1 Software Upgrade from Xeleris 1.0 Flowchart
Section 5.4.2.2, Automatic Backup of Xeleris 1.0 Configuration
Section 5.4.2.3, Disconnecting the Computer from the Network
Section 5.4.2.4, Installing the Windows XP Operating System
Section 5.4.2.5, Installing the Add-On CD
Section 5.4.2.6, Verifying the Microphone is Enabled
Section 5.7, Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade
Figure 5-34 Software Upgrade on XW5000 Flowchart

5.4.2.2 Automatic Backup of Xeleris 1.0 Configuration

1. Close the Xeleris Application and restart the computer.
2. Login to the system as:

User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1
3. Close the Xeleris application.
4. Double-click on the Stop Servers icon, located on the desktop and wait for
the operation to end.
5. Insert the Xeleris 1.1 Application CD into the CD drive.
The system will detect the old version and display a message:
Figure 5-35 Automatic Backup 1
6. Click [Yes]. The automatic backup procedure will start.

7. If the WBEM install wizard opens, Click [Next]:

8. When the WBEM installation is complete Click [Finish].

9. At the reboot confirmation message, Click [Cancel].
10. The automatic backup will start, displaying the following message:
During the backup procedure,the following files are backed up on

Drive D:\
z C:\ArcLog - the system archiving index
z C:\mysql\data - only if the ARG option is installed
Windows printers settings are written into the SystemInfoReport.txt

file.
The following settings are backed up on Drive D:\

z Windows network settings
z Computer Name
z Regional Settings

z User List
When file backup is complete, the following message will be displayed:
The Xeleris Configuration window will automatically open, showing the

Backup/Restore tab.
11. Make sure that there are checkmarks in all checkboxes, except the
Review Templates.
Click the [Backup] buttons for configuration, IIP and licenses.

12. When all backup operations are complete, close Xeleris Configuration
window.
13. After backup is complete, Drive C:\ is searched for files that may be
user files, such as Word documents, Excel sheets and PowerPoint
presentations.
14. Click [Yes] to display the list on screen.

This allows the user to backup his own work before Drive C:\ is
overwrtten by the installation.
15. After the automatic backup is complete, write down the Windows Printer
settings as follows:

opens.



Address.
f. Repeat steps b to e for all installed printers.
5.4.2.3 Disconnecting the Computer from the Network
Disconnect the network cable(s) from the RJ45 connector(s) on the rear panel
of the computer.

5.4.2.4 Installing the Windows XP Operating System
Note If not already done, perform Backup of all data, including Backup of the Xeleris 1.1
configuration, if possible. Refer to Section 6.2.15 – Backup on page 6-129.
1. Power up the system, if needed, insert the Xeleris O.S. Recovery CD

on HP-XW5000 Recovery CD, and restart the computer.
2. Wait until the system boots, and the following screen is displayed:
============================================
Recovery CD for Xeleris Workstation
for the HP-XW5000 Workstation
============================================
1. Restore system only (C:) - Default
5. Restore system and data (C: and D:)
9. Exit
3. Type 1 to restore only drive C: – this means that the Operating System
installation will be recovered to the same state it was supplied by the
Manufacturing Department, and if there is an installed database, it will
not be affected.
• Do not type 5 which will cause the loss of all data currently on the system,
Important
including the Xeleris 1.1 database and all configuration parameters.
• If you want to abort type 9; then reboot the system
4. Acknowledge initiation of the Restore process, by typing Y twice; then

wait for the process to finish.
5. Remove the Recovery CD from the drive, and restart the computer, by
pressing <Alt><Ctrl><Del>.
User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1
7. Click [OK].
If there are Hardware Options installed, Windows will detect them automatically.
Important
In some cases, the HW detection message may appear even if no new HW options
are installed. If this happens, rebooting the computer is needed. The system will
prompt for this.
Note If the Invalid Display Settings window opens, click [OK], and adjust the
display properties, by referring to Section 9.14 – Adjusting the Display Properties
on page 9-16; then proceed with the next step.

If the Limited Virtual Memory pop-up message appears, click [OK], and
Important
proceed with Section 9.5 – Assigning Drive Letters on page 9-6.
8. Verify that all drive letters are correct, as described in Assigning Drive
Letters on page 9-6.
9. Verify that the Virtual Memory settings are correct, as described in
Setting the Virtual Memory on page 9-10.
5.4.2.5 Installing the Add-On CD

1. Insert the Add-On CD into the CD drive.
A message will appear, detailing the content of the Add-On CD to be

installed.
2. Confirm the installation by clicking [Yes].
3. When prompted, click [Yes] to restart the computer.
Note Installation of the Add-On CD takes about 5 to 20 minutes to complete depending

on the computer model.
If you perform the installation on a Laptop, it cannot be completed if the

Laptop is not connected to power supply (i.e. running on battery).
Make sure that the Laptop is connected to power supply before starting the
Add-On CD installation.
5.4.2.6 Verifying the Microphone is Enabled


Ckeck the Microphone checkbox and then click [OK].

control dialog .
5.4.2.7 Continuing the Installation Procedure
Continue with Section 5.7 – Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade on

page 5-108.
Perform the steps in that section on the computer running Xeleris 1.1.

Installations and Upgrades Upgrading From eNTEGRA 2.5
5.5 Upgrading From eNTEGRA 2.5
5.5.1 Full Upgrade

Important
Scope:
Applicable when an installed eNTEGRA 2.5 system is to be replaced by an
Xeleris 1.1 system, running on an HP XW4100 or HP XW6200.
Prerequisites:
z HP XW 4100 or HP XW 6200 PC Platform with the Operating System
installed
z Xeleris 1.1 basic license package
Procedure Overview:
The current computer will be replaced by an HP XW4100 or HP XW6200

and the Hardware devices will be transferred to the new computer. Xeleris
1.1 will be installed on the new computer. After completing the installation
the previously used PC shall be turned over to GE by using Chapter 10 –
Component Return Kit Procedure.
z Archiving Patient Data
z Section 5.5.1.2 – Backing Up eNTEGRA Configuration on page 5-89
z Section 5.5.1.3 – eNTEGRA Licenses Backup on page 5-90
z Section 5.5.1.4 – Recording eNTEGRA Parameters on page 5-91
z Section 5.5.1.5 – Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1 on page 5-92
z Section 5.5.1.6 – Transferring HW devices to Xeleris 1.1 on page 5-92

5.5.1.1 Flowchart
Section 5.5.1.2, Backing Up eNTEGRA Configuration
Section 5.5.1.3, eNTEGRA Licenses Backup
Section 5.5.1.4, Recording eNTEGRA Parameters
Section 5.5.1.5, Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1
Transfer Hard- Yes Section 5.5.1.6, Transferring HW devices to Xeleris

ware Devices?
No

XPert Patch
Yes
No
Adding HIPAA Yes

users
No
Software Yes
Options?
No
Send Installation Report to GE
Figure 5-43 Upgrading from eNTEGRA 2.5 Flowchart

5.5.1.2 Backing Up eNTEGRA Configuration
Before upgrading Xeleris 1.1 hardware, you are required to backup the
eNTEGRA 2.5 configuration details. This can be done by performing the
procedure below.
WARNING
After an eNTEGRA installation is completed, check that the backup file was
successfully stored in the chosen medium.
5.5.1.2.1 Backing up on CD-R or CD-RW
1. Double-click the eNTEGRA Config icon on the desktop; then, at the

Entegra Configuration dialog, click the Backup/Restore tab.
3. Insert a formatted CD-R labeled Xeleris 1.1 Configuration Backup,
Version Number, Backup Date into the CD drive
The AdaptecCD Wizard opens with the DirectCD Disc Ready
notification. Click [OK] to acknowledge and proceed to Step 4, below.
4. Using the [Browse...] button, browse to the CD drive, and click [OK].
5. Check that all the available options are selected, except the Archive
Index option; then click [Backup].
8. If the Perform Full eNTEGRA shutdown message appears, click
[OK].
eNTEGRA shell closes.
10. Double-click the eNTEGRA Config icon on the desktop; then, at the
Entegra Configuration dialog, click the Backup/Restore tab.
12. Check all the available options (including the Archive Index option);
then click [Backup].


Note During the above procedure, two backup files are created at
E:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup\eNTEGRA_YYYYMMDD_HHMMmmm.tar.Z
one with all options except the archive log and one with the archive log only.
14. Press the <Eject> button on the CD recorder drive, and remove it from
the drive.
The AdaptecCD Wizard opens with the Eject Disc dialog.
For a CD-R/W, proceed directly to Step 15.
Click the radio button next to Organize the disc so that it can be
read in most standard CD-ROM drives under... and click
[Finish].
15. When the CD-R is ejected, remove it from the drive.
5.5.1.3 eNTEGRA Licenses Backup
If you are upgrading to an XW4100 computer, copy the eNTEGRA

licenses as follows:
floppy drive.

Note While installing the Xeleris1.1 system, you will be prompted to install the
Xeleris1.1 licenses.
The basic license for Xeleris1.1 is a new license key and can be found in the
eLicense website at:
After getting Xeleris1.1 licenses, add them to the abovementioned Licenses
Backup Diskette.
If you are upgrading to an XW6200 computer, copy the eNTEGRA

licenses as follows:
Note The XW6200 computer does not have a floppy drive. License backup must be
performed using a CD.

3. Burn a CD with the contents of the licenses directory.
5.5.1.4 Recording eNTEGRA Parameters

z Section 5.5.1.4.1 – Recording System Parameters on page 5-91
z Section 5.5.1.4.2 – Recording Hardcopy Setup (only if manual
changes were done in the HCdefaults.win32 file) on page 5-92
5.5.1.4.1 Recording System Parameters

4. If the system was checked out for InSite remote connection, proceed as
follows:
a. Double-click the RCCD file to create the report, and wait until the
shell window is closed.

b. Double-click the RCCD.txt file to display the report.
Important
Print or save the SystemInfoReport.txt and the RCCD.txt files.
The files contain information that is used for restoring Xeleris 1.1: Configuring
Windows networking, Changing the default computer name, Installing additional
network card options, and also for troubleshooting.
5.5.1.4.2 Recording Hardcopy Setup (only if manual changes were done in the HCdefaults.win32
file)
1. For systems where manual changes were performed in the following file:
D:\einstein\einstein_Project\exe\config\HCdefault.win32
2. Write down the changed parameters to restore them after Xeleris 1.1 is
upgraded.
5.5.1.5 Transferring Activator to Xeleris 1.1

1. Shut down the computer.
2. Remove the keyed activator from the parallel port on the rear panel of
the eNTEGRA. In case of a local connected printer, remove the printer
connector as well.
3. Plug the keyed activator into the parallel port on the rear panel of the
Xeleris 1.1. In case of a local connected printer, you plug the printer
into the activator.
Tower.
In case hardware devices have to be transferred from the eNTEGRA 2.5 to

the Xeleris 1.1, perform the following procedures:.
z Transferring the Optical Drive on page 5-92
z Transferring the 2nd Network Card on page 5-93
1. Verify that the eNTEGRA system is shut down.

Optical Drive from the eNTEGRA.

User’s Guide.
Note The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you transfer the MOD
device to XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller, as described in
Section 4.2.
inserted correctly.
Note • For additional hardware configuration information, see Section 4.3.1.1 –

Installing and Configuring the Sony EOD on page 4-6.
• The SCSI jumpers in the Pioneer device differs between eNTEGRA 2.5 and
Xeleris 1.1, as defined in the link above.

4. Reassemble the PC cover
5.5.1.7 Continuing the Xeleris 1.1 Installation

Continue with Section 5.2.12 – Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software on
page 5-17. Perform the steps in that section on the computer running Xeleris
1.1.
5.5.2 Software Upgrade on HP

Scope
Applicable when Xeleris 1.1 is installed on an HP XW5000 running
eNTEGRA.
Prerequisites
z HP XW5000


z HP XW5000 recovery CD
Note The basic licenses for Xeleris1.1 can be found in the eLicense website at:
After getting Xeleris1.1 licenses, put them on a diskette and add them during
Xeleris1.1 installation.
5.5.2.1 Flowchart
Section 5.5.2.2, Full Shutdown of the eNTEGRA Application
Section 5.5.2.3, Automatic Backup of eNTEGRA Configuration
Section 5.5.2.4, Disconnecting the Computer from the Network
Section 5.5.2.5, Installing the Windows XP Operating System
Section 5.5.2.6, Installing the Add-On CD
Section 5.5.2.7, Verifying the Microphone is Enabled
Section 5.5.2.8, Resizing the Database
Section 5.5.2.9, Continuing the Installation Procedure
Figure 5-44 Software Upgrading on XW5000 Flowchart

5.5.2.2 Full Shutdown of the eNTEGRA Application

1. From the Main eNTEGRA screen, click the [X] (shutdown) button at the
upper right corner of the screen.
2. At the opened dialog, click [Full].
3. Wait until the eNTEGRA application and its servers are closed.
eNTEGRA shell closes.
5.5.2.3 Automatic Backup of eNTEGRA Configuration

1. Close the eNTEGRA Application and restart the computer.

User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1
3. Close the eNTEGRA application.




Drive D:\
z C:\ArcLog - the system archiving index

file.

z Computer Name
z Regional Settings
z User List

Backup/Restore tab.
Review Templates.

window.
presentations.

b. Right-click a printer and select Properties. The General tab opens.


Address.

of the computer.
5.5.2.5 Installing the Windows XP Operating System
Note If not already done, perform Backup of all data, including Backup of the Xeleris 1.1

on HP-XW5000 Recovery CD, and restart the computer.
============================================
Recovery CD for Xeleris Workstation
for the HP-XW5000 Workstation
============================================
9. Exit
Enter option
3. Type 1 to restore only drive C: – this means that the Operating System
Manufacturing Department, and if there is an installed database, it will
not be affected.
• Do not type 5 which will cause the loss of all data currently on the system,
Important
including the Xeleris 1.1 database and all configuration parameters.
• If you want to abort type 9; then reboot the system

5. Remove the Recovery CD from the drive, and restart the computer, by
pressing <Alt><Ctrl><Del>.


User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1
7. Click [OK].
If the Limited Virtual Memory pop-up message appears, click [OK], and proceed
Important
with Section 9.6 – Setting the Virtual Memory on page 9-10.
Note If the Invalid Display Settings window opens, click [OK], and adjust the display
properties, by referring to Section 9.14 – Adjusting the Display Properties on
page 9-16; then proceed with the next step.
8. Verify that all drive letters are correct, as described in Section 9.5 –
Assigning Drive Letters on page 9-6.
9. Verify that the Virtual Memory settings are correct, as described in

Setting the Virtual Memory on page 9-10.

A message will appear, detailing the content of the Add-On CD to be

installed.
2. Confirm the installation by clicking [Yes].
Note Installation of the Add-On CD takes about 15 to 20 minutes to complete.


5.5.2.7 Verifying the Microphone is Enabled


Check the Microphone checkbox and then click [OK].

control dialog .

5.5.2.8 Resizing the Database
Resize the database for the following system types:
NM Workstation - Applicable for sites that have only Nuclear Medicine

cameras.
a. Check that there is enough space on drive D for a 46GB database.
(free space + current database size – desired database size > 46 GB).
b. Browse to Options\databaseResize in your CD-ROM.
c. Double-click the file Db_resize_to_46GB.reg.
d. Click [OK] on the message that appears.
PET System Only - Applicable for sites that have any of the following
cameras PET, DLS, Discovery ST.
Combined NM & PET - Applicable for sites that have Nuclear Medicine
and PET, DLS, Discovery ST cameras.

page 5-108.
Perform the steps in that section on the computer running Xeleris 1.1.

Installations and Upgrades Upgrade from Genie P&R, XPert and Vision
5.6 Upgrade from Genie P&R, XPert and Vision
5.6.1 Full Upgrade

Important
Procedure Overview
The current computer will be replaced by an HP XW4100 and all hardware

devices will be transferred to the new computer. Xeleris 1.1 will be installed
on the new computer. After completing the installation the previously used
PC shall be turned over to GE by using Chapter 10 – Component Return
Kit Procedure.
Time Required
This procedure will take approximately 2 hours.
Prerequisites
z HP XW4100 computer
5.6.1.1 Recording System Configuration
Record the system configuration (all connected stations).
This information is required for Xeleris 1.1 system configuration.

Installations and Upgrades Upgrade from Genie P&R, XPert and Vision
Tower.
In case hardware devices have to be transferred from the eNTEGRA 2.5 to

the Xeleris 1.1, perform the following procedures:.
z Transferring the Optical Drive on page 5-92
z Transferring the 2nd Network Card on page 5-93

Optical Drive.
User’s Guide.
inserted correctly.
Note For additional hardware configuration information, see Section 4.3.1.1 – Installing
and Configuring the Sony EOD on page 4-6.


Continue with the procedure in Section 5.2.10 – Logging Into the System on
page 5-13.Perform the steps in that section on the computer running
Xeleris 1.1.

Installations and Upgrades Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade
5.7 Continuing Xeleris 1.1 SW Upgrade
This chapter is applicable for the following scenarios:

z When performing SW upgrade from Xeleris1.0 on HP XW5000
computer.
z When performing SW upgrade from eNTEGRA on HP XW5000
computer.
z When performing system recovery.
If you are performing a different procedure, such as new installation or Full

upgrade, please refer to the instructions in Section 5.2.12 – Installing the Xeleris
1.1 Software on page 5-17.
5.7.1 Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software

Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
1. Make sure that the network cable is connected to the computer.

3. The system will detect that the previous configuration was backed up
and will display a message. Confirm the automatic restore procedure.
Figure 5-53
4. If the ICON DirectConnect Option was installed before the upgrade, the
system will display a message requesting the PCMacLAN S/W
installation. If this happens, install the PCMacLAN S/W after the Xeleris
SW installation is complete.

5. When restore is complete, the Xeleris Installation Configuration

utility is automatically loaded. The following window is displayed.
Figure 5-54 Xeleris Installation Configuration – Screen 1


Figure 5-55 Xeleris 1.1 Installation Configuration – Screen 2


be set up to 56 GB.
9. For sites under HIPAA rules, select Use HIPAA, otherwise select
Don't Use HIPAA.
the applicable option as follows (use Table 5–9 below, as a guideline).
Table 5–9: Installation Options by Scenarios
SW Upgrade on
Load from Cold
HP XW5000
Configure Windows networking automatically performed automatically performed
Change default computer automatically performed automatically performed

name
Change regional settings automatically performed automatically performed
Install additional network card automatically performed automatically performed
Add licenses 9 automatically performed
a. Configure Windows networking - automatically restored, no need

to perform manually.
b. Change default computer name - automatically restored, no need
c. Change regional settings - automatically restored, no need to
perform manually.
d. Install additional network card - automatically restored, no need to
perform manually.
e. Add licenses - Not relevant for LFC. Before starting the Xeleris 1.1
software installation, you will be prompted to insert a diskette
containing the licenses files.

12. Click [Finish].
WARNINGS
reboot.
completed.
Do not remove the CD from the drive until after rebooting and Xeleris appears.
Insert the Xeleris 1.1 license diskette, and click [Yes].
Login with
Username wsservice
Password #bigguy1
19. Windows Printers Settings are written in the SystemInfoReport.txt
file during the automatic backup procedure. Refer to the file and
reconfigure all Windows printers.
Important Do not run SystemInfoReport before opening the file from the Service folder.
20. If ICON DirectConnect option was installed, re-install the PCMacLAN

S/W as described in Configuring Link to ICON Siemens on page 6-116.
21. If Pegasys DirectConnect option was installed, do the following:

a. Double click the [Start Servers] icon on the desktop.

b. Open Xeleris prompt window and type:
econf -restorenuma<Enter>
22. InSite Entitlement:
z If the system is not connected to InSite, proceed to Section 5.7.3
z If you are upgrading from Xeleris 1.0, proceed to Section 5.7.1.1.
z If you are upgrading from an older version of Xeleris 1.1 or
performing LFC, proceed to Section 5.7.1.2.
5.7.1.1 Update InSite Configuration from Xeleris 1.0
InSite configuration is saved in the SystemInfoReport.txt file located in

the service folder. Use the data from the SystemInfoReport.txt file and
perform InSite Entitlement as described in Section 6.3.1 – InSite Entitlement
(for sites with InSite connection) on page 6-151.
Important Do not run SystemInfoReport before opening the file from the Service folder.
5.7.1.2 Update InSite Configuration from an Earlier Xeleris 1.1 Version

2. In the opened window, type iip-restore.bat <Enter>.
3. Wait for the process to end. Ignore error messages about inaccessible log
files.
4. If the system is connected to InSite by a Direct Connection (Modem),
reboot the system and open iLinq Shell window again.
5. In the opened window, type configlink <Enter>.
6. Wait for the prompt to reappear and close the window.

5.7.2 Installing the SW Add-On CD

1. Perform a Partial Xeleris Shutdown.
2. Insert the CD labeled with “Xeleris 1.1 Software Add-On version
1.1324” into the CD drive.
3. Browse to the CD root directory and double-click the Install.bat file.
4. Wait for the confirmation message and click [OK].
5. Wait for the Command Prompt (insite>) to open and type:
iipPatchAdd <Enter>.
6. When installation completes, close the window and start the Xeleris
application.
5.7.3 Reinstall Norton Antivirus
Reinstall Norton antivirus SW as described in Section 5.2.15 – Installing

Norton AntiVirus on page 5-28.

Chapter 6 – Xeleris Configuration
6.1 Introduction
The Xeleris system comes pre–loaded with the WINDOWS XP operating

system, Xeleris Application software and basic licenses. The following local
parameters may be configured for the site:
z General
z Patient Selector
z Archive Devices
z Printers
z Database
z DICOM
z StarLink and ApexNet
z DST (STP3)
z Vision
z Foreign DB
z Foreign Link
z Export/Import
z Backup
z Favorite Repositories
z Favorite Applications
z Task In-box
z Hosts
z Worklist
z Setting Up the RAS Service
z InSite Entitlement
z OLC

Xeleris Configuration Introduction
This section details how to configure these parameters.
StarLink and ApexNet on the XP Platform requires the OSI Software Option.
Important
StarLink and ApexNet will not work without this option. To verify if this option has
been loaded on the system:
• Click [Start] on the Task Bar, and select: Settings → Control Panel.
• Double-click the Network icon.
• Right click on the Local Area Connection and select Properties.
• Verify that Protek ISO 8073 Transport and Protek TBH are installed.
Verify that the OSI option license was ordered and is present at:
D:\Einstein\Licences.
6.1.1 Required Information
Before starting this procedure, you must have the Site Assignment
information collected during site preparation available. This includes:
z Institution ID (Hospital Name; Dept. Name) that will appear on the
Xeleris screen (up to 2 lines)
z IP Address and Subnet Mask of the local Xeleris system for the first
and second (if applicable) LAN Adapter(s)
z How customer wants Site Name listed on Xeleris
z Ethernet Addresses of all systems on the Starlink LAN (Starcams,
M–Link system and Starlink agent systems)
z Ethernet Addresses of all SP systems on the ApexNet
z Host names, IP Addresses, and Application Entities of any remote
DICOM stations
z Host name, IP Address, and Application Entity of Worklist provider
z Host names and IP Addresses of any remote system accessed via IP
(e.g., Discovery ST camera, NXT camera)
z Host name and IP Addresses of any remote Xeleris or eNTEGRA
systems for remote database
z Host name and IP Addresses of any network hardcopy device (Helios,
Codonics, etc.)
z Host name and IP Addresses of Pegasys station (if foreign link is
applicable).
z Host name and IP Addresses, username and database path of Picker
station (if foreign DB is applicable).

Xeleris Configuration Introduction
z Host name, InSite IP address and phone number for any system to be
connected via modem
z The database used to maintain the in-box (In-box source).
Note This must be on the system with the modem.
z List of in-boxes to be defined (one for each technologist, resident,

and specialist, or one per group)
z For non-English systems only, check whether the site has
Millennium VG systems. If so, check and record the code page used
on the VG system(s), as follows:
a.On the VG system, type in the CLW: epm c:\config.sys
<Enter>.
b.Scroll to CODEPAGE = XXX, where XXX stands for the code
page used by the system.
c.Write down the XXX value of the VG system.
6.1.2 Guidelines for Multiple Xeleris Sites
At sites with several Xeleris systems it is recommended:

z Assign one system that is used for viewing and not for processing as
the Central database.
z To configure for each processing system only the Local and Central
databases.
z To assign the archive device (MOD or DVD) on one of the systems
as the clinical backup, used by all systems. Define this system for
collecting the Archive History.
Note Currently, remote archiving is supported, but retrieve from remote archive is not
available.
z At sites with multiple archive devices, consider defining one of these

systems for collecting the Archive History, unless there is reason to
maintain separate lists.

Xeleris Configuration System Configuration Procedure
6.2 System Configuration Procedure
6.2.1 Procedure Overview

Table 6–1: Configuration And Licensing Overview
Steps Reference
Importing (Restoring) Information from Previous Configuration Section 6.2.2

General Configuration (mandatory) Section 6.2.3
Patient Selector Section 6.2.4
Archive Configuration Section 6.2.5
Printer Configuration Section 6.2.6
Database Configuration Section 6.2.7
Remote Database Section 6.2.7.2.4
DICOM Configuration Section 6.2.8
StarLink and ApexNet Configuration Section 6.2.9
Configuring DST (SMV) Systems (STP3) Section 6.2.10
Configuring Vision (for sites that need to connect to Vision database, Section 6.2.11
and/or display clinical data from Vision Archive media)
Configuring Foreign Databases (for sites that have Picker cameras) Section 6.2.12
Configuring Foreign Link Section 6.2.13
Applicable only to import clinical data from ADAC (Pegasys) or
Siemens (Icon) systems
Export/Import Configuration Section 6.2.14
Backup (of new configuration) Section 6.2.15
Setting Favorite Repositories Section 6.2.16
Setting the Favorite Applications Section 6.2.17
Task In-box Configuration Section 6.2.18
Hosts Configuration (for system accessed via IP) Section 6.2.19
Keyboard Language Section 6.2.20
Worklist Section 6.2.21
InSite Entitlement (only for sites with active InSite) Section 6.3.1
Checkout and Connectivity Section 6.3.2

6.2.2 Importing (Restoring) Information from Previous Configuration
The Xeleris configuration parameters, including the site setting parameters,

can be entered automatically, by restoring the configuration files from another
eNTEGRA 2.5/Xeleris/Vision system running in the site.
6.2.2.1 From eNTEGRA 2.5/Xeleris

1. For backing up, refer to Section 6.2.15 – Backup on page 6-129.
2. For restoring, refer to Section 9.19 – Restoring Previous Configuration on
page 9-29.
6.2.2.2 From Vision

1. For importing, printing and DICOM configuration, refer to Section
9.19.4 – Importing Vision Configuration on page 9-36.

6.2.3 General Configuration (mandatory)

1. Click the Xeleris icon on the Task Bar.

4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the General tab.
Figure 6-1 General Tab
5. Overtype the default Institution ID (Hospital Name and Dept. Name)

according to the Site Assignment Matrix.
6. If the customer wants the above Institution ID to overwrite the
Institution ID of the original data, click the Always show local
Institution ID in header checkbox.
Note The Institution ID will appear in the header of printed/captured screens/regions/

frames.
7. Choose any of the following available options:

z If the site will use the in-box facility, click the check box next to
Physician In-box enabled (refer to Section 6.2.18 – Configuring
the Task In-box on page 6-141).
z For Xeleris systems that serve Infinia, click the check box next to
Auto-launch Auto-processing applications.
z For enabling Xeleris to automatically identify the application for the
data selected in the Study Browser (as defined in Customization),
click the check box next to Auto Selection enabled.
z For enabling window level adjustment using middle mouse button,
click the check box next to Window level adjustment using
middle mouse button.
z For removing the text annotation background, when reviewing data,
click the check box next to Transparent background for overlay
text annotations.
z The Character set translation option is relevant only for non-
English systems communicating with Millennium VG systems.
i Check the Translate Character Set checkbox.
ii In the list of Character set number, select the number that
corresponds to the CODEPAGE number of the VG system, as
recorded in Section 6.1.1 – Required Information on page 6-2
8. Click [OK] to register the changes.
9. Click [OK] to acknowledge the message requesting Partial Xeleris
shutdown.
10. Perform Partial Xeleris shutdown.
6.2.4 Patient Selector


4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Patient Selector tab.
Figure 6-2 Patient Selector Tab
5. Choose the study row height in the database Study Browser, by clicking
the preferred option from the Study Entry Style group. The following
options are available:
z Small single line
z Large single line
6. Choose the default sorting field in the database Study Browser, by
clicking the preferred option from the Default Sort Field group. The
following options are available:
z Patient name
z Patient ID
z Study name
z Date
z Reverse Date

7. Click [OK] to register the changes.

shutdown.
9. Perform Partial Xeleris shutdown and restart Xeleris.
6.2.5 Archive Configuration
Archiving configuration depends on the archiving policy of the local site.
For sites with several Xeleris systems, that are used for archive, it is preferable
to define only one system to collect the Archive History information.
The archiving device serving as the clinical backup (which is used for remote
archiving), must be configured as a DICOM node on all the systems that will
use it for remote archiving via DICOM, including its name, application entity
and the IP address of the Xeleris on which it is installed.
Data from Xeleris / eNTEGRA / Genie P&R stations can be archived directly
from the database.
To define an archive device on the local system:

Figure 6-3 Archive Tab
4. Verify that Enable archive functionality is checked.

5. From the drop-down list, Select the Xeleris system where the Archive
History will be kept (default = Local).
6. Select the applicable removable media (DVD; PIONEER; SONY), if
any.
Note Verify that the MOD/DVD application entity suffix is identical to the Application
Entity, defined in the Dicom tab (e.g., DVD_[application entity]).

WARNING

To identify the appropriate drive letter:
1. Minimize Xeleris, and double-click My Computer on the desktop.

2. Insert the media into the drive.
3. Right-click each removable drive, and select Eject, until the medium is
ejected.
4. Record the correspondent drive.
5. Maximize Xeleris, and select the (recorded) MOD drives, DVD drive, or
CD-R/W drive letter in the Drive drop-down menu.
screen).
7. For sites that have Xpert EODs, from the Xpert EOD radio button,
select the appropriate option (Non Compressed or Compressed)
according to the method previously used to create the EODs.
8. For CD archives, proceed with the configuration as follows:
a. Select the CD checkbox.
b. Select the backup directories to be used. Up to three repositories can
be defined (Cache1, Cache2, Cache3).
Note Verify that the Cache application entity suffix is identical to the Application Entity,
defined in the Dicom tab (e.g., NTF2_[application entity]).
c. Define the capacity of the Backup directory (cache1, cache2, etc,)

by selecting the appropriate value from the Size drop-down menu.
Default = 650 MB.
The value to be selected depends on the capacity of the CDs used by
the site for archiving, as follows:
Archive Capacity = CD capacity – 50 MB
d. For sites that have Discovery ST system, from the Default
archive AE Title drop-down menu, select the AE title of the device
that will be used for PET RAW data archiving.
e. Click [OK].
Xeleris.

6.2.6 Printer Configuration
Note If during the installation or configuration process of printers you are prompted to
insert the Windows XP CD, refer the Installation Wizard to the drivers in C:\i386.

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Printers tab.
Figure 6-4 Printers Tab
4. Click the [Add] button.

5. In the Add\Edit Printer Device window (refer to Table 6–2 for
supported hardcopy devices):

Figure 6-5 Add\Edit Printer Device

a. Type in the alias name of the hardcopy device.
b. Select the type of the hardcopy device from the drop–down list.
c. Click [Setup...].
Figure 6-6 Printer Setup

d. Type in or select the required information for the specific hardcopy
device.
e. Click [OK] to close the Printer Setup window.
6. To define an additional Hardcopy Device, repeat Step 5.
7. Click [OK].
Xeleris shutdown.
9. Perform Full shutdown of Xeleris and reactivate it.
Note The only DICOM printers that have been validated are the Imation 8300 (DCM8300),
Imation 8700 (DCMI8700), AGFA Drystar (DCMA2KCL and DCMA2KBW),
Codonics 1660 [DCMcod and Sony (UP-D70XR)].
Important A maximum of 4 devices can be configured on the hardcopy server.

6.2.6.1 Hardcopy Options
The Xeleris Hardcopy server provides a high resolution, digital,

multiformatted (n on 1) image for use on Formatters, Laser Cameras and
Color Printers via the:
z SCSI-2 port
z Network port
Note Xeleris will only support one SCSI-2 print device.
Note The XW6200 by default does not have a SCSI controller. If you use a SCSI printer
on XW6200, you will need to install the SCSI controller as described in Section 4.2.
Table 6–2 summarizes the hardcopy devices that are compatible with Xeleris,
the type of interface used and the sections that contain the installation/
configuration information for each device.
Table 6–2: Hardcopy Device Interface Matrix
Hardcopy
Device Name Xeleris Interface Reference
Type
Imation (3M) P831, SCSI-2 via DASM/LCAM Section 6.2.6.2

M952, 959XL, 969HQ
and DryView.
Kodak XLP100, 1120 SCSI-2 via DASM/LCAM Section 6.2.6.3

and 2180
Laser
Cameras Dupont Linx Image Q SCSI-2 via DASM/LCAM Section 6.2.6.4
Fuji SCSI-2 via DASM/LCAM Section 6.2.6.5
Konica (Li10A & Li20) SCSI-2 via DASM/LCAM Section 6.2.6.6
Polaroid Helios Network (TCP/IP) Section 6.2.6.7
Color Codonics NP1600M Network (TCP/IP) Section 6.2.6.8
Printers
PostScript® PostScript® Compatible Network (TCP/IP) or Section 6.2.6.9

Printers Printer Parallel Port
DICOM Compatible Network (TCP/IP) Section 6.2.6.10

Printers
DICOM
Sony DICOM printer Network (TCP/IP) Section 6.2.6.11
Note All hardcopy devices interfaced via the SCSI port or network must be configured on
Xeleris using the Configuration utility.

6.2.6.2 Imation (3M) Laser Cameras Configuration
6.2.6.2.1 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the Imation (3M) family of
Laser Cameras to the Xeleris system using the 952 interface and how to
configure both the Xeleris and Laser Camera to produce good quality films.
This includes the 952, 959, 969 and DryView Laser Cameras.
The Xeleris hardcopy server sends commands and high resolution digital
image data to DASM/LCAM over the SCSI-2 bus using the Analogical
DASM SCSI command set. The DASM/LCAM converts these commands
into 952 commands and a digital image.
Note Due to image quality issues the DASM/VDB interface is no longer being offered.
The 952 commands (host control) are sent from the DASM/LCAM’s 25–pin
(female) RS422 port to a UKEIB (Universal Keyboard External Interface
Box) and then to the Laser Camera’s input module. The UKEIB converts the
RS422 signals to a Fiber Optic signal, which is then sent to the Laser Camera’s
input module. Since the RS422 keypad interface on the UKEIB is a 37–pin
male connector, a 25–pin male to 37–pin female cable is required
(46-296980G1 can be used).
The DASM/LCAM sends the high resolution digital image data over a
37–pin, 8-bit parallel RS485 interface to a DEIB (Digital External Interface
Box) and then to the Laser Camera’s input module. The DEIB converts the
RS485 signals to a Fiber Optic signal which is then sent to the Laser Camera’s
input module.
Section 6.2.6.2.2 – Basic Procedure on page 6–16 provides the basic

procedure for interfacing/configuring the Imation Laser Cameras to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.2.3 – Finding the SCSI Device Number of the DASM/LCAM

on page 6–17 provides details for finding the SCSI Device Number of the
DASM/LCAM.
Section 6.2.6.2.4 – Laser Camera Connection on page 6–18 provides details

on interfacing the Imation Laser Cameras to the Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.2.5 – Image Quality Configuration on page 6–21 provides

details on configuring the Xeleris and the Laser Camera for optimal image
quality.

6.2.6.2.2 Basic Procedure
This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure an

Imation Laser Camera with Xeleris.
1. Verify that the DASM/LCAM is connected/configured properly, and the
Laser Camera has been added to the Xeleris configuration via the
Configuration utility (refer to Section 5.2.8 & Section 6.2.6 for
details).
The selected Type in the Printers tab of the Xeleris Configuration
window should be 3M.
The SCSI Device Number of the DASM/LCAM can be identified as per
Section 6.2.6.2.3 – Finding the SCSI Device Number of the DASM/
LCAM on page 6–17.
2. Install and connect the host and image data runs between the Laser
Camera’s input module and the DASM/LCAM. Refer to Section
6.2.6.2.4.
3. Configure the Laser Camera’s input module, the UKEIB and the DEIB
for communication with the DASM/LCAM. Refer to Section 6.2.6.2.4.
4. Power up the systems in the following order to assure proper
synchronization: Laser Camera, UKEIB and DEIB, DASM/LCAM and
then the Xeleris.
5. Log on to Xeleris, select the Formatter Static image from the Default
Patient Calibration study, and click the New icon (located on the
Patient Selector Control Bar). Click the Camera tool in the Display
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Imation
Laser Camera and click [Submit].
6. If:
a. No image is printed, refer to Section 9.17 for details on
troubleshooting.
b. An image is printed, analyze the image and determine if additional
adjustments are required.
7. If:
a. Adjustments will be made via the HCdefaults.win32 file on the
Xeleris system, then edit the specific parameters and powerdown the
Xeleris application. Refer to Section 9.17.
b. Adjustments will be made via the Laser Camera’s input module, then
verify that the HCdefaults.win32 file on the Xeleris has the
Density and Contrast parameter set to D before editing the input
module’s parameters. Refer to Section 6.2.6.2.5.
Note After the HCdefaults.win32 file is edited, the Xeleris must be completely restored
(including servers) in order for the changes to take effect.
8. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 until optimal film quality is achieved.

6.2.6.2.3 Finding the SCSI Device Number of the DASM/LCAM
1. Click [Start] on the Task Bar and select Run... to open the Run
Window.
2. In the Open input filed type regedit and click [OK].
3. In the Registry Editor window, select the following directory:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\Scsi
4. Scan the Identifier in each Scsi Port X directory (where X is the Port
Number) as follows:
a. Select the directory Scsi Bus 0\target Id Y\Logical Unit Id 0
(where Y is the Target ID Number).
b. Check whether the Identifier is ANALOG-LCAM-3M.
5. The Scsi Port with Indentifier = ANALOG-LCAM-3M is the Port
Number of the DASM/LCAM to be selected as the Physical Drive in
the 3M Printer Setup window. Refer to Section 6.2.6.

6.2.6.2.4 Laser Camera Connection
This section provides details on how to interface the Imation Laser Cameras
to the Xeleris system via the DASM/LCAM.
a. Interface Wiring
Figure 6-7 and Table 6–3 detail the interface between the Xeleris and the
Imation Laser Cameras using the DASM/LCAM.
3 - 100 Meters
Imation (3M)
2 5 Laser Camera
DASM/LCAM FIBER OPTIC
DEIB
1
3 4 FIBER OPTIC 6
UKEIB
120 V ac Input Module
Figure 6-7 Xeleris to Imation Laser Camera Interconnection via the DASM/LCAM
Table 6–3: DASM/LCAM to Imation Laser Camera Cable
Cable Description Part #/Source Length
1 Peripheral Tower SCSI Cable. 46-325201P5 1m
2 37–pin LCAM Image Data Imation 3–10 m

Cable - RS485
3 25–pin Male to 37 Pin Female 46-296980G1 30 cm

RS422 Stub Cable
4 3M Keypad Cable - 37 Pin Imation 3–10 m

RS422
5 Fiber Optic Line (Tx/Rx) - Imation 30–100 m

Image Data
6 Fiber Optic Line (Tx/Rx) - Host Imation 30–100 m

Communication
Note The Input Modules available on the DryView Laser Cameras provide direct 37–pin
interface connections for both host and image data.
The 952 Laser Cameras with MMU use two 37–pin interface connections for both
host and image data.
Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 – DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out on page 3-7 for pinout
details on the DASM/LCAM.

b. Interface Configuration
The Imation Laser Camera must be configured to communicate with the

Xeleris. Table 6–4 summarizes the configuration parameters required for the
components in the DASM/LCAM to Imation Laser Camera interface chain.
Note Refer to the Imation/3M Service Manual or Service Representative for details.
Table 6–4: DASM/LCAM–Imation Camera Interface Configuration
Device Parameter Setting
Input Module (Jumper) Fiber Optic Clock Rate 10MHz (E2-E3)

(Jumper)
Input Module Baud Rate 1200

(Communication
Parameters) Stop Bits 1
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Parity Enable Enable
Character Pacing 0
End Of Message CR
Protocol ACK/NACK
Memory Full Resp BSY
Command Set 959
Image Size New
Alarm Mode New
P1-P6 0

Table 6–4: DASM/LCAM–Imation Camera Interface Configuration (Continued)
Device Parameter Setting
Input Module EIB Type Digital

(System Parameters)
Parameter Set Set 0
OEM GE
Modality Nuclear
Dual Switch Off
Memory Width 9
Pixel Width 8
Requeue Number 3
Media Destination OM0/OM1
Enlarge Format Yes
Input Module Parity Enable Enable

(Digital EIB
Parameters) Test Pattern No
Header Mode Header
Prescale On
Timeout 20
Request Hold 200
Request Inactive 255
Retransmit Setup 255
Pixels/Line 1024
Image Lines 1024
Pixel Width 8
Parity Even
Port Port 0
UKEIB RS232/RS422 Select (Jumper) RS422
DEIB Fiber Optic Clock Rate 10 MHz

(Jumper)

6.2.6.2.5 Image Quality Configuration
The 952 command set provides control over a number of image quality
parameters for the Imation Laser Cameras. These parameters are set by either
the Xeleris hardcopy server via the HCdefaults.win32 file or set at the Laser
Camera’s input module. Table 6–5 provides a summary of these parameters.
Note The HCdefaults.win32 setting will over ride the input modules setting.
Table 6–5: Imation Laser Camera Image Quality Parameters
Name in
Parameter Description Remarks
HCdefaults.win32
Contrast Specifies a contrast table to use to produce the Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrasts Each format
Table image. The range of the contrast table settings are 1 and each
to 30. Table 1 to 15 represent positive tables (white on zone has a
black) and 16 to 30 negative tables (black on white). separate
In HCdefaults.win32 a setting of D causes the Laser contrast line.
Camera to use the setting on the input module.
Density Specifies the film density level. The range is from 1 to Prn3m.952.density
16. In HCdefaults.win32 a setting of D causes the
Laser Camera to use the setting on the input module.
Border Specifies the border level. 0 is dark and 255 is clear. Prn3m.952.bdr
Stage Time Specifies the delay between staging and exercising Prn3m.stage.timeout
Out an image.
In most cases the contrast and density will be set using the input module.
Refer to the Imation/3M Service Manual or Service Representative for details.
If the needs to be updated refer to the HCdefaults.win32 section below.
Note The stage time out needs to be set to 20 for the main interface.
a. HCdefaults.win32
The HCdefaults.win32 file is a text file that contains the default print device
parameters for all hardcopy devices supported by the Xeleris hardcopy server.
It is located in the
D:\Einstein\einstein_project\resources directory. Typically the
HCdefaults.win32 file contains a section for each print device’s
parameters. The parameters for the 952 compatible Laser Cameras start with
Prn3m.952, are shown in Figure 6-8, Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, Figure 6-11,
Figure 6-12 and Figure 6-13, below.

! protocol “952”
Prn3m.952.bdr: 0 Edit to change Border
Prn3m.952.interface: Lcam
Prn3m.952.cmd.timeout: 60
Prn3m.952.stage.timeout: 60 Edit for MMU Interface
Prn3m.952.expose.timeout: 15
Prn3m.952.density: 1 Edit to change Density
Prn3m.952.Hcp.code_path: /usr/lib/HCP_RPC.out
Prn3m.952.Hcp.unit: 0
Prn3m.952.Hcp.parity_enable: on
Prn3m.952.Hcp.even_parity: on
Prn3m.952.Hcp.local_loop: off
Prn3m.952.Hcp.auto_lf: off
Prn3m.952.Hcp.data_rate: 1200
Prn3m.952.Hcp.stop_bits: 0
Prn3m.952.Hcp.data_bits: 8
Prn3m.952.Hcp.line_term: CR
Prn3m.952.Hcp.data_interface: digital
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! protocol “952” with the “Lcam” interface
!
Prn3m.952.Lcam.devname: /dev/rdsk/c201d4s0
Prn3m.952.Lcam.debug_file: debug.out
Prn3m.952.Lcam.parity_enable: on
Prn3m.952.Lcam.even_parity: on
! with MMU
Prn3m.952.Lcam.data_rate: 1200
! no MMU
!Prn3m.952.Lcam.data_rate: 9600
Prn3m.952.Lcam.stop_bits: 1
Prn3m.952.Lcam.data_bits: 8
Prn3m.952.Lcam.local_loop: off
Prn3m.952.Lcam.auto_lf: off
Prn3m.952.Lcam.line_term: CR
! Digital data interface
Prn3m.952.Lcam.data_interface: digital
! Analog video interface (in ISG)
!Prn3m.952.Lcam.data_interface: analogue
!
Prn3m.952.formats: 1,2,3,4,6,9,12,16,20
!format 1
Prn3m.952.1.desc: 1 on 1 (1 frame on 1 zone)
Prn3m.952.1.zones: 1
Prn3m.952.1.1.frames: 1
Prn3m.952.1.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.1.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.1.1.contrasts: D Edit to chane Contrast (1x1)
Prn3m.952.1.1.lines: 4800
Prn3m.952.1.1.bdr.lines: 32
Prn3m.952.1.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.1.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.1.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.1.1.vmode: 15
! format 2
Prn3m.952.2.desc: 2 on 1 (2 frames on 1 zone)
Prn3m.952.2.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.2.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.2.1.contrasts: D,D Edit to change Contrast (2x1)
Prn3m.952.2.1.lines: 4800
Prn3m.952.2.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.2.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.2.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.2.1.vmode: 15
Figure 6-8 HCdefaults.win32 - 952 Laser Camera Section (Part 1)

format 3
Prn3m.952.3.desc: 2 on 1 (2 frames in 2 zones)
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.3.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.3.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.3.1.contrasts: D Edit to change contrast (3x1)
Prn3m.952.3.1.lines: 2400
Prn3m.952.3.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.3.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.3.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.3.1.vmode: 15
! zone 2
Prn3m.952.3.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.3.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.3.2.contrasts: D Edit to change Contrast (3x1)
Prn3m.952.3.2.lines: 2400
Prn3m.952.3.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.3.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.3.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.3.2.vmode: 15
! format 4
Prn3m.952.4.desc: 4 on 1 (2 frames on each of 2 zones)
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.4.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.4.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.4.1.lines: 2400
Prn3m.952.4.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.4.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.4.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.4.1.vmode: 15
! zone 2
Prn3m.952.4.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.4.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.4.2.lines: 2400
Prn3m.952.4.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.4.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.4.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.4.2.vmode: 15
!format 6
Prn3m.952.6.desc: 6 on 1 ( 2frames on each of 3 zones)
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.6.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.6.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.6.1.lines: 1600
Prn3m.952.6.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.6.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.6.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.6.1.vmode: 15

! zone 2
Prn3m.952.6.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.6.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.6.2.lines: 1600
Prn3m.952.6.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.6.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.6.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.6.2.vmode: 15
!zone 3
Prn3m.952.6.3.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.6.3.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.6.3.lines: 1600
Prn3m.952.6.3.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.6.3.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.6.3.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.6.3.vmode: 15
!format 9
Prn3m.952.9.desc: 9 on 1 ( 3 frames on each of 3 zones)
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.9.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.9.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.9.1.contrasts: D,D,D Edit to change Contrast (9x1)
Prn3m.952.9.1.lines: 1600
Prn3m.952.9.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.9.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.9.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.9.1.vmode: 15
! zone 2
Prn3m.952.9.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.9.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.9.2.lines: 1600
Prn3m.952.9.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.9.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.9.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.9.2.vmode: 15
!zone 3
Prn3m.952.9.3.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.9.3.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.9.3.lines: 1600
Prn3m.952.9.3.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.9.3.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.9.3.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.9.3.vmode: 15

!format 12
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.12.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.1.contrasts: D,D,D Edit to change Contrast (12x‘1)
Prn3m.952.12.1.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.12.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.12.1.vmode: 15
! zone 2
Prn3m.952.12.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.2.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.12.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.12.2.vmode: 15
!zone 3
Prn3m.952.12.3.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.3.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.3.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.12.3.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.3.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.3.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.12.3.vmode: 15
!zone 4
Prn3m.952.12.4.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.4.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.12.4.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.12.4.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.4.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.12.4.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.12.4.vmode: 15
!format 16
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.16.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.1.contrasts: D,D,D,D Edit to change Contrast (16x1)
Prn3m.952.16.1.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.16.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.16.1.vmode: 15

zone 2
Prn3m.952.16.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.2.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.16.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.16.2.vmode: 15
!zone 3
Prn3m.952.16.3.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.3.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.3.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.16.3.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.3.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.3.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.16.3.vmode: 15
!zone 4
Prn3m.952.16.4.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.4.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.16.4.lines: 1200
Prn3m.952.16.4.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.4.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.16.4.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.16.4.vmode: 15
!format 20
! zone 1
Prn3m.952.20.1.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.1.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.1.lines: 960
Prn3m.952.20.1.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.1.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.1.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.20.1.vmode: 15
! zone 2
Prn3m.952.20.2.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.2.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.2.lines: 960
Prn3m.952.20.2.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.2.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.2.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.20.2.vmode: 15
!zone 3
Prn3m.952.20.3.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.3.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.3.lines: 960
Prn3m.952.20.3.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.3.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.3.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.20.3.vmode: 15

!zone 4
Prn3m.952.20.4.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.4.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.4.lines:960
Prn3m.952.20.4.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.4.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.4.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.20.4.vmode: 15
!zone 5
Prn3m.952.20.5.width: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.5.height: 1024
Prn3m.952.20.5.lines: 960
Prn3m.952.20.5.hmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.5.vmag: 0
Prn3m.952.20.5.hmode: 15
Prn3m.952.20.5.vmode: 15
6.2.6.3 Kodak Laser Cameras Configuration
6.2.6.3.6 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the Kodak family of Laser
Cameras to the Xeleris system using the 952 interface, and how to configure
both the Xeleris and Laser Camera to produce good quality films. This
includes the XLP100, 1120, 2180 Laser Cameras.
image data to DASM/LCAM over the SCSI-2 bus using the Analogical
into the 952 commands and a digital image.
(female) RS422 port to the 15–pin RS422 host communication port (port 1)
on the Laser Camera’s input module. A MOD42 cable will be required to
convert from the 25–pin connection on the DASM unit to the 15–pin
connector on the input module.
The DASM/LCAM sends the high resolution digital image data over a 37–
pin, 8-bit parallel RS485 interface to the Laser Camera’s input module.

Section 6.2.6.3.7 provides the basic procedure for interfacing/configuring the

Kodak Laser Cameras to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.3.8 provides details on interfacing the Kodak Laser Cameras to

the Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.3.9 provides details on configuring the Xeleris and the Laser
Camera for optimal image quality.
This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure a Kodak
Laser Camera with Xeleris.
1. Verify that the DASM/LCAM is connected/configured properly and the
Laser Camera has been added to the Xeleris Configuration utility
(refer to Section 5.2.8 for details).
The Device Type should be set to 3M in the Printers tab of the

Configuration utility.
2. Install and connect the host and image data runs between the Laser
Camera’s input module and the DASM/LCAM. This is typically done by
the Kodak service engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.3.8.
3. Have the Kodak service engineer configure the Laser Camera’s input
module for communication with the DASM/LCAM. Refer to Section
6.2.6.3.8.
4. Edit the HCdefaults.win32 to add the Kodak model type and edit the
contrast settings. Refer to Section 6.2.6.3.8.
synchronization: Laser Camera, DASM/LCAM and then the Xeleris.
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Kodak
7. If
troubleshooting.

8. If
a. The border needs to be changed, the HCdefaults.win32 file will
need to be edited on the Xeleris and the servers to be restarted. Refer
to Section 6.2.6.3.9.
b. Any other image quality adjustments need to be made, the Kodak
service engineer will need to edit the parameters on the input
module. Refer to Section 6.2.6.3.9.
9. Repeat Step 6 through Step 8 until optimal film quality is achieved.

This section provides details on how to interface the Kodak Laser Cameras
a. Interface Wiring
Kodak Laser Cameras using the DASM/LCAM.
Input Module
Kodak
2 Laser Camera
DASM/LCAM
1
3 4
Figure 6-14 Xeleris to Kodak Laser Camera Interconnection via the DASM/LCAM
Table 6–6: DASM/LCAM to Kodak Laser Camera Cable Summary
Cable
Description Part #/Source Length Reference
Run
1 Peripheral Tower SCSI Cable. 46-325201P5 1m Section 3.2.3 on

page 3-7
2 37 Pin LCAM Image Data Cable - RS485 Kodak 45m Kodak Service
Engineer
3 MOD42 Cable. 25 to 15 pin converter. Kodak <1m
4 15 Pin Host Communication Cable - RS422 Kodak 45m
Note Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 – DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out on page 3-7 for pinout
details.
The Kodak Laser Camera’s input module must be configured to communicate

with the Xeleris.
Table 6–7 summarizes the configuration parameters that need to be set on

Kodak Laser Camera for the DASM/LCAM interface.

The Kodak Service Engineer will be responsible for setting these parameters
on the Laser Camera.
Table 6–7: DASM/LCAM to Kodak Laser Camera Interface Configuration (Part 1)
Interface Parameter Setting
Host Communication Baud Rate 1200
Stop Bits 1
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Character Pacing 0
End Of Message CR
Protocol ACK/NACK
Host Protocol Type 952
Image Image Size 1024x1024
Parity even
Pixel Width 8
Horizontal Pixel 1
Aspect
Vertical Pixel Aspect 1
c. HCdefaults.win32 Configuration
The HCdefaults.win32 file must be edited (e.g., by Notepad) in order for

the Xeleris hardcopy server to properly work with a Kodak Laser Camera.
The following changes need to be made:
z The ISG3m.version parameter must be changed from 3M to
KODAK.
z The Kodak model must be defined via the ISG3m.model parameter.
z The contrast parameter, Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast must be
changed from D to 20 for a negative image polarity (black on white)
for each frame definition. Use a value of 5 for positive image polarity
(white on black).

Note Kodak’s implementation of the 952 protocol uses the Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast

parameter only to set the image polarity. Values from 1-15 and D produce a positive
image polarity (white on black). Values from 16-30 produce a negative image polarity
(black on white). The film contrast will need to be set on the Laser Camera’s input
module.
The following procedure details how to edit the HCdefaults.win32 file for
Kodak Laser Cameras using the notepad editor.
1. Move to the Data Management screen and click the minimize button.
2. Double-click the Xeleris Prompt icon on the desktop and type:
CD config <Enter>
3. Type the following to backup the HCdefaults.win32 file:
copy HCdefaults.win32 HCdefaults.win32.org <Enter>

4. Type the following to open the HCdefaults.win32 file using the
notepad editor:
notepad HCdefaults.win32 <Enter>

5. Type the following notepad command to go to the line containing the
ISG3m.version parameter:
<Ctrl>+<F> ISG3m.version <Enter>
The cursor will be placed on the ‘I’ of the following line:
ISG3m.version: 3M
6. Press the → key until the cursor is over the ‘3m’ then overtype by
KODAK and press <Enter>.
7. Type the following line to enter the model type (valid model types are
KODAK_100XLP, KODAK_1120, or KODAK_2180):
ISG3m.model: KODAK_<100XLP or 1120 or 2180>
8. Type the following notepad command to go to the first line containing
the Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast parameter:
<Ctrl>+<F> Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast <Enter>
The cursor will be placed on the ‘p’ of the following line:
Prn3m.952.1.1.contrasts: D
9. Press the → key until the cursor is over the ‘D’ then overtype it by 20.

10. Press <F3> to go to the next line containing the

Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast parameter:
11. Repeat Step 9 and Step 10 until the contrast setting for each frame in
each format definition is changed. There are a total of 25 frame
definition.
Note See Figure 6-8, Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, Figure 6-11, Figure 6-12 and Figure 6-13
in Section 6.2.6.2.5 for a listing of this section of the HCdefaults.win32 file.
12. Save the changes and quit the notepad editor by selecting:
File → Save
File → Exit
13. Type the following to copy the modified HCdefaults.win32 file in the
\config directory:
copy HCdefaults.win32 HCdefaults.win32.bak <Enter>

14. Go back to the Xeleris Data Management screen, click the [X] button,
and in the System Shutdown dialog, click [Full].
15. Restart the Xeleris.
Kodak’s implementation of the 952 protocol differs from that of the standard
3M Laser Camera. This result in the following differences in image quality
configuration:
z The Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast parameter in HCdefaults.win32
is only used to set the image polarity. Values from 1-15 and D produce
a positive image polarity (white on black). Values from 16-30 produce
a negative image polarity (black on white).
Note Refer to the HCdefaults.win32 Configuration in Section 6.2.6.2.5 for details on

setting the Prn3m.952.fmt.n.contrast parameter.
z The film contrast is set on the Laser Camera’s input module.

z The Prn3m.952.density parameter in HCdefaults.win32 is
ignored. The film density is set on the Laser Camera’s input model.
Note To set contrast and density values on the Kodak, a Wyse terminal is required.

Table 6–8 provides a summary of the key parameters to adjust for film quality.
Table 6–8: Kodak Laser Camera Image Quality Parameters
Parameter Description Where Set Reference
Contrast Specifies a Laser Camera’s Kodak Service Engineer.

contrast table to input module via
use to produce a Wyse terminal.
the image.
Density Specifies the

density setting for
the film.
Curve Defines the

Gamma
correction curve.
Border Specifies the Prn3m.952.bdr 0 - Black Border

border level. 0 is parameter in the 255 - Clear Border
dark and 255 is HCdefaults.win3 See Section 6.2.6.3.8 for
clear. 2 file. info on editing the
HCdefaults.win32 file.
6.2.6.4 DuPont Laser Cameras Configuration
6.2.6.4.10 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the DuPont (Sterling) Laser
Cameras to the Xeleris system and how to configure both the Xeleris and
Laser Camera to produce good quality films.
image data to the DASM/LCAM over the SCSI-2 bus using the Analogical
Note The DuPont has only been validated using the DASM/LCAM interface.
(female) RS422 port to the 37–pin RS422 host communication port on the
DuPont Linx Q interface which is referred to as the SID. Since the RS422
interface on the SID is a 37–pin male connector, a 25–pin male to 37–pin
female cable is required. (46-296980G1 can be used.)
The DASM/LCAM also sends the high resolution digital image data over a
3– pin, 8–bit parallel RS485 interface to DuPont SID.

Section 6.2.6.4.11 provides the basic procedure for interfacing/configuring

the DuPont Laser Cameras to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.4.12 provides details on interfacing the DuPont Laser Cameras

to the Xeleris.
This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure a DuPont
(refer to Section 5.2.8 for details).
2. The Device Type should be set to ISGdupont_3m.
3. Install and connect the host and image data runs between the SID and the
DASM/LCAM. This should be done by the Sterling service engineer.
Refer to Section 6.2.6.4.12.
4. Configure the SID for communication with the DASM/LCAM. This
should be done by the Sterling service engineer. Refer to Section
6.2.6.4.12.
synchronization; SID, DASM/LCAM and then the Xeleris.
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the DuPont
7. If:
troubleshooting.
8. Any adjustments for image quality will be made via the SID by the
Sterling Service Engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.4.13 – Image Quality
Configuration on page 6–37.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 7 until optimal film quality is achieved.

This section provides details on how to interface the DuPont Laser Camera
a. Interface Wiring
DuPont Laser Cameras using the DASM/LCAM.
120 V ac
2 DuPont
DASM/LCAM 5
Laser Camera Interface Laser Camera
1
3 4
Figure 6-15 Xeleris to Dupont Laser Camera Interconnection via the DASM/LCAM
Table 6–9: DASM/LCAM to DuPont Laser Camera Cable Summary
Cable
Description Part #/Source Length Reference
Run
1 Peripheral Tower SCSI 46-325201P5 1m Section 3.2.3 – Cabling

Cable. and Linking on page 3-7.
2 37 Pin LCAM Image Sterling Sterling Service Engineer

Data Cable - RS485
3 25 Pin Male to 37 Pin 46-296980G1 30 cm GEMS or Sterling

Female RS422 Stub
Cable
4 37 Pin RS422 Host Sterling Sterling Service Engineer

Communication Cable
5 Laser Camera Interface

(Network or Serial)
Note Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 – DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out on page 3-7 for
pinout details.

The SID must be configured to communicate with the Xeleris.

the SID for the DASM/LCAM interface.
The Sterling Service Engineer will be responsible for configuring and

interfacing the SID.
Table 6–10: DASM/LCAM to DuPont Laser Camera Interface Configuration
Host Communications Baud Rate 1200
Stop Bits 1
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Character Pacing 0
End Of Message CR
Protocol ACK/NACK
Pixel Width 8
Parity Even
The 952 protocol image quality parameters defined in HCdefaults.win32

file are ignored by the DuPont SID. All image quality adjustment should be
performed by the Sterling Service Engineer.

6.2.6.5 Fuji Laser Cameras Configuration
6.2.6.5.1 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the Fuji Laser Cameras to
the Xeleris system and how to configure both the Xeleris and Laser Camera
to produce good quality films.
(female) RS422 port to the 37–pin RS422 host communication port on the
Fuji Multiformatter interface. The Multiformatter interface then converts the
952 commands into a Fuji compatible command set and sends it to the Laser
Camera. Since the RS422 interface on the Multiformatter interface is a 37–
pin male connector, a 25–pin male to 37–pin female cable is required
(46-296980G1 can be used).
The DASM/LCAM sends the high resolution digital image data over a
37–pin, 8–bit parallel RS485 interface to the Fuji Multiformatter interface.
The Multiformatter interface then converts the digital image into a Fuji
compatible image format and sends it to the Laser Camera.

Fuji Multiformatter to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.5.3 provides details on interfacing the Fuji Multiformatter to

the Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.5.4 provides details on configuring the Fuji Multiformatter for

communication with Xeleris.

This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure a DuPont
(refer to Section 5.2.8 and Section 3.2.3.1 for details).
The Device Type should be set to ISG3m in the Printers tab in the
Configuration utility.
2. Install and connect the host and image data runs between the Fuji
Multiformatter and the DASM/LCAM. This should be done by the Fuji
Service Engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.5.3.
3. Configure the Fuji Multiformatter for communication with the DASM/
LCAM. This should be done by the Fuji Service Engineer. Refer to
Section 6.2.6.5.3.
synchronization; Laser Camera, Multiformatter DASM/LCAM and then
the Xeleris.
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Fuji Laser
Camera and click [Submit].
6. If:
troubleshooting.
7. Any adjustments for image quality will be made on the Multiformatter
by the Fuji Service Engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.5.5.

This section provides details on how to interface the Fuji Laser Camera to
the Xeleris system via the DASM/LCAM.
a. Interface Wiring
Fuji Laser Cameras using the DASM/LCAM.
120VAC
2 Laser Camera
DASM/LCAM 5 Fuji
1 Interface
Multiformatter Laser Camera
3 4
Figure 6-16 Xeleris to Fuji Laser Camera Interconnection via the DASM/LCAM
Table 6–11: DASM/LCAM to Fuji Laser Camera Cable Summary
Cabl
e Description Part # / Source Length Reference
Run
1 SCSI 1 to SCSI 2 Cable 46-269566P104 1m
2 37 Pin LCAM Image Data Fuji Fuji Service

Cable - RS485 Engineer
3 25 Pin Male to 37 Pin Female 46-296980G1 30 cm GEMS or Fuji

RS422 Stub Cable
4 37 Pin RS422 Host Fuji Fuji

Communication Cable Service
Engineer
5 Laser Camera Interface
Note Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 – DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out on page 3-7 for pin out
details.

6.2.6.5.4 Interface Configuration
The Fuji Multiformatter must be configured to communicate with the Xeleris.

the Fuji Multiformatter for the DASM/LCAM interface.
The Fuji Service Engineer will be responsible for configuring and interfacing
the Multiformatter.
Table 6–12: DASM/LCAM to Fuji Multiformatter Interface Configuration
Stop Bits 1
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Character Pacing 0
End Of Message CR
Protocol ACK/NACK
Pixel Width 8
Parity Even

file are ignored by the Fuji Multiformatter. All image quality adjustment
should be performed by the Fuji Service Engineer.

6.2.6.6 Konica Laser Cameras Configuration
6.2.6.6.1 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the Konica Laser Cameras
to the Xeleris system and how to configure both the Xeleris and Laser Camera
(female) RS422 port to the RS422 host communication port on the Konica
Laser Camera’s input module. Konica’s Service Engineer will need to provide
any hardware required to interface the 25–pin RS422 line into their input
module.
The DASM/LCAM also sends the high resolution digital image data over a
37–pin, 8–bit parallel RS485 interface to the input module.

Konica Laser Cameras to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.6.3 provides details on interfacing the Konica Laser Cameras

to the Xeleris.

This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure a Konica
1. Verify that the DASM/LCAM is connected/configured properly, the
SCSI Device Driver has been initialized, the permission for the SCSI
Device Driver are set properly and the Laser Camera has been added to
the Xeleris configuration (refer to Section 5.2.8 and Section 3.2.3.1 for
details0.
The Device Type should have been set to ISG3m in the Printers tab
in the Configuration utility.
2. Install and connect the host and image data runs between the Konica’s
input module and the DASM/LCAM. This should be done by the Konica
service engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.6.3.
3. Configure Konica’s input module for communication with the DASM/
LCAM. This should be done by the Konica service engineer. Refer to
Section 6.2.6.6.3.
synchronization; Konica Laser Camera, DASM/LCAM and then the
Xeleris.
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Konica
6. If
troubleshooting.
7. Any adjustments for image quality will be made via the input module by
the Konica Service Engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.6.4.

This section provides details on how to interface the Konica Laser Camera
a. Interface Wiring
Konica Laser Cameras using the DASM/LCAM.
DASM/LCAM 2
Konica
1
3 4 Laser Camera
Figure 6-17 Xeleris to Konica Laser Camera Interconnection via the DASM/LCAM
Table 6–13: DASM/LCAM to Konica Laser Camera Cable Summary
Cabl
Part #/
e Description Length Reference
Source
Run
1 Peripheral Tower 46-325201P5 1m Section 3.2.3 –

SCSI Cable. Cabling and Linking
on page 3-7
2 37 Pin LCAM Image Konica 3–10 m Konica Service

Data Cable - RS485 Engineer
3 25 Pin Male to 37 Pin Konica

Female RS422 Stub
Cable
4 37 Pin RS422 Host Konica

Communication cable
Note Refer to Section 3.2.3.1 – DASM/LCAM Connectors Pin Out on page 3-7 for pinout
details.

The Konica Laser Camera’s input module must be configured to

communicate with the Xeleris.

the input module for the DASM/LCAM interface.
The Konica Service Engineer will be responsible for configuring and

interfacing Laser Camera.
Table 6–14: DASM/LCAM to Konica Laser Camera Interface Configuration
Stop Bits 1
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Character Pacing 0
End Of Message CR
Protocol ACK/NACK
Host Protocol 952

Type
Pixel Width 8
Parity Even

file are ignored by the Konica Laser Camera. All image quality adjustment
should be performed by the Konica Service Engineer.

6.2.6.7 Polaroid Helios Laser Camera Installation/Configuration
6.2.6.7.1 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the Polaroid (Sterling) Helios
Laser Cameras to the Xeleris system and how to configure both the Xeleris
and Laser Camera to produce good quality films.
image data to the Helios via the Nuclear Local Area Network (LAN) using
the IP command over the TCP/IP network protocol.
Note The Helios Laser Camera requires at a minimum the Primary Ethernet Module. In
addition, if more the one device will print to the Helios via the network interface, the
Multiple Ethernet Image Manager software will need to be activated. Contact your
Helios representative for details.

Helios Laser Cameras to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.7.3 provides details on interfacing the Helios Laser Cameras to

the Xeleris.

This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure the Helios
1. Obtain an IP Address for the Helios.
2. Verify that the Helios was configured correctly on the Xeleris. Refer to
Section 5.2.8 for details.
3. The Device Type should be set to helios. The IP Address of the Helios
will also need to be entered.
4. Install and connect the Helios to the Nuclear LAN. This should be done
by the Sterling Service Engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.7.3.
5. Configure the Helios for communication with the Xeleris. This includes
assigning the Helios’s IP Address, Subnetmask (optional) and adding the
Xeleris’ IP Address to the Helios. This should be done by the Sterling
Service Engineer. Refer to Section 6.2.6.7.3 – Laser Camera Connection
on page 6–48.
6. Power up the Helios.
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Helios
8. If:
troubleshooting.
9. Any adjustments for image quality will be made via the
HCdefaults.win32 file. Refer to Section 6.2.6.7.4.
10. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until optimal film quality is achieved.

This section provides details on how to interface the Helios Laser Camera to
the Xeleris system via the LAN.
a. Interface Wiring
Helios.
.
2 Helios
1 3
4
10/100 Baste-T
HUB
Figure 6-18 Xeleris to Helios Interconnection
Table 6–15: Helios Network Interface Cable Summary
Cable Part #/
Description Reference
Run Source
1 Xeleris CAT 5 cable GEMS Section 3.2.3 – Cabling and Linking

on page 3-7
2 10 Base–T Transceiver for the Sterling Helios (Sterling) Service Engineer

Helios
3 Helios CAT 5 Cable
4 10 Base–T Hub GEMS
The Helios must be configured to communicate with the Xeleris.

the Helios. The Helios (Sterling) Service Engineer will be responsible for
configuring and interfacing Laser Camera. Details can also be found in the
Helios Service Manual.

Table 6–16: Helios Laser Camera Interface Configuration Summary
Parameter Setting
IP Address for Helios IP Address assigned to Helios
Netmask (Optional) Subnet Mask assigned to LAN
Host IP Address Xeleris IP Address
The most common image quality parameters for the Helios are set via the
Xeleris Configuration dialog, as follows:
1. Perform Xeleris Full shutdown, if required.
2. Double-click the Xeleris Config icon on the desktop.
4. Click [Add].
5. From the Type pull-down menu, in the Add/Edit Printer Device
window, select Helios.
6. In the Helios Printer Setup window type the Printer Name and
Printer Address (IP).
7. Enter the Contrast and Brightness values as follows:
Contrast 1
Brightness 1
8. Click [OK] in each window, to acknowledge the setup information.
In any further configuration is required, it has to be done via the

HCdefaults.win32 file on Xeleris. The HCdefaults.win32 file is a text
file that contains the default print device parameters for all hardcopy devices
supported by the Xeleris hardcopy server. It is located in the
D:\einstein\einstein_project\resources directory. Typically the
HCdefaults.win32 file contains a section for each print device’s
parameters.

Figure 6-19 lists the Helios settings in the HCdefaults.win32 file.

Table 6–17 provides a summary of the parameters that can be adjusted.
CAUTION
Refer to the Helios Service Manual for details on the effect of each parameter on
image quality.
The basic procedure for editing the HCdefaults.win32 file along with an
example can be found in Section 6.2.6.2.5.
Table 6–17: Helios Print Device Parameters
Default
Parameter Description
Setting
PrnHelios.curve This parameter defines the gamma curve the Helios uses to produce the 17
image. Range is 0 to 40.
PrnHelios.dmin This parameter sets the lower density value. 0.02
PrnHelios.dmax This parameter sets the upper density value. 2.01
PrnHelios.margin These two parameter set the border. Choices are ”clear” or ”black”. clear
PrnHelios.seperator clear
PrnHelios.exposure This parameter sets the polarity of the image printed on the film. negative
Choices are ”negative” or ”positive”.
CAUTION
Only edit the parameter listed in Table 6–17. Changing other parameters
in HCdefaults.win32 may cause errors in the hardcopy server.

!-------------------------------------------------------------------
! defaults for “HELIOS” print device
!
PrnHelios.ip_addr: polaroid
!
! Change “clear” to “black” for black borders
!
PrnHelios.margin: clear
PrnHelios.separator: clear Edit to change Border
PrnHelios.timeout: 120
PrnHelios.queue: lpHelios
PrnHelios.formats: 1,2,4,6,9
PrnHelios.curve: 17 Edit to change Curve
PrnHelios.brightness: 1
PrnHelios.contrast: 1
PrnHelios.dmin: 0.02
PrnHelios.dmax: 2.01 Edit to change Density
PrnHelios*orientation: landscape
!
! Change “negative” to “positive” for white on black imaging
!
PrnHelios.exposure: negative Edit to change Image Polarity
PrnHelios.1.desc: 1-up
PrnHelios.1.orientation: landscape
PrnHelios.1.max_width: 2068
PrnHelios.1.max_height: 2068
PrnHelios.1.min_width: 8
PrnHelios.1.min_height: 8
PrnHelios.1.num: 1
PrnHelios.2.num: 2
PrnHelios.4.num: 4
PrnHelios.6.num: 6
PrnHelios.9.num: 9
Figure 6-19 HCdefaults.win32 – Helios Settings

6.2.6.8 Codonics NP1600M Color Printer Installation/Configuration
6.2.6.8.1 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect the Codonics Color printer
to the Xeleris system and how to configure both the Xeleris and the Codonics
image data to the Codonics via the Nuclear Local Area Network (LAN) using
the lP command over the TCP/IP network protocol.
The Codonics Printer requires the following items to communicate with

Xeleris:
z ISG_1 license - 10 character license key (supplied by the vendor)
z snmpd software patch - 3.5" floppy
z lpd software patch - 3.5" floppy
Note These items should be provided with the Codonics software. If not, contact
Codonics.

Codonics Printer to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.8.3 provides details on interfacing the Codonics to the Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.8.4 explains how to upgrade the Codonics printer to enable

proper communication with Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.8.5 provides details on configuring the Xeleris and the Codonics
for optimal image quality.

This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure the
Codonics Printer with Xeleris.
1. Obtain an IP Address for the Codonics.
2. Verify that the Codonics was configured correctly on the Xeleris via the
Configuration utility. Refer to Section 6.2.6 for details.
3. The Device Type should be set to ISGnp1600m (Codonics). The IP
Address of the Codonics will also need to be entered.
4. Install Codonics printer per the Codonics Users Manual instructions and
connect it to the Nuclear LAN. Refer to Section 6.2.6.8.3.
5. Configure the Codonics for communication with the Xeleris. This
includes assigning the Codonics’s IP Address and Subnetmask to the
printer. Refer to the Codonics Users Manual and Section 6.2.6.8.3.
6. Upgrade the Codonics as per Section 6.2.6.8.4 – Codonics Upgrade on
page 6–55.
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Codonics
8. If:
troubleshooting.
9. Create a text file that contains the Codonics image parameters on the
Xeleris, then send it to the Codonics. Refer to the Codonics Users
Manual and Section 6.2.6.8.5.

6.2.6.8.3 Printer Interface
This section provides details on how to interface the Codonics Printer to the
Xeleris system via the LAN.
a. Interface Wiring
Codonics.
2
3 Codonics
1
4
10/100 Base-T
HUB
Figure 6-20 Xeleris to Codonics Interconnection
Table 6–18: Codonics Network Interface Cable
Cable
Description Part #/Source Reference
Run
1 Xeleris CAT 5 Cable GEMS Section 3.2.3 – Cabling

and Linking on page 3-7
2 10 Base–T Transceiver for Codonics Codonics or GEMS Codonics Users Manual
3 Codonics CAT 5 Cable
4 10 Base–T HUB GEMS
The Codonics must be configured to communicate with the Xeleris. Refer to

the Codonics Users Manual for details on setting these parameters. Table 6–
19 summarizes the configuration parameters that need to be set on the
Codonics.
Table 6–19: Codonics Interface Configuration
Parameter Setting
IP Address for Codonics IP Address assigned to Codonics
Netmask (Optional) Subnet Mask assigned to LAN

6.2.6.8.4 Codonics Upgrade
To enable proper communication with the Xeleris, the Codonics must be

upgraded as follows:
1. Make sure no one is using the printer.
2. Open a command line window by clicking [Start] → Programs →
Command Prompt.
3. Type E: <Enter>, where E: stands for your CD Drive.
4. Type cd \Drivers\Printers\codonics\Patch1.6 <Enter>.
5. Type ftp codonics_IP_Address <Enter>
6. When prompted, enter:
User Name: your first name
Password: 300
7. Type bin <Enter>>. The system responds: 200 Type set to I
8. Type hash <Enter>. The system responds: Hash mark printing On.
9. Type put snmp2-v1.0B1.tar.gz <Enter>. The system responds:
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for snmp2-v1.0B1.tar.gz.
################################
226- Installing update
x ., 0 bytes, 0 tape blocks
x ./Install.NP1600, 240 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x ./Reboot.NP1600, 40 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x ./Title.NP1600, 40 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x ./Undo.NP1600, 247 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x ./Verify.NP1600, 11 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x ./snmp2.tar, 642560 bytes, 1255 tape blocks
10. The printer reboots.

The image quality parameters for the Codonics are set via a User Preference
file that is associated with the Xeleris hostname. The User Preference file is
a text file that contains the parameter names and the settings. This file can be
created directly on the Codonics or on the Xeleris and then sent to the
Codonics via the ftp command.
Table 6–20 provides a summary of the key parameters that can be adjusted.
Refer to the Codonics Users Manual for details on the effect of each
parameter on image quality.
The procedure for creating the User Preference file on the Xeleris and sending
it to the Codonics is detailed below. Additional information is also provided
in the Setting User Preferences chapter of the Codonics Users Manual.
Table 6–20: Codonics Image Quality Parameters Print Device Parameters
Default
Parameter Description
Setting
GAMMA This parameter allows the user to adjust the lightness/ 1.0
darkness level of the images. The amount of correction
is specified by a single value ranging from 0.0 to 10.0.
MCM MCM stands for Medical Color Matching. It is a set of N/A

look up tables that adjust the printed output colors to
more accurately match the output of the CRT monitor.
LUTs assigned to GEMS are 8, 10, 12 and 14.
a. Creating the Codonics User Preference File
The User Preference file can be created using the Notepad editor on the
Xeleris. This file is then sent to the Codonics using the ftp command. The
following procedure details this process using the Notepad editor and ftp.
1. Click the minimize icon on the Xeleris Data Management screen.
2. Click [Start] on the Task bar, select Run, type cmd and click [OK].
3. In the opened Command Line window, type:
notepad codon.set <Enter>
4. If a pop-up message appears, acknowledge the creation of a new file by
clicking [Yes].
5. Type the following string and data to type-in the GAMMA and MCM
values:
GAMMA 2.0 <Enter>
MCM 12 <Enter>


File → Save
File → Exit
7. Type the following command string to open an ftp session:
ftp codonics <Enter>
The system responds with:

Name (codonics:username):
8. Type in the Xeleris hostname for the Name (for example Xeleris):
xeleris <Enter>

Name (codonics:username): xeleris
331 Use printer #{0-2, 8, 9, 10, 11-99, 100-104 for
password.
Password:
9. Type in 0 <Enter> for the password. The password will not be echoed.
230 User xeleris logged in on System Device
ftp>
10. At the ftp> prompt type the following to set file transfer to binary:
bin <Enter>
200 Type set to I.
ftp>
11. Type the following to transfer the codon.set file to the Codonics:
put codon.set <Enter>
The system should respond with a message indicating the file was
transferred.
12. Type the following to quit the ftp session:
quit <Enter>
13. Maximize Xeleris and send an image to the Codonics.
14. Analyze the image. If further adjustments are required, change the
GAMMA and MCM values in the codon.set file on Xeleris and resent it
to the Codonics. Repeat as necessary.

6.2.6.9 PostScript™ Compatible Printer Installation/Configuration
6.2.6.9.1 Overview
This section provides general information on interfacing a PostScript™

compatible printer to the Xeleris system.
The Xeleris application utilizes the Window XP system services to send

printouts to any supported printer device. Although any windows compatible
printer will work, the best results are achieved using a PostScript compatible
printer.
The Xeleris system interfaces the PostScript printer either through its parallel
port or the network port, using TCP/IP network protocol.
Section 6.2.6.9.2 provides the basic procedure for installing a Windows

PostScript printer to be interfaced to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.9.5 provides details on the physical interface between the

PostScript printer and the Xeleris.
The procedure below provides guidelines and an example of installation

sequence for a windows PostScript compatible printer. There may be some
variations in the instructions depending on the printer manufacturer. For
additional information and troubleshooting, refer to the manufacturer’s
printer documentation.
1. Connect the printer to Xeleris (refer to Section 6.2.6.9.5):
a. If the parallel port interface will be used, connect the printer parallel
port cable to the Xeleris parallel port.
b. If the network interface will be used, connect the printer to the local
network (refer to the printer documentation). An IP Address will also
be need for the printer.
2. Install the printer software according to the interface used, as follows:
• Section 6.2.6.9.3 – Software Installation for a Printer Interfaced via
the Parallel Port on page 6-59.
• Section 6.2.6.9.4 – Software Installation for a Printer Interfaced via
the Network Port on page 6-59.

6.2.6.9.3 Software Installation for a Printer Interfaced via the Parallel Port
1. Power down the Xeleris.

2. Click [Start] on the Task Bar, select Setting → Printers.
3. In the opened Printers window, double-click Add Printer.
4. Click [Next].
5. Check the box next to LPT1 and click [Next].
6. Insert the printer manufacturer CD into the CD drive and click [Have
Disk].
7. Click [Browse], select the appropriate installation file on the CD and
click [Open].
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the printer model and click [Next] three times
10. Check the radio button next to No to avoid printout of test page, and
click [Finish] to start the driver installation.
6.2.6.9.4 Software Installation for a Printer Interfaced via the Network Port
1. Power down the Xeleris.

2. Click [Start] on the Task Bar, select Setting → Printers.
3. In the opened Printers window, double-click Add Printer.
4. Click [Next].
5. Select LPT1 and click [Next] (the port will be changed later).
6. Insert the printer manufacturer CD into the CD drive and click [Have
Disk].
7. Click [Browse], select the appropriate installation file on the CD and
click [Open].
8. Click [OK].
9. Select the printer model and click [Next] three times
10. Check the radio button next to No to avoid printing of test page, then
click [Finish] to start the driver installation.
11. When driver installation has been completed, click [Start] on the Task
Bar, select Setting → Control Panel.
12. Double-click [Network] and go to the Service tab.

13. Check that Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service is present.

If so, skip to Step 22.
Otherwise, proceed to Step 14.
14. Insert the Window XP CD into the CD drive.
15. Click [Start] on the Task Bar, and select Setting → Control Panel.
16. Double-click [Network] and go to the Service tab.
17. Click [Add].
18. Select Microsoft TCP/IP Printing and click [OK].
19. Set the path as E:\i386 and click [Continue] to begin installation (E:
stands for the CD drive).
20. Click [Close].
21. Click [Yes] to restart the system.
22. Click [Start] on the Task Bar, and select Setting → Printers.
23. Highlight the PostScript printer, press the right mouse button and
select the Properties entry.
24. Click the Ports tab.
25. Click [Add Port].
26. Highlight LPR Port and click [New Port].
27. Type the printer IP address (recorded in the pre–installation checklist)
as the Server Address.
28. Type PS as the Printer Name and click [OK].
29. Click [Close].
30. Click [OK].
6.2.6.9.5 Physical Interface
This section provides details on how to physically interface the PostScript

Printer to the Xeleris system either via the LAN or parallel port.
a. LAN Interface

PostScript® printer via the LAN.
2 PostScript®
1 3 Printer
4
10/100 Base-T
HUB
Figure 6-21 Xeleris to PostScript Printer LAN Interface
Table 6–21: PostScript® Printer Network Interface Cable
Cable
Run
1 Xeleris CAT 5 Cable GEMS Section 3.2.3 – Cabling and

Linking on page 3-7
2 10 Base–T Customer or
Transceiver for the GEMS
Printer
3 Printer CAT 5 Cable
b. Parallel Port Interface
Figure 6-22 and Table 6–22 details the interface between the Xeleris and the
PostScript® printer via the Xeleris’ parallel port.
Note Refer to PC User’s Guide for information on the location of the Xeleris parallel port.
PostScript®
1 Printer
To Xeleris’ To Printer’s
Parallel Port
Parallel Port
Figure 6-22 Xeleris to Postscript® Printer Parallel Port Interface

Table 6–22: PostScript® Printer Parallel Port Interface Cable Summary
Cable Run Description Part #/Source Reference
1 DB25 to Printer’s Parallel Port Customer Printer’s Documentation
6.2.6.10 DICOM Printers Except Sony
6.2.6.10.6 Overview
This section provides details on how to connect and configure the various
DICOM printers that Xeleris supports.
The Xeleris hardcopy server now supports printing to a DICOM Printer

(DICOM Print Management SCP) via the local network using the TCP/IP
network protocol. The hardcopy server represents a single Application Entity
(AE) that is separate from the one used for image transfer. It provides standard
conformance to the following DICOM 3.0 SOP Classes as a SCU:
z Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class.
z Basic ColorPrint Management SOP Class.
DICOM printers are configured in the Printers tab of the Xeleris

Configuration window and the HCdefaults.win32 file in the
D:\einstein\einstein_project\resources directory. The following
DICOM printers are validated:
z Imation 8300 (DCMI8300)
z Imation 8700 Print Server (DCMI8700)
z AGFA Drystar 2000 - Colour and Black and White (DCMA2KCL &
DCMA2KBW)
z Codonics 1660m (DCMcod)
Other DICOM printers may be compatible with Xeleris but will need to be
manually configured. Refer to Section 6.2.6.10.10 for details.
Section 6.2.6.10.7 provides the basic procedure for interfacing/configuring

the printers to Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.10.8 provides details on the physical interface between the

DICOM printers and the Xeleris.
Section 6.2.6.10.9 provides details on configuring the Xeleris and the DICOM
printer.

This section provides the basic procedure to interface and configure DICOM
Printers with Xeleris.
1. If necessary, connect the printer to the Nuclear LAN. Refer to
Section 6.2.6.10.8 – Printer Interface on page 6–64.
2. Obtain the following information for the DICOM printer:
a. AE Title
b. TCP/IP Port # (=104)
c. IP Address
3. Verify that the printer was configured correctly on the Xeleris via the
Xeleris Configuration window (Section 6.2.6), as follows:
a. The selected Type in the Add\Edit Printer Device window is
Dicom.
b. The correct Sub Type was selected in the Dicom Printer Setup
window (either of Imation 8300, Imation 8700, Agfa 2000
color, Agfa 2000 B&W or Codonics).
Patient Calibration study, and click the Load icon (located on the
Screen. Click the Down Arrow in the Film dialog, select the Dicom
printer and click [Submit].
5. If:
troubleshooting.
6. Any adjustments for image quality will be made via the
HCdefaults.win32 file. Refer to Section 6.2.6.10.9.

6.2.6.10.8 Printer Interface
This section provides details on how to interface the DICOM Printers to the
Xeleris system via the LAN.
DICOM Printer.
2 DICOM
1 3 Printer
4
10/100 Base-T
HUB
Figure 6-23 Xeleris to DICOM Printer Interconnection
Table 6–23: DICOM Printer Network Interface Cables
Cable
Run
1 Xeleris CAT 5 Cable GEMS Section 3.2.3 –

Cabling and Linking
on page 3-7
2 10 Base–T Printer Vendor or GEMS Printer User’s

Transceiver fro Manual
printer.
3 Printer’s CAT 5
Cable

6.2.6.10.9 Configuration
The Basic Grayscale and Color Management SOP Classes provide a number
of configurable parameters for image quality. These parameters are either set
by the printer or sent by the Xeleris. The parameters sent by the Xeleris are
configured as follows:
1. Perform Xeleris Full shutdown, if required.
4. Click [Add].
5. From the Type pull-down menu, in the Add/Edit Printer Device
window, select Dicom.
6. In the Dicom Printer Setup window type or choose the following
information. Table 6–25 lists the default setting for each of the validated
printers:
Printer Name Printer name

IP Address Host name assigned to printer’s IP
address on the Hosts Tab of the
Configuration utility
port The printer’s TCP listening port #.
AE Title DICOM SCP AE Title -The printer’s
AE Title
Sub Type
Orientation Portrait Landscape
Medium type Hardcopy Medium - PAPER, CLEAR
FILM, BLUE FILM
Paper size 8INX10IN, 14INX17IN, 10INX14IN,
24CMX24CM, 24CMX30CM
Polarity NORMAL, REVERSE
Color yes no
Border Density Defined in printer documentation
Empty Image Density Black White 200
7. Click [OK] in each window, to acknowledge the setup information.

In case further configuration is required, it has to be done via the

HCdefaults.win32 file and can be edited using the Notepad. In addition
to the image quality parameters, the HCdefaults.win32 file also contains
the settings for the printers AE Title and Port #.
Table 6–24 defines additional DICOM parameters that can be edited in the
HCdefaults.win32 file. Table 6–25 lists the default setting for each of the
validated printers.
Table 6–24: DICOM Print Parameter Definition
Xeleris
DICOM
Hardcopy Server Definition
Parameter
Parameter
Film Destination destination Destination of Film - MAGAZINE,

PROCESSOR
Mag Type <fmt_num>.magnification Magnification Type - REPLICATE,

BILINEAR, CUBIC, NONE
Max Density <fmt_num>.max_density Max density - Defined in printer

documentation.
Min Density <fmt_num>.min_density Min density - Defined in printer

documentation.
Photometric <fmt_num>.photmetric_in... RGB - Color, MONOCHROME1 -

Interpretation Black on White (0 pix=white),
MONOCHROME2 - White on Black
(0 pix=black)
CAUTION
Do not change parameters that are not listed in this table.

It is advisable not to change parameters that were set up in the user interface
(Step 6 above)

Table 6–25: DICOM Print Parameters Default Settings
Default Settings
DICOM
Parameter Imation 8300 Imation 8700 Codonics AGFA - Color AGFA - B&W
(DCMI8300) (DCMI8700) (DCMcod) (DCMA2KCl) (DCMA2KBW)
IP Address imation imat8700 codicom agfa2k agfa2k

(See Note)
AE Title 3M_8300 3M_PrintServer PRINT_SCP Drystar Drystar
Port # 104 1024 104 104 104
Medium Type CURRENT CURRENT PAPER CLEAR CLEAR
Film PROCESSOR CURRENT PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSOR

Destination
Film Orientation LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE LANDSCAPE LANDSCAPE
Film Size ID 8INX10IN 14INX17IN 8INX10IN 8INX10IN 8INX10IN
Mag Type CUBIC CUBIC BILINEAR CUBIC CUBIC
Max Density 300 300 64000 Default Default
Min Density 0 0 0 Default Default
Border Density BLACK BLACK WHITE 200 200
Empty Image BLACK BLACK WHITE 200 200

Dens
Polarity REVERSE NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL
Photometric MONOCHROME1 MONOCHROME1 RGB RGB MONOCHROME1

Interp
Note The IP Address is associated with the host name listed in Table 6–24. The host
name and IP Address are added to the Hosts Tab of the Configuration Utility.

If any parameter needs to be edited use the following steps:

1. Move to the Data Management screen and click the minimize button
on the top–right corner of the screen.
2. To enter the Config directory, double-click the Xeleris Command
Prompt on the desktop and type:
CD Config
3. Type the following to backup the HCdefaults.win32 file:
copy HCdefaults.win32 HCdefaults.win32.org <Enter>
4. Type the following to open the HCdefaults.win32 file using the
notepad editor:
notepad HCdefaults.win32 <Enter>
5. Type the following to go to the line containing the xxxxx parameter:
<Ctrl>+<F> xxxxx <Enter>
The cursor will be set on the first character of the desired line. e.g.,
ISGmfhd.white_set: 0
6. Press the arrow key until the cursor is over the first character to be
changed. overtype this character.
File → Save
File → Exit
8. Type the following to copy the modified HCdefaults.win32 file in the
\config directory:
copy HCdefaults.win32 HCdefaults.win32.bak <Enter>

Note The AE Title for these printers will most likely need to be changed to match what
the printer’s local service engineer has set.
To find a specific printers parameters, search on the DCM field for that printer. For
example, to find the parameters for the Imation8300, search for DCMI8300.

6.2.6.10.10 Adding a New Printer
To add a DICOM printer that is not currently defined:

1. Add the new printer under the Printers tab in the Configuration
utility, as follows:
a. For the Printer Name enter a descriptive name for the printer (no
Spaces).
b. For the Device Type, enter one of the defined DICOM device
types. Refer to Table 6–26 for which device type to use.
Table 6–26: Default Hardcopy Server Device Type for DICOM Printing
Xeleris
Printer Type Hardcopy Server
Device Type
Monochrome Printer - 8x10 Film DCMI8300
Monochrome Printer - 14x17 Film DCMI8700
Color Printer - 8x10 Media DCMA2KCl
c. Enter the IP Address of the printer.

2. Open the HCdefaults.win32 file using the Notepad editor as
explained in Section 6.2.6.10.9, above. Go to the parameter for the
device type defined in the Step 1.
3. Set the DICOM parameters per the printer’s DICOM conformance
statement. At a minimum the AE Title and Port # must match the
printer’s SCP definition. The max and min height/width may also need
to be changed based on the printer’s conformance statement.
File → Save
File → Exit

6.2.6.11 Sony DICOM Printer
The Sony color printer may be used for monochrome printing with Sony Blue
Thermal Transparent Film (UPT-730BL/731BL) and Sony Clear Thermal
Transparent Film (UPT-730CL/731CL) or for full color printing with Sony
Self-Laminating Color Printing Pack (UPC-740/741).
The printer has two components:

z The Sony UP-D70XR color printer
z The UPA-D3 DICOM processor
The DICOM image output is sent to the UPA-D3 processor using TCP/IP
where it is converted into a raster image and is then sent to the printer via a
SCSI cable for printing.
The instructions for installing and configuring the Sony DICOM printer are
provided in the following breakdown:
z Section 6.2.6.11.1 – Requirements on page 6-71
z Section 6.2.6.11.2 – Installation and Configuration on page 6-71,
which consists of the following steps to be performed in the given
order:
Section a. – Hardware Installation on page 6-71
Section b. – Setting the UPA-3D Processor on page 6-72
Section c. – Configuring the Sony Printer on the Xeleris on
page 6-73
z Section 6.2.6.11.3 – Testing on page 6-73

6.2.6.11.1 Requirements
z A laptop or PC computer with HyperTerminal remote access

software, required for Setting the UPA-D3 processor
z RS-232C null-cable (included with the printer)
z A Cat-5 cable (included with the printer)
z Sony Digital Color Printer (UP-D70XR) operating instructions
(included with the printer)
z A unique IP address for the UPA-D3 processor (to be provided by
the Site System Administrator)
z A netmask address (to be provided by the Site System Administrator)
z Default gateway address (optional)
6.2.6.11.2 Installation and Configuration
a. Hardware Installation
1. Set the 4 dip switches, located at the back of the printer, to ON (up), OFF
(down), ON, OFF, from left to right, respectively (Figure 6-24).
ON
OFF
Figure 6-24 Printer DIP Switches Setup
2. Place the processor on top of the printer.

3. Connect the printer and the UPA-D3 processor to the power outlet.
4. Refer to the operating instructions for the Sony UP-D70XR printer and
place the ink ribbon holder and the paper in the printer.
5. Using the supplied SCSI cable, connect the printer to the UPA-D3
processor.
6. Plug the Cat-5 cable into the network 10 BASE-T connector (located on
the rear panel of the UPA-D3) and into the LAN socket respectively.
Note Do not use the cross-over cable supplied with the printer.

7. Using the RS-232C cable, connect the laptop/PC computer COM1 or

COM2 port to the UPA-D3 serial port.
Note If you use a laptop/PC to setup the UPA-D3, connect the RS-232 cable to
COM1.
If you use an Xeleris computer to setup the UPA-D3 instead of a laptop/PC,
connect the RS-232 cable to the Xeleris COM2
b. Setting the UPA-3D Processor

1. On the laptop/PC computer, run the HyperTerminal program by clicking:
[Start] → Programs → Accessories → HyperTerminal →
Hyperterm.
2. Type an identifying name (e.g. sony) and click [OK].
3. In the Phone Number dialog box, click the down arrow next to
Connect Using to display the drop-down list and select the laptop/PC
serial port that you used when connecting the RS-232C cable (Step 7 in
Section a. above). The COM Properties dialog box opens.
4. Click [OK].
5. In the COM1/COM2 Properties window, set the port settings to:
Bit Rate 9600bps
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bit 1
Flow Control Hardware
6. Click [OK].
7. Switch ON the UPA-D3 processor pressing the power button for 1
second. A boot script is displayed in the HyperTerminal window.
After boot-up has been completed (about 2 minutes), Console Login:
appears on the screen.
8. Type scp and press <Enter>. The prompt changes to scp #.
9. Type setup.net and press <Enter>.
10. Type-in the Sony printer’s IP address and press <Enter>. The netmask
prompt appears.
11. Type-in the netmask address. The default gateway prompt appears.
12. Type-in the default gateway address, if relevant, and press <Enter>. The
new network parameters are displayed.

13. Shutdown the UPA-D3 processor by pressing the power switch for 3
seconds.
14. Switch ON the printer.
15. Switch ON the UPA-D3 keeping the power switch pressed for 1 second.
Note Always switch ON the printer before switching on the UPA-3D processor.
To monitor the printer’s operation, keep the laptop computer connected.

It is possible to use telnet to monitor the UPA-D3 processor in the same
manner as a Codonics printer.
c. Configuring the Sony Printer on the Xeleris

1. Click [Configuration].
2. Select the Printers tab and click [Add]. The Add/Edit Printer
Device window opens.
3. Check the Used box and enter a name (e.g. sony or any other name).
4. Click the Type drop-down list and select Dicom.
5. Click [Setup]. The Setup window opens.
6. Type-in or select the following information:
IP Address Sony printer IP address
Port 104
AE Title Sony-NM6
Sub-type SONY
7. Click [OK] to close each of the 3 open dialog boxes.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
8. Perform Full shutdown of the Xeleris application.
6.2.6.11.3 Testing
1. Restart Xeleris.
2. Choose a suitable study from the patient directory.
3. Click the Printer icon on the Processing and Review screen.
4. In the Film dialog, click [Submit & Expose].

6.2.7 Database Configuration
6.2.7.1 Remote Database Access by LAN

2. Click [System Setup] .

4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Database tab.
Figure 6-25 Database tab
5. To add remote databases, click [Add]; then, type in the name of the
remote server and its IP address.

6. Ensure that the Connect at startup option is NOT checked.

When it is checked, the system will attempt to connect to this database at
startup, which may take a long time.
When unchecked, it is possible to connect to the desired database, by
selecting it as a source/destination repository at the Database
Management Xeleris screen.
Figure 6-26 Add Database Server
7. Click [Verify] to confirm connectivity to the database.

A hostname verification dialog is displayed.
Figure 6-27 Hostname Verification
If the verification process fails, a Host Properties dialog is displayed,

prompting for the correct IP Address. Enter the IP address; then click
[OK] to confirm.

8. Click [OK] to close the Add Database Server window.

9. Ensure that a green checkmark appears next to the newly added database
Figure 6-28 Database tab – Newly added database
Note In order to avoid duplicate repository names, if a remote system needs to be set up
as both a Remote Database Server and a Remote DICOM Station, it is strongly
recommended not to apply the same name in both configurations.
For the Remote Database Server, add _DB to the end of the name; for the Remote
DICOM Station, add _DCM to the end of the name.
10. Repeat the above step for every remote database you want to add.
11. Click [OK] to close the Xeleris Configuration window.
shutdown.

Note It is recommended to configure only the Central Database as remote database,

on each Xeleris system.
6.2.7.2 Remote Database Access by Modem
Note This procedure is applicable only for Xeleris systems that require connecting to other
Xeleris and eNTEGRA 2.5 systems via modem (dial-in).
Remote database access by modem consists of the following procedures, to

be performed in the given order:
z Installing the modem on page 6-77
z Modem configuration on page 6-79
z Remote Database Configuration (Server Side) on page 6-81
z Remote Database Configuration - Client Side on page 6-87
6.2.7.2.1 Installing the modem
1. Double-click My Computer (minimize the Xeleris application if

necessary).
2. Double-click Control Panel.
3. Double-click Phone and modem options.

4. Click the Modem tab. The Phone and Modem Options dialog box
appears (Figure 6-29).
Figure 6-29 Modem Installation - 1
5. If there is a mismatch between the modem type or the COM port in use,
or if there is no modem listed, proceed to Step 6, below. Otherwise click
[Cancel] and proceed to Section 6.2.7.2.2 – Modem configuration.
6. If there is a modem listed, select it and click [Remove]. Then confirm it
by clicking [Yes]
7. Plug in the new modem and wait till the system detects the new modem
(plug and play).
8. If the system doesn’t detect the new modem, refer to the troubleshooting
section – Section 9.16.1.1 – Modem Installation on page 9-20.

6.2.7.2.2 Modem configuration
To configure the modem to enable dialing through the Dial-Up Networking

facility:
1. Click [Start] on the Windows Task Bar, and select Settings >
Control Panel.
2. In the control panel window double-click Phone and modem
options.
3. In the opened Dialing Rules tab, click [My Location] (Figure 6-30).

The Edit Location dialog opens, displaying the General tab

(Figure 6-31).
4. In the Edit Location dialog:

a. From the Country/ region box, select your country/region from the
drop-down list.
b. Type in your area code.
c. Type in the number required to access an outside line, if any.
d. Select the applicable Dial using option: (Tone or Pulse).
e. Click [OK].
f. In the Dialing rules dialog, click [OK].

6.2.7.2.3 Remote Database Configuration (Server Side)
On the system you wish to connect to, configure the “incoming connection”
to allow the remote modem to connect.
Note If the modem is used for a direct InSite connection, the modem is already configured
to receive calls. So continue with Section 6.2.7.2.4 – Remote Database
Configuration - Client Side on page 6-87.
1. Click [Start] on the Windows Task Bar, and select: Settings ->
Network connection -> new connection wizard (Figure 6-32).

2. Click [Next] (Figure 6-33).
3. Choose Set up an advanced connection and click [Next]

(Figure 6-34).

4. Choose Accept incoming connections and click [Next]

(Figure 6-35).
5. Check the modem you are using and click [Next] (Figure 6-36).

6. Choose Do not allow virtual private connections and click [Next]

(Figure 6-37).
7. Choose the users that are allowed to connect to the system (for Xeleris
the default user name used for connection is Xeleris). Click [Next]
(Figure 6-38).

8. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) option and click the

Properties button. The Incoming TCP/IP Properties dialog opens
(Figure 6-39).
9. Uncheck the checkbox next to Allow callers to access my local

area network.
10. Type in the modem begin and end IP addresses (the first and 3rd IP
address of the three sequential unique IP addresses assigned for the
modem). The IP address can be any (random) IP address as long as it not
in the same subnet with that of the PC.
11. Click [OK].

12. In the New Connection Wizard screen click [Next] (Figure 6-40).
13. Click [Finish] to finish the modem configuration.

14. Make sure that the incoming connection option was added (Figure 6-41).
Figure 6-41 Network Connections
6.2.7.2.4 Remote Database Configuration - Client Side
Note It is recommended to configure only the Central Database as remote database on

each Xeleris system.

4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Database tab.
Figure 6-42 Database Tab
5. If you want to connect to a database that is not included in the database

options list:

a. Click [Add].
Figure 6-43 Add Database Server
b. Type in the name of the remote server and its modem IP address.
c. Ensure that the Connect at startup option is NOT checked.
When it is checked, the system will attempt to connect to this
database at startup, which may take a long time.
When unchecked, it is possible to connect to the desired database by
selecting it as a source/destination repository at the Database
Management Xeleris screen.
d. Click the check box next to Connect via modem.
e. Type in the User Name, i.e. the Login User Name of the remote
Xeleris (eNTEGRA default = entegra; Xeleris default = xeleris).
f. Type in the Password, i.e. the Login Password of the remote
Xeleris (eNTEGRA default = entegra; Xeleris default = xeleris)
g. Type in the Phone Number.
h. Select the modem from the defined modems drop-down list.
i. Type in the LAN Address, i.e. the IP address through which the
remote server connects to its LAN.
j. Click [Verify] to check modem connection.

The program displays a dialog with the connection details and

connection status.
Figure 6-44 Connect Testing
k. If a modem connection was established, click [Disconnect] to

terminate the connection.
l. Click [OK].
Note You can define the same database once for LAN access and once for Modem
access, by assigning it two names. This is useful for laptop computers that can
connect to the LAN when in the clinic, and can connect via modem from remote.
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK] to acknowledge the message requesting Xeleris shutdown.

6.2.8 DICOM Configuration
Note To enable DICOM connectivity, the local Xeleris must be configured on the remote
DICOM systems.

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Dicom tab.
Figure 6-45 DICOM tab
4. For each remote station with which the system is to communicate via
DICOM (refer to Table 6–27 for DICOM configuration parameters):

a. Click [Add].
Figure 6-46 Add Remote DICOM Station
b. Type in the Host name, AE (Application Entity), IP address of the

Remote station, and Port number.
Note For remote workstations DICOM configuration (Genie P&R, eNTEGRA, Xeleris), in
order to avoid duplicate repository names in the Database Management screen, it
is strongly recommended not to apply the same Remote Station Name in both
configurations.
For the Remote DICOM Station, add _DCM to the end of the name.
c. Verify that the appropriate flags are checked to enable the

corresponding operations. The following flags are available:
The Store Images option enables the configured DICOM
device to store data (show up as a destination on Xeleris).
The Query/Retrieve option allows Xeleris to retrieve data from
the configured device (show up as a source on Xeleris).

Choose the PET Raw data destination option when

configuring the Discovery ST PET station.
The Filtered option forces a query dialog box to open, when
selecting this station as source, and allows the user to filter the
information passed back from the remote station.
d. Click [OK].
5. Click [Echo] to check the connection to the remote Dicom station.
If the Dicom setup is correct, and the Dicom server at the remote station
is up, the message Remote station is online will appear.
Otherwise, an error message will be displayed in the Status field.

To solve the problem, check station definitions at both ends, and verify
that the Dicom Server at the destination is up.
6. When all remote DICOM stations have been added:
If receiving data from an unknown user is to be enabled:
a. Click [Advanced...] at the Local Machine group.
b. At the Advanced Local Station Configuration dialog, select
Allow to receive data from unknown user.
c. Click [OK] to close the Advanced Local Station
Configuration dialog.
For sites that have Discovery ST system,

a. Click [Advanced...] at the Remote Stations group.
b. At the Default DICOM Destination Definitions dialog, from the
PET Raw data destination drop-down menu, select the default
destination for PET Raw data, retrieved from an archive media.
c. Click [OK] to close the Default DICOM Destination
Definitions dialog.
7. Click [OK] to close the Xeleris Configuration dialog.
8. Click [OK] to acknowledge the message requesting to Restart
Services.
10. Click the Stop Servers icon on the desktop.
Note DICOM printers are not configured during this step. The DICOM print Application
Entity (AE) is separate from the DICOM image transfer AE. DICOM printers are
configured during hardcopy configuration.

Table 6–27: DICOM Configuration Parameters
Port Flags (Service

System Type Station Name IP Address Application Entity
# Class)
Xeleris Limitations: Per system’s Host name in upper 104 Send, Query, Fetch
• Less than 12 TCP/IP case letters
characters configuration
eNTEGRA Host name in upper 104 Send, Query, Fetch
• Only letters (a-z, A- case letters
Z), Numbers (0-9) or
Genie P&R underscores (_) are Host name in upper 2030 Send, Query, Fetch
allowed. case letters
XPert As defined by the local 104 Send, Query, Fetch

Case Sensitive
Genie Acq Host name in upper 2030 Query, Fetch

case letters
Millennium VG As defined by the local 104 Query, Fetch,

system administrator. Translate Ch. Set*
Case Sensitive
PowerStation As defined by the local 4104 Send, Query, Fetch

Case Sensitive
Other Systems Refer to the system’s DICOM Conformance statement.
6.2.8.1 Setting up a DICOM Configuration from a Vision Station
This section is applicable when you are required to enter the parameters of a
DICOM camera that exist on a Vision station.
1. Login to the Vision station.
2. Go to the Application Manager window, and select the General tab.
3. Double click the Configure Icon.
4. Click the Dicom Services button.
5. For each Dicom station from the Defined Services List, record the
following parameters:
z AE Title (SCP).
z Hostname.
z Ip Address (from “Notes” List) for specific Hostname.
z Port (SCP).

6. Proceed with adding each of the Vision DICOM stations on the Xeleris,
as described in Section 6.2.8 – DICOM Configuration on page 6-91,
Step 4.
6.2.9 StarLink and ApexNet Configuration

(applicable only if the OSI option is installed)

4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the OSI tab.
Figure 6-47 OSI Tab

On systems, where a second network card is installed, select the card that is
Important
connected to the LAN, from the drop-down list.
You can verify which card is connected to the LAN by checking the network cable
entry point to the computer, and according to the following table:
Network Card Model
On-Board on XW5000 Intel Pro 100 M.
On-Board on XW4100 BroadCom.
Second network card Intel Pro 1000 MT.
5. Click [Add].
Figure 6-48 Add/Edit OSI Station
6. Type in the Remote Station Name.

7. Select the type from the drop–down list (Starcam or SP).
8. Type in the Ethernet address of the remote station.
9. Click [OK] to close the Add/Edit OSI Station window.
10. Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 to add more stations.
shutdown.
Note Verify that the same date format is used on Xeleris and the OSI systems. Different
date formats may result in some of the studies not appearing in a query and incorrect
dates after retrieving the data on Xeleris.

6.2.9.1 Configuring the Xeleris on Remote OSI Stations
Note The following procedure is only necessary if you want to export data from the legacy
system to Xeleris. At this stage Xeleris can import data from the legacy system.
6.2.9.1.1 Starlink Version 4 Upgrade for Polestar and Polestar-i Systems
1. Shut down the Polestar system by entering shutdown <Sendform>.

2. Reboot the system by pressing the RESET button.
3. When prompted, press <Esc> to Enter Monitor.
4. At the Monitor prompt enter B <Enter> to boot the system into RMX.
5. Type super <Enter> at the login prompt.
6. Type passme <Enter> at the password prompt.
7. Insert the Starlink V4 floppy.
8. At the RMX prompt type LOADSUPP <Enter>.
With the Startup floppy in the drive type
L to LOAD followed by RETURN
E to Exit followed by RETURN....
9. Type L <Enter>.
Not the correct Startup Floppy.
Insert any floppy and enter.
L to LOAD followed by RETURN
E to Exit followed by RETURN....
10. Type L <Enter>.

SL4 Starlink Supplement V1
O.K.
11. Remove Starlink V4 floppy.

12. Type sh <Enter> to shut system down.
13. Reboot the system to Starcam by pressing the RESET button.
14. Type ZSCF 7 <Sendform> to list software present.
15. Verify that the Starlink option is present and that the version is at 4.0.
16. Add the Xeleris workstation to the Starlink Configuration file via the
NAST command

In order to configure the Xeleris to the Starlink Configuration file, get the
Xeleris Ethernet address, using the following procedure:
a. Click [Start] on the Tasks Bar, and select Programs → Impart 32
→ Comms Lines Manager.
b. Type D <Enter> for full display.

c. Under the DTE column you will find the Ethernet address of the
local Xeleris system (a 12-digit hexadecimal number).
Record the Physical (Ethernet) address displayed in the site log
book.
d. Type q <Enter> to quit.
6.2.9.1.2 Starlink Version 3 Upgrade for Starcam Build Standard 0
1. Shut down the Starcam system by entering shutdown <Sendform>.

2. Reboot the system by pressing the following keys together:
<Ctrl> RIGHT <Shift> <Q>.
3. When prompted, press <Esc> to Enter Monitor.
4. At the Monitor prompt type B <Enter> to reboot system into RMX.
5. At the RMX prompt type LOADOPT <Enter>.
6. Insert the STARTUP floppy.
7. Type L <Enter>.
8. When prompted, remove STARTUP floppy and insert Starlink V3 Key
floppy.
9. Type L <Enter>.
10. Type C <Enter>.
11. Remove Key floppy and type E <Enter> to exit back to RMX.
12. Insert CV system floppy.
13. Type AF :AFD0: <Enter>.
14. Type s r’?’load.csd <Enter> to update the Starlink files.
15. Type shutdown <Enter> to shut system down.
16. Reboot the system to Starcam by pressing the following keys together:
<Ctrl> RIGHT <Shift> <Q>.
17. Type ZSCF 7 <Sendform> to list software present.
18. Verify that the Starlink option is present and that the version is 3.05.

NAST command.
The Xeleris Ethernet (LAN) address is displayed in the OSI tab (see
Figure 6-47 on page 6-95).
6.2.9.1.3 Starlink Version 4 Upgrade for Starcam Build Standard 1 & 2
1. Refer to the documentation shipped with the H2508JA catalog to

upgrade Starlink software to Version 4.
NAST command.
The Xeleris Ethernet (LAN) address is displayed in the OSI tab (see
3. Getting the Ethernet Address of Star-based systems
1. Go to the patient database on the system.
2. Find the patient named Starlink.
3. Expand the study named Stations.
4. The entry named local contains the Ethernet address of the system.

6.2.9.1.4 Getting the Ethernet Address and Names of SP Based Systems
To get the Ethernet addresses, types and names of all the SP based systems
residing on the ApexNet, type in the Command Line of a remote SP based
system ETCONFIG and press <Enter>. This results with the following
display:
LOCAL COMMUNICATION ADDRESS: 00AA000XXXXX
LOCAL WRITE PROTECT (Y/N): N
STATION ID TYPE COMMUNICATION ADDRESS
STATION LABEL
N0 A 00AA0004460B SP1
N1 A 00AA00044802 HELIX
N2 A 00AA00034BBC CardiaL
Where:
z The LOCAL COMMUNICATION ADDRESS is the unique Ethernet Address
of the system (stored in the system's Ethernet Controller Board),
which consists of a fixed prefix (00AA000) and five variable
hexadecimal digits (indicated by XXXXX).
z TYPE A refers to an APEX SP system
TYPE G refers to an APEX 400 system.
z The STATION LABEL is the station’s name.
Note After the Xeleris system has been configured on all the remote OSI stations, log on
to Xeleris and verify communication with the StarLink and SP based systems.

6.2.10 Configuring DST (SMV) Systems (STP3)

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the STP3 tab.
Figure 6-49 STP3 Tab
4. Select Enable STP connectivity to start the STP server when Xeleris
is activated.
5. Click [Refresh], in order to display the connected SMV stations.
Note The refresh action has to be repeated every time a station is added or removed.
Note The DST Host Name should include only alpha-numeric characters:
(A-Z, a-z) and "-", "_".
Do not use any other characters.

6. Verify that:
z Don’t delete dataset file(s) after conversion... is not selected.
z Don’t delete dataset file(s) on conversion failure is selected,
to ensure that the original file(s) will not be lost if they were deleted
from the DST (SMV) station. Thus, if either the conversion or the
storage in the database failed, upon the next start of the STP server,
restoring the file(s) in the database will be available.
7. The following additional options are available:
To disable the Filter Dialog feature, select the STP3 station, click
[Edit], uncheck the Filter checkbox, and click [OK].
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK] to acknowledge the request to perform Partial shutdown of
Xeleris.
6.2.10.1 Enabling DST-XLi printing via Xeleris
The following instructions enable the sending of DST-XLi images to the

Xeleris default printer.
1. On the DST (SMV) camera configure the Xeleris workstation as a
remote printer. Refer to the DST (SMV) service documentation.
2. Define the default printer for DST printing:
a. Edit the file (in Notepad):
D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Resources\PrinterDevices.txt
b. In the list of printers, choose the printer you want as a default for
DST-XLI printing. For example: the user wants to define agfa as the
default printer from the file, which contains two printer definitions.
Note The elements are shown here as bold for information purposes only. In the actual
text file no bold appears.

=========================================================
Einstein.PrDevice.Count: 2
Einstein.PrDevice.Default:1
Einstein.PrDevice1.Name: codonics
Einstein.PrDevice1.Port: localhost:4040
Einstein.PrDevice1.Type: Eincodonics
Einstein.PrDevice1.Used: on
Einstein.PrDevice1.Sync: off
Einstein.PrDevice1.Dispatch: demand
Einstein.PrDevice1.Width: 1024
Einstein.PrDevice1.Height: 1024
Einstein.PrDevice1.formats: 1x1 2x2 3x3
Einstein.PrDevice1.Format.Default: 1x1
Einstein.PrDevice2.Name: agfa
Einstein.PrDevice2.Port: localhost:4040
Einstein.PrDevice2.Type: Einagfa
Einstein.PrDevice2.Used: on
Einstein.PrDevice2.Sync: off
Einstein.PrDevice2.Dispatch: demand
Einstein.PrDevice2.formats: 1x1 1x2 2x2 2x3
Einstein.PrDevice2.Format.Default: 1x1
====================================================
The key value for agfa is 2 (as shown above) Einstein.PrDevice2.Name: agfa
c. Update the value of Einstein.PrDevice.Default: to “2”

Example: Einstein.PrDevice.Default: 2
d. Save the file: PrinterDevices.txt in Notepad editor and exit the
editor.
3. Perform Step 1 through Step 4 of Section 6.2.10 – Configuring DST
(SMV) Systems (STP3) on page 6-101, above.
4. Perform Step 8 through Step 10 of Section 6.2.10 – Configuring DST
(SMV) Systems (STP3) on page 6-101, above.

6.2.11 Configuring Vision (optional)
This configuration is applicable for sites that need to connect to the Vision
database (Section 6.2.11.1 – Configuring the Remote Vision Database), or to
display clinical data from Vision Archive media (Section 6.2.11.3 –
Configuring the Vision Archive).
It is also applicable for sites with SMV Interface PCs that are connected to
Vision Stations and would like to connect directly to Xeleris
(Section 6.2.11.2 – Configuring the Vision Database Server). In these cases,
the use of the Vision station may be discontinued after the direct connection
to Xeleris is established.
6.2.11.1 Configuring the Remote Vision Database
This configuration will allow the user to fetch data from the Vision
PowerStation database to Xeleris database.
On Xeleris

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Vision tab.
Figure 6-50 Vision Tab
4. Click the [Add] button to add new Vision station:
Figure 6-51 Add/Edit Vision Station
a. Select Available.
b. Type in the Station Name.
c. Type in the IP Address in the Hostname/IP text box.

d. Type in the Path of the database on the Vision system.

5. Click [OK] to add the Vision system.
6. Repeat Step 4 through Step 5 to add more Vision stations.
7. Click [OK] to close the Xeleris Configuration window.
Xeleris.
9. Perform Partial Xeleris shutdown; then restart Xeleris.
On the Vision Station

10. In order to grant free remote access to the Vision remote system:
a. Login as user vision (password, if needed, is vision).
b. Edit the .rhosts file (if it does not exist, create it).
c. For every station that is supposed to access Vision, the following line
needs to be added to the .rhosts file to allow access to the Vision
system.
Verify that this line is not present before adding it.
[Host name of the Xeleris workstation] [space] +.
For example: xeleris1 +
Note In some cases when the “+” wildcard is not recognized by the remote host, replace
the line above with:
[Host name of the Xeleris workstation] [space] [username on the
Xeleris]
d. Execute the command:

chmod go-w .rhosts
to ensure that the file permissions are correct.
Note For Linux systems (or if the above procedure does not work for Sun-based UNIX
systems), it is necessary to configure the /etc/hosts.equiv file instead of the .rhosts
file. This modification must be performed while logged in as root. To log in as root,
enter the command:
su - ("su [space] -" logs in as a superuser – with root access)
enter password: vision
Add a line for each xeleris system to the file, as described above.
11. In order to define an Xeleris host on the Vision remote system:

a. Login as user: root (password: vision).

b. Edit the file /etc/hosts.
c. For every station that is supposed to access the Vision station, add a
new line with the following information:
[IP Address] [Hostname]
For example: 192.9.200.2 xeleris1
6.2.11.2 Configuring the Vision Database Server
This configuration will enable sending data from SMV interface PCs directly
to Xeleris database.
The following devices can be connected directly to Xeleris:

z Analog and Digital Acquisition Station
z Data Transport System
z FX Camera
z Hitachi SCSI Acquisition Station
z Toshiba WORM Emulator

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Vision tab
Note Controls are disabled if VisionDB license is not present
4. Select the Enable Local Server checkbox.

5. Enter the value in the Size field [Default = 10Mb] (this is the maximum
size of the Vision database).
Note If required to reset the contents of the local Vision DB to an "empty" state, click
[Initialize]. To minimize the amount of space occupied by the local Vision DB, the
contents should be re-initialized on a periodic basis. This can be done manually
using EConf or the user will be prompted when the maximum size is exceeded

Configuring Xeleris on The Interface PC:
On each of the following devices, Xeleris is configured the same as the Vision
workstation is configured:
6.2.11.2.1 Hitachi SCSI Acquisition Station, Toshiba WORM Emulator and Data Transport System
1. Add the Xeleris station to the ...\wattcp\hosts file.

Add a new line with the following information:
[Xeleris IP Address] [Xeleris Hostname]
2. To define the Xeleris as the default database, edit the site.bat file as
follows:.
Replace the PowerStation hostname with Xeleris hostname in the
DBSERVER line:
set DBSERVER=[Xeleris Hostname]
For example: set DBSERVER=xeleris1
6.2.11.2.2 Analog and Digital Acquisition Station
1. Add the Xeleris station to the ...\wattcp\hosts file.

Add a new line with the following information:
[Xeleris IP Address] [Xeleris Hostname]
2. Add the Xeleris station hostname to the servers list in file:
\vision\dbsrvrs
3. To define the Xeleris as the default database, edit the site.bat file.
Replace the PowerStation hostname with Xeleris hostname in the
DBSERVER line:
set DBSERVER=[Xeleris Hostname]
For example: set DBSERVER=xeleris1
6.2.11.2.3 FX Camera
Run the system configure utility (sysconfig) and define Xeleris as a database.

6.2.11.3 Configuring the Vision Archive

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Vision tab.
4. Select the archive device from which vision data is to be displayed. The
following devices are available: CD ROM, Optical, Floppy, Tape.
Note The floppy drive checkbox on the Devices section of the Vision dialog is disabled
on HP XW6200 computers.
WARNING
To avoid system errors, while choosing drive letters, do not change the drive
letters from the Xeleris Configuration menu, and ensure that the drive letters are
assigned correctly. See Section 9.5 – Assigning Drive Letters on page 9-6.
To identify the appropriate drive letter:
1. Minimize Xeleris, and double-click My Computer on the desktop.

2. Insert the media into the drive.
3. Right-click each removable drive, and select Eject, until the medium is
ejected.
4. Record the correspondent drive.
5. Maximize Xeleris, and select the archive device drive letter from the Drive
drop-down menu.
screen).
Note For the Optical Drive configuration, both the Drive letter and the Disk number have
to be defined. In case the Disk number is not defined automatically, it should be
entered manually.
To find the disk number, follow these steps:
1. Right click on My Computer and select Manage.

2. In Computer Management, go to Disk Management and select the
appropriate number from the Optical Disk Drive.
3. Close the Computer Management window.
5. Click [OK].
Xeleris.

6.2.12 Configuring Foreign DB (Optional)
This configuration applies only to sites that have Picker cameras.

1. Copy the Picker license file to D:\Einstein\Licences.

4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Foreign DB tab.
Figure 6-52 Foreign BD Tab

To enable Picker connectivity:

a. Select Enable Picker Connectivity.
b. Type in the Hostname / IP Address (of the remote Picker
System).
Note If entering a Hostname, that hostname must be defined in the Xeleris host table,
via the Hosts tab in the Xeleris Configuration window.
c. Type in the User Name (of the remote Picker System).

d. Type in the DB Path (the database path in the remote Picker
system).
Note To determine the DB Path, look for an archive status window in the main application
window.
Note If it is desired to connect to the All data archives on a Picker system, the path may
be entered using a question mark wildcard (?), (i.e. /img?). This will allow access to
all such archives on that system.
Note If it is desired to connect to all Odyssey systems on a Picker network, the hostname
of the Master system must be entered, along with the /img? database path.
e. Click [OK] to close the Xeleris Configuration window.

f. Click [OK] to acknowledge the request to perform Partial shutdown
of Xeleris.
g. Perform Partial Xeleris shutdown; then restart Xeleris.
On the remote Picker system

5. In order to grant free remote access to the remote system:
a. Login as user User Name (for Odyssey systems it is typically
prism).
b. Edit the file .rhosts.
c. For every station that is supposed to access Picker, the following line
needs to be added to the .rhosts file to allow access to the system.
Verify that this line is not present before adding it.
[Host name of the Xeleris workstation] [space] +.
For example: xeleris1 +

Note In some cases when the “+” wildcard is not recognized by the remote host, replace
the line above with:
[Host name of the Xeleris workstation] [space] [username on the
Xeleris]
d. Execute the command:

chmod go-w .rhosts
to ensure that the file permissions are correct.
Note For Linux systems (or if the above procedure does not work for Sun-based UNIX
systems), it is necessary to configure the /etc/hosts.equiv file instead of the .rhosts
file. This modification must be performed while logged in as root. To log in as root,
enter the command:
su - ("su [space] -" logs in as a superuser - with root access)
Enter password (typically POIaxp)
Add a line for each Xeleris system to the file, as described above.
6. In order to define an Xeleris host to the Picker remote system:

a. Login as user root.
b. Edit the file /etc/hosts.
c. For every station that is supposed to access the Picker station, add a
new line with the following information:
[IP Address] [Hostname]
6.2.13 Configuring Foreign Link (Optional)
It is possible to transfer data from two foreign sources: Pegasys ADAC and
ICON Siemens. To configure Foreign Link for this purpose, perform the
following procedures in the given order.
For Pegasys ADAC

z Adding Xeleris as a remote pegasys system on ADAC on page 6-113
z Configuring the ADAC Server on Xeleris on page 6-114
z Configuring the Pegasys on page 6-115
For ICON Siemens

z Sharing a directory on the Xeleris station with PC Maclan on
page 6-116

z Adding Xeleris as a remote system on ICON on page 6-119

z Configuring the ICON Siemens Server on Xeleris on page 6-127
6.2.13.1 Configuring Link to Pegasys ADAC
6.2.13.1.1 Adding Xeleris as a remote pegasys system on ADAC
1. Start the ADAC system.

2. Log on as user pegasys (password: pegasys).
Note This is the standard username for normal Pegasys workstation operation, so if the
workstation is up and running, this step may be skipped.
3. Define the Xeleris as a remote pegasys system (use host name numa for
the Xeleris IP).
a. If the site has multiple ADAC systems, determine which is the
master.
b. Open a Unix shell on the master system, logged in as root (the
default root password is adacsu).
c. Add the following line to the end of the /etc/hosts file:
[Xeleris IP address] [space] numa
For example: 192.9.200.2 numa

If such a line already exists (containing numa), comment it out by
inserting # at the beginning of the line, and only then add the new
line.
d. Verify the new line has been added to the hosts file by entering the
command more hosts.
e. Enter the following commands to rebuild configuration files
(including the host table) on the Pegasys:
(from a command shell)
cd /var/yp
/bin/rm *.time
make
exit
4. Open a UNIX SHELL

5. Verify that the Xeleris system can be seen on the network by entering the
command ping numa in the UNIX SHELL.
If the Xeleris can be seen on the network, numa is alive will be
displayed.
6.2.13.1.2 Configuring the ADAC Server on Xeleris
1. Copy the Pegasys license file to D:\Einstein\Licences.

2. Activate Xeleris, if needed.
3. At the Main Navigation panel, click [System Setup].
4. At the System setup window, click [Config...].

5. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Foreign Link tab.
Figure 6-53 Foreign Link Tab

6. Select Enable Pegasys read.

7. Click the Add button to add a host.
8. Type the Host name (defined in the Hosts tab).
9. If needed, type the IP address.
10. Type the Root Password, if it is different from adacsu.
Figure 6-54 Edit Pegasys Station
11. Click [OK] and confirm the IP address.

Xeleris.
6.2.13.1.3 Configuring the Pegasys
1. Connect to the ADAC system, using telnet, by performing the following

sub-steps.
a. Open the iLinq Shell.

b. Type telnet [adac system ip] <Enter>.
Figure 6-55 Configuring Pegasys
c. Login as
Username: root
Password: adacsu
2. Make a backup of the USER CUSTOM MENU file.
cd /files/pat/APPS
ls
If a user_custom_menu file exists, create a backup of the file.
(If the file does NOT exist, proceed to step 3.)
cp user_custom_menu user_custom_menu.bak
3. Enter the following commands, to create an additional menu for sending
the files to Xeleris.
chmod +x /files/pat/APPS/numa.ins
/files/pat/APPS/numa.ins
exit
6.2.13.2 Configuring Link to ICON Siemens
6.2.13.2.4 Prerequisites
z Miramar license
z Icon license
z ICON Connect Software CD
z Free disk space of ~3.4 Mb
6.2.13.2.5 Sharing a directory on the Xeleris station with PC Maclan
Installing the PC MACLAN on Windows:

1. Log on to the Windows system as an Administrator.
Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1

2. Perform Full Xeleris shutdown, and double-click the Stop Servers

icon to shutdown all servers; then exit any other running programs.
3. Insert the ICON Connect Software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4. When the PC MACLAN window opens, choose the Install PC
MACLAN option.
5. In the License Agreement window, click the Agree button to
indicate that you agree to the conditions set forth in the agreement.
The serial number window is displayed.
6. In the User Information window, make sure the user and company
information is correct, type the serial number, printed on a sticker on the
CD cover and click [Next].
7. Select Complete Installation and click [Next].
8. Click [Install].
9. After installation, click [Finish] and confirm computer restart by
clicking [Yes] in the pop-up that appears.
Adding the Miramar AppleTalk protocol:

1. Log on to the Windows system as an Administrator.
Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
2. Perform Full Xeleris shutdown, and double-click the Stop Servers
icon to shutdown all servers; then exit any other running programs.
3. If your system has two or more network adapters, you will be given an
opportunity to select which adapter will be bound to the AppleTalk
protocol; then click the [OK] button.
Completing the installation:

1. The PC MACLAN Setup Wizard dialog opens.
3. Select None for Share Drive, and click the Next button.
4. Continue according to the instructions, until the process is complete.
(Next → Confirm → Finish)
5. Click Cancel on the Miramar System PCMACLAN Software
Registration Wizard.

Creating the shared directory:

1. Create a new User: icon; Password: iconuser.
a. Double-click the Service Folder icon on the desktop.
b. Run the User administrator, and click [User Manager].
c. At the Local Users and Groups window, right-click Users and
select New User....
d. At the New User window enter:
Username: icon
Password: iconuser
Confirm Password: iconuser
e. Verify that User Must Change Password at Next Logon is not
selected.
f. Select Password Never Expires.
g. Click [Create] and then click [Close] to close the window.
h. Select File Exit to close the window.
i. Close the service folder.
2. Double click the PC MacLan® File Server at the bottom right corner.
3. Select Share Folders... from the Configure menu, or the Share
Folders icon from the appropriate icon in the graphical menu.
4. Select the D:\Einstein\Einstein_Project\ReadIcon\import
directory.
If it does not exist, create it.
5. Click the [Share...] button.
6. Click [OK] in the Sharing Configuration dialog.
7. Click the Done button.
8. Select Users and Groups... from the Configure menu.
9. Double click the icon user on the list (this user will be required when
connecting to the Xeleris system from the ICON system).
10. Insert iconuser as the password for this user, and click [OK].
11. Click [Done] to close the Share Folders dialog.
12. Select Exit from the Server menu, to close the PC MacLan® File
Server dialog.

13. Before proceeding with the Adding Xeleris as a remote system on

the ICON section below, verify that both the Xeleris and ICON systems
are connected to the desired network via LAN connections, using
twisted-pair cables.
6.2.13.2.6 Adding Xeleris as a remote system on ICON
To be performed in the ICON System

1. Click Apple.
2. Select Chooser.
Figure 6-56 Selecting Chooser

3. Select Appleshare.
Figure 6-57 Selecting PC MACLAN
4. Other systems on the network are shown in the Select a file server at
the right.
5. Select the Xeleris system from the list, and connect.
6. Login as user icon (password: iconuser).
Figure 6-58 Connecting to the File Server
7. Click Connect.

8. The MacLan shared directory is displayed. Selecting the check box will
set the ICON to reconnect when it is rebooted.
Figure 6-59 Reconnect After Boot
9. Click [OK].
10. A link to the MacLAN shared directory is displayed as an icon on the
desktop
11. Select File → Quit to close the Chooser window.
“Import” icon added to desktop
Figure 6-60 New Import Icon

Make an Alias reconnect to Xeleris from ICON

1. Click the icon created from the Macintosh connection procedures.
2. Go to File and select MAKE ALIAS.
Figure 6-61 Make Alias
This will make another icon on the desktop.

3. Rename ALIAS as another name that makes sense to the user, such as
Connect to Translation computer.
Figure 6-62 Naming Alias

4. Open /hard disk/system folder/apple menu items.
Figure 6-63 Opening Menu Items

5. Move the new ALIASed icon into the folder.
Figure 6-64 Adding Alias Icon to Menu Items
This will allow the user to select Connect to Translation computer

from the apple menu to reconnect.

ICON® Database Creation tool

1. On the Macintosh computer navigate to the Iconf/db utilities folder.
Figure 6-65 Locating Database Creation Tool
2. Run DBCreator.
3. Select the MacLan® shared directory.
Figure 6-66 Initiating Database

4. Click Create Database.
Figure 6-67 Generating Database
5. When the database creation success message appears, click [OK].

6. Select Quit from the file menu on the menu bar to exit, and close
dbcreator.
7. This should create the ICONF\Patients sub-directories in the Import
MacLan® shared directory.
Figure 6-68 Created Database File

6.2.13.2.7 Configuring the ICON Siemens Server on Xeleris
1. Copy the ICON license file to D:\Einstein\Licences.

2. Click the Xeleris Config icon on the desktop, or if Xeleris is already
running, click [System Setup].
3. At the System setup window, click [Config...].

4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Foreign Link tab.
Figure 6-69 Enabling NUMA Connect Icon Read
5. Select Enable Numa Connect Icon read.

6. Click [OK].
Xeleris.
9. Restart Xeleris.

6.2.14 Export/Import Remote Station Configuration

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Interfile tab.
4. For each remote Interfile station:
a. Click [Add].
b. Type in the Remote station Hostname.
c. Enter the IP Address of the remote Interfile/DICOM station.
d. If the connection is via a dial-up modem, select the Phone number
checkbox, and enter the remote system phone number.
e. Select the station type in the Login Information group. The following
types are available:
Connect to Genie P&R
Connect to eNTEGRA P&R
Connect to Xeleris P&R
User-defined – in this case, enter the remote system username and
password
5. When all remote Interfile/DICOM stations have been added, click [OK].
6. Click [OK] to acknowledge the displayed message, perform a Partial
Xeleris shutdown and reactivate the Xeleris application.

6.2.15 Backup
Backup can be performed on the following media:

z Hard Disk, as per Section 6.2.15.1 on page 6-129
z Network, as per Section 6.2.15.2 on page 6-132
z Removable media
Diskette, as per Section 6.2.15.3 on page 6-136
CD-R or CD-RW, as per Section 6.2.15.4 on page 6-136
Note It is recommended to use the CD-R medium since formatting the CD-RW takes
between 25 to 45 minutes.
Xeleris Licenses can be backed up, as per Section 6.2.15.5 on page 6-137
6.2.15.1 Backup on Hard Disk
2. Click [Config...].

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Backup\Restore tab.
Figure 6-70 Backup\Restore Tab
4. Click the Backup radio button.

5. Browse to D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup, using the
[Browse...] button, until the Backup directory is selected and click
[OK].
6. At the Backup Details group, check the data you wish to back up. The
following options are available:
z Setup
z Protocol Notes
z Color Maps
z User Protocols
z Review Templates
z Protocol Customization
z Archive History

z Import/Export
For backing up all options, two phases need to be done. First, all options
excluding the Archive History, second, only the Archive History.
All options excluding the Archive History
For complete backup ensure that all options are checked, except the
Archive History option.
7. Click [Backup].
10. Perform Full shutdown of Xeleris.
Archive History Only

14. Uncheck all the available options, and check the Archive History
option; then click [Backup].
Two files named Xeleris_YYYYMMDD_HHMMmmm.tar.Z, which

include the backup information are created under
D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup, where:
z YYYYMMDD stands for the date at which the backup file was created.
z HHMMmmm stands for the time at which the backup file was
created, where mmm stands for milliseconds.
Note For restoring the backed up configuration, refer to Section 9.19 – Restoring
Previous Configuration on page 9-29.

6.2.15.2 Backup on Network
Backup to the network can be done by two methods:

z Backing Up Directly to a Remote Station on page 6-132
z Backing Up by Using the Backup/Restore Tool on page 6-133
z Backing Up by Using FTP on page 6-135
6.2.15.2.1 Backing Up Directly to a Remote Station
For accessing a station connected to the network, perform the following:

1. Double click the My Computer icon on the desktop.
2. Browse to D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup.
3. Open the remote station Windows XP Explorer, as follows:
a. Click Start → Run
b. Type \\<Computer Name> <Enter>
Note The Computer Name is case sensitive.
c. If you are prompted to login:

For Xeleris remote stations login with
username wsservice
password #bigguy1
and click <OK>.

For eNTEGRA remote stations login with
username entegra
password entegra
and click <OK>.

4. At the local Explorer, copy the compressed backup file to the remote
station.

6.2.15.2.2 Backing Up by Using the Backup/Restore Tool
a. Prerequisites
z Shared, temporary directory on a remote station connected to the
LAN, which can be accessed from the local station.
z Backup on Hard Disk on page 6-129
b. Procedures
3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Backup/Restore tab.
4. Click the Backup radio button.

5. Browse to the shared directory on the remote stations computer, and
click [OK].

6. At the Backup Details group, click [Backup].

8. Click [OK] to close the Configuration utility

6.2.15.2.3 Backing Up by Using FTP
a. Prerequisites
z At the local Xeleris system
Backup on Hard Disk procedure has been performed
z At the remote eNTEGRA 2.5 or Xeleris system
InSite installed
Known Host name or IP
Temporary directory has been created
FTP server up and running
b. Procedure
1. Double-click the Xeleris Prompt icon on the desktop.
2. Change directory to D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup
3. Type ftp <IP or Hostname> <Enter>.
4. At the Name prompt, type insite <Enter>.
5. At the Password prompt, type 2getin <Enter>.
6. Verify that the ftp> prompt is displayed.
7. Browse to the temporary directory (on the remote station), where you
intend to store the backup file.
8. Type bin <Enter>.
9. Type put <Backup Filename> <Enter>.
10. Type ls <Enter>, and sure the backup file was transferred.
11. Wait for the successful transfer message.
12. Type bye <Enter> to exit the FTP session.
13. Close the Xeleris Prompt shell.

6.2.15.3 Backup on Diskette

1. Insert a formatted diskette labeled Xeleris Configuration Backup,
Version Number, Backup Date into the floppy drive.
2. Browse to the floppy drive, using the [Browse...] button and click
[OK].
3. Click [Backup].
5. Click [OK] to close the Configuration utility
6.2.15.4 Backup on CD-R or CD-RW

1. Insert a blank CD-R labeled Xeleris Configuration Backup,
Version Number, Backup Date into the CD drive.
2. Backup the desired information to the hard disk (Section 6.2.15.1 –
Backup on Hard Disk on page 6-129), and proceed with the next step.
3. Select Start → Programs → Ahead Nero → Nero Express.
4. At the Nero Express window, select Data → Data Disk.
5. At the open window, click [Add]; then browse to the backup directory:
D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup
6. Select the backed up files, and click [Add] to add them to the burning
repository. Click [Finished]; then [Next].
7. Enter the disk name, using the following convention
Backup Date, Backup Time
Choose the correct Writing Speed (see Important note below); then
click [Burn], and wait for the process to complete.
For the optimal Writing Speed, refer to the Burn Speed printed on the medium
Important
wrapping:
• Choose 24x, or the medium-printed value; whichever the lower.

• In the event of failure during the burning or verification process, use a lower
Burning Speed.
8. When the CD-R is ejected, remove it from the drive.

6.2.15.5 Xeleris Licenses Backup
4. At the Licenses Backup group, click [Backup].

5. When the Backup completed successfully message appears;
6. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click [OK].
Note The created file is located at D:\Einstein\Lecenses.tar.z.

It is recommended to save this file on a diskette for future use.

6.2.16 Setting Favorite Repositories
6.2.16.1 Considerations for Setting the Favorite Repositories
The favorite source and destination repositories defined for a specific system
should be selected according to:
z Site data management policy
z Number of workstations at the site
z The usage of the specific system, e.g. review system for the NM
department (preferably used as the central database)
z The main tasks performed on the specific system. e.g. archiving,
printing, processing, retrieving archived data
General Considerations
z CD Archives can be selected only as Source Repositories, and require
a cache repository as well, in order to refer to data not yet written to
the CD.
Recommendations for Favorite Source Repositories

z Usually, the first (left most) source repository should be the Local
system database.
z The selection of the other two favorite source repositories depends
on the tasks performed by the user of this system. Source repositories
accessed on a regular basis should be selected.
z If the user is responsible for archiving on the local CD, one favorite
source repository should be a Cache directory.
Considerations for Favorite Destination Repositories

z If the user of this system is mainly responsible for processing,
archiving and printing:
Usually, the first (left most) source repository should be the Local
system database.
The second destination repository should be an archiving device
(Cache, Optical, PACS)

6.2.16.2 Setting Up Procedure
2. Click the Favorite Repositories tab.

3. At the Favorite sources group click [Edit...].
4. Verify that the Local repository is in the Selected list.
5. From the Available list of the Edit Favorite Sources window:
a. Select the repository to be the second favorite repository and click
[Add–>] to move it to the Selected list.
b. Select the repository to be the third favorite repository and click
6. To change the order of the favorite source repositories, use the
[Move up] and [Move down] buttons.
7. Click [OK].
8. Select the favorite source repository to be opened when Xeleris is
launched and click [Set as default].
9. At the Favorite destinations group click [Edit].
10. Verify that the Local repository is in the Selected list.
11. From the Available list of the Edit Favorite Destinations window:
a. Select the repository to be the second favorite repository and click
b. Select the repository to be the third favorite repository and click
12. To change the order of the favorite destination repositories, use the
[Move up] and [Move down] buttons.
13. Click [OK].
14. At the System Setup pop-up, click [OK].

6.2.17 Setting the Favorite Applications
The Favorite Applications tab can include up to 10 applications.
By default, the Favorite Applications tab includes 10 factory selected

applications.
You can replace the currently defined favorite applications with available
applications that are frequently used by the customer, as follows:
2. Click the Favorite Applications tab.

The currently selected applications are displayed in the Selected list.
3. Click [Edit...].
4. For each application in the Selected list to be replaced:
a. Select the application to be replaced in the Selected list and click
[<–Remove] to move it to the Available list.
b. Select the desired application from the Available list and click
[Add–>] to move it to the Selected list
5. When the Selected list includes all the customer favorite applications,
arrange the Selected applications according to customer preference,
using the [Move up] and [Move down] buttons.
6. Click [OK] to return to the System Setup pop-up.

6.2.18 Configuring the Task In-box
Perform the following on the Xeleris system defined as the In-Box Source:

4. Check the box next to Physician In-box enabled and click [OK].
6. Click the To Do icon (the left most icon on the Main Navigation
panel).
The Inbox icon appears at the bottom of the To Do pop-up.
7. Click the Inbox icon to open the In-box dialog, click [Settings...], if
needed, select the Local database as the In-box Source and verify that
Always connect when On-Line is checked.
ON all other Xeleris systems, perform the following:

4. Check the box next to Physician In-box enabled and click [OK].
6. Click the To Do icon (the left most icon on the Main Navigation
panel).
The Inbox icon appears at the bottom of the To Do pop-up.
7. Click the Inbox icon to open the In-box dialog, click [Setting...], if
needed, and select the database on the Xeleris defined as the in-box
source from the In-box Source drop-down.
8. Click [Exit].

6.2.19 Hosts Configuration

3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Hosts tab.
4. For each remote station with which the system is to communicate via IP
(Internet Protocol):
a. Click [Add].
b. Type in the Remote station Hostname.
c. Enter the IP Address of the remote station.
d. Click [OK]
5. When all remote stations have been added, click [OK].
6. Click [OK] to close the System Setup pop-up.
6.2.20 Adding Language Support to the Keyboard
Scope
The following procedure allows the keyboard to support additional languages

for Xeleris.
Time Required
This procedure requires five minutes.
Procedure
1. From the Start menu, select Settings → Control Panel to open the
Control Panel window.
2. Double-click on the Regional and Language Options icon.
3. Switch to the Languages tab and click [Details].
4. Click [Add] to open Add Input Language tab.
5. From the Language list, select ONE desired language. Select the
language types as shown in the following table:

Table 6–28:
Selected Language Select Type
Spanish Traditional Sort
German Standard
Portuguese Standard
Italian Standard
French Belgium
Swedish ------------
6. Click [OK] to close the Input Language dialog.

7. Click [Apply]. Click [OK] again.
8. Reboot the computer.
6.2.21 Configuring Worklist

DS cameras requirements for the worklist feature
z DST, DST-XL, i-series cameras
z Minimum software release v7.7.14 (released in January 2001)
z DSX and DS7 cameras are not supported.
Note Configure this section only after you configured the DST cameras for which you
want worklist support (in Section 6.2.10 – Configuring DST (SMV) Systems (STP3).


3. Open the Worklist tab.
Figure 6-73 Worklist Tab
4. Check the Enable box.

5. The AE Title should only be changed if there is an SCP already defined
under that name. The name contained in this field is automatically added
to the DICOM servers list.
6. In the Provider Information section enter the Worklist Provider
details from the Site Assignment Matrix (IP address, Port number and
AE Title).
Note For more details on NUMA Worklist configuration, please refer to the Xeleris User
Manual.

7. Use the Exclude rules area to define rules that will be used in order to
prevent incoming studies from being forwarded to NumaList.
There are three in-house rules provided. These can be removed or edited
using the [Remove] or [Edit] buttons.
To add a new Rule:

a. Click [Add]. The Worklist Exclude Rule dialog opens (see
Figure 6-74).
Figure 6-74 Add Rule
b. Check the Use Rule box.

c. Type details in Patient Name Contains and Study Desc.
d. Click [OK].
Note When a file is received from the camera and complies with a rule, it will not be sent
to NumaList. In order to comply with a rule, three conditions must be met:
• The Patient Name in the data contains the configured Patient Name Contains
string.
• The study description in the data matches the configured Study Desc string.
• The BirthDate attribute is empty.
There are three in-house rules provided, these can be removed or edited as needed
using the [Edit ] or [Remove] buttons accordingly.

6.2.22 MMC (Multi Media Creator) Configuration
Multi Media Creator is a licensed option.
This section is relevant only for those sites that have purchased this option.
To check if the MMC option is available on the system, do the following:

z Check for the existence of the MMC license file, mmgeneral, in
D:\Einstein\Licences.
And/Or
z Check the MMC button on a processing card of Xeleris.
If the button is disabled, the option is not installed.
6.2.22.1 Configuring the MMC Environment
Open the MMC Configuration window as follows:

1. Click [System Setup]. The System Setup dialog opens.
Figure 6-75 MMC Configuration Button
2. Click the [MMC Configuration] button (Figure 6-75).

3. Refer to the Xeleris Operator Manual, in the Printing section, for all
basic MMC configurations.

6.2.22.1.1 Additional Information About MMC Configuration
Reports tab:
Logo Image
Figure 6-76 MMC Configuration - Reports Tab
z The Logo image (see Figure 6-76) should be small enough to fit in
the upper right corner of the report. Larger images will be resized.
z When changing any of the directories/files in this tab, use the Browse
buttons […] and refrain from manual typing in the dialog entry fields.
z The shared working folder can be any folder, local or on another
computer on the network. If the shared directory is located on the
local computer, make sure that it is configured properly for access
from other computers, as described below:

To configure the shared working directory (folder):

1. From Windows Explorer, right click on the directory and from the
pop-up menu, select Sharing and Security…
Figure 6-77 Shared Folder Sharing Properties
2. Check the [Share this folder] button.

3. Check the [Maximum Allowed] button for User Limit.
4. Click [Apply] and [OK].
5. Go to a different Xeleris computer on the network and verify that it is
possible to access the shared folder.

Attachments tab:
Figure 6-78 MMC Configuration - Atachments Tab
z Any type of image, movie, sound and document extension can be

used as an attachment.
z However, there could be a problem opening attachment types, other
than the default ones, in Windows Internet Explorer.
6.2.22.2 Configuring the Microphone
Multi Media reports can include audio notations.
This requires enabling the microphone on the computer.
Refer to section Section 5.4.2.6 for Microphone configuration.

6.2.22.3 Configuring the E-mail option
6.2.22.3.2 MAPI Functionality in Windows
MAPI (Messaging Application Programming Interface) is a set of functions

originally designed by Microsoft that is now supported by a large number of
vendors. The MAPI functions are automatically included on your computer
as a part of the Windows Operating System.
MAPI permits MMC to send email using nearly any email client on a com-
puter running the Windows Operating System. You can configure Windows
with a default email client, which is your default email program. MMC uses
this default configuration when sending reports by email.
6.2.22.3.3 Setting Your Default MAPI Client
1. Open Internet Explorer (using the icon on the desktop).

2. From the Tools menu select Internet Options.
3. Click on the Programs tab.
4. From the Email field, select the MAPI client you want to set as the
default.
5. Click [OK] to save your settings.
You will need to close all open IE windows for the settings to take effect.
Some applications may require you to restart them as well before they
recognize the change.
6.2.22.4 Configuring the Distribution Option settings
Detailed description of the distribution options can be found in the Xeleris

Operator Manual, in the Printing section.
• Windows CD settings:
Important
If there is a DVD RAM installed on the system, you can select between the
DVD drive and the CD-RW drive as a burning device destination.
• Email settings:
MMC can work with almost any email client running under Windows OS,
including Outlook, Outlook Express, Eudora, Groupwise and more.
It is important that the email client will be running when distributing MM reports
by mail.

Xeleris Configuration Remote Connectivity
6.3 Remote Connectivity
6.3.1 InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite connection)
This includes the following procedures to be performed in the given order:

z Section 6.3.1.1 – InSite Prerequisites on page 6-151
z Section 6.3.1.2 – Configuring the Interactive InSite Package (IIP) on
page 6-151
z Section 6.3.1.3 – Checking Remote Connection availability on
page 6-154
z Section 6.3.2 – Checkout and Connectivity Verification on
page 6-159
6.3.1.1 InSite Prerequisites
For sites without Broadband:

z External modem – U.S. Robotics V.Everything External or Multitech
MT5634ZBA or Motorola Codex 3265FAST
z Dedicated phone line for the InSite Modem
z Modem IP Address – provided by the OLC
z No second Network Card installed
For systems connected by Broadband:

z Broadband Gateway IP Address – same as Default Gateway IP
Address (in system Network TCP/IP Properties)
For Indirect systems (which are connected to the Gateway Xeleris by

LAN):
z Gateway IP Address – LAN IP Address of the Gateway system
6.3.1.2 Configuring the Interactive InSite Package (IIP)

2. In the opened window, type iipadmin config <Enter>.

3. In the opened InSite Interactive Platform Configuration window

click [ACCEPT] 3 times.
4. Click the ProDiags tab (all other tabs will automatically come forward
after necessary confirmation).
5. Click [DEFAULT].
The system will advance to the Device Connection tab

automatically.
6. At the Device Connection tab:
a. For systems with modem connected (serving as Gateways)
Proceed to Step c.
b. For systems connected via Broadband, or connected to the
Gateway Xeleris via LAN:
i At the Device Connection Type combo-box select Network.
ii At the Gateway to GE Online Center,
For Indirect systems, enter the local IP address, by which the
Gateway (the Xeleris which has a modem connected) is
connected to the LAN
For systems connected by Broadband, enter the Broadband
Gateway IP Address – same as Default Gateway IP Address
(in system Network TCP/IP Properties)
Click [APPLY]. The InSite Checkout tab will be displayed
automatically.
Proceed to Step 7
c. For systems with modem connected (serving as Gateways):
i From the Device Connection Type list, select Modem.
ii On the Device Connection tab, type or select the options
applicable to the installed modem from the following drop-down
lists:
Dial Out Prefix: type the number used to place an outside
call.
Modem Type: select the currently installed modem from the
list.
CPU Serial Port Name: the modem port.
Country: the default country is US (Canada). For any other
country, select from the list.

CPU Serial Port Speed: select 57600.

Dialling Mode: normally Tone.
iii Click [APPLY].
iv If the Modem Readme window appears, proceed according to
your modem type, as follows:
For U.S. Robotics modem, verify that the DIP switch settings
match the display and click [OK].
For Motorola, ignore the displayed instructions and click
[OK].
v In the Modem Properties window that appears, click [Close].
vi In the Install Modem window, click [OK].
If the InSite Checkout tab is not displayed automatically after

15 seconds, and modem error messages are displayed at the
status bar, proceed to Section 9.16.1.4 – Check Modem
Connection on page 9-27.
Otherwise, proceed to Step 7, below.

7. On the InSite Checkout tab:
a. At the top InSite IP address – type the Modem IP address as defined
by the OLC for the local system.
b. At the bottom InSite IP address – type 0.0.0.0.
c. Click [CHECKOUT NOW].
d. At the Reboot Needed window, click [OK].
e. Click [EXIT] at the bottom right of the InSite Interactive
Platform Configuration window.
f. At the Exit Confirmation window, click [OK].
8. At the iLinq Shell window wait 20seconds until the insite> prompt
appears and type exit <Enter>.
For systems with modem connected (serving as Gateways):

a. Reboot the System for the changes to take effect, and log into
Xeleris.
b. Check your modem operationas follows:
i Dial your modem number from another telephone and listening
to its beeps.
ii Wait for two minutes for modem release.

9. Proceed with Section 6.3.1.3 – Checking Remote Connection

availability on page 6-154.
6.3.1.3 Checking Remote Connection availability
The results of the following procedures are critical for achieving the OLC
remote connection.
z Section 6.3.1.3.1 – Checking Local Telnet on page 6-154
z Section 6.3.1.3.2 – Checking Local FTP on page 6-156
z Section 6.3.1.3.3 – Running R.C.C.D. on page 6-156
z Section 6.3.1.3.4 – Activating the TVA Server on page 6-157
z Section 6.3.2 – Checkout and Connectivity Verification on
page 6-159
6.3.1.3.1 Checking Local Telnet
1. Minimize Xeleris.
2. Only for systems with modem connected, double-click the iLinq Shell
icon on the desktop.
3. Type telnet localhost <Enter>.
4. At the login prompt, type insite <Enter>.
6. Verify that you are logged into the Telnet session, prompted with
>insite.
7. Type exit <Enter> to exit the Telnet session.

8. In case of error messages at logon, perform one of the procedures below.

Otherwise proceed to Section 6.3.1.3.2 – Checking Local FTP on
page 6-156:
a. If the Unable to connect to remote host: Connection
refused error message appears, go to Section 6.3.1.2 – Configuring
the Interactive InSite Package (IIP) on page 6-151, and then return to
this section.
If the problem persists perform the following procedures in the given

order and then return to this section. Otherwise, proceed to Section
6.3.1.3.2 – Checking Local FTP on page 6-156:
Restart the computer; logon; and perform Full Xeleris
shutdown.
Section 9.16.1.2 – InSite Uninstall on page 9-25.
Section 9.16.1.3 – Re-Installing the InSite Software on
page 9-26
Section 6.3.1 – InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite
connection) on page 6-151.
b. If the No directory /c/insite! error message appears, perform the
procedure below:
i Double-click the iLinq Shell icon on the desktop.
ii Type mount <Enter>, and check that the output is as follows:
C:\cygwin\bin on /usr/bin type system (binmode)

C:\cygwin\lib on /usr/lib type system (binmode)
C:\cygwin on / type system (binmode)
c: on /c type user (binmode,noumount)
(There can be more mounts for other drivers.)
iii If the message on the fourth row (as above) does not indicate that
c: is mounted as /c (as displayed), type mount -u -b -c /
<Enter> to correct this.
iv Type telnet localhost, and login with insite as the account
name, and 2getin as the password.
Ignore all warning messages.
v Type mount, and check that the fourth row displays:
c: on /c type user (binmode,noumount)

vi If the message on the fourth row (as above) does not indicate that
c: is mounted as /c (as displayed), type mount -f -u -b -c /
<Enter> to correct this.
vii Type mount <Enter>, to verify that the change has taken effect.
viii Type cd /c/insite <Enter>.
ix Type exit <Enter>.
9. Reboot and proceed to Section 6.3.1.3.2 – Checking Local FTP on
page 6-156.
6.3.1.3.2 Checking Local FTP
1. From the Xeleris Prompt Shell, type ftp localhost <Enter>.
If the connect: Connection refused error message appears,

configure the Interactive InSite Package, as per Section 6.3.1.2 on
page 6-151.
7. Proceed to Section 6.3.1.3.3 – Running R.C.C.D. on page 6-156
6.3.1.3.3 Running R.C.C.D.
1. Double-click the Service Folder desktop icon; then from the open
folder, double-click the RCCD batch file.
A shell will open, and automatically close.
2. Double-click the RCCD.txt file.
3. In the report check the following
a. The last section (or the one before it) should read
RCCD Report – Done.
b. For systems that were not checked out, ignore the following errors:
i Checkout - System is not checkedout (NOT - OK)
ii System ID - File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t exist (NOT
- OK)

iii Modem Phone number - Error: File C:/insite\sclink.cfg

doesn’t exist (relevant only for indirect systems)
(NOT - OK)
iv checkout - File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t exist
relevant only for direct systems (NOT - OK)
c. For systems connected to Broadband, or connected to the Gateway
Xeleris via LAN, ignore the following errors:
i Ras Service – Error: Not Running relevant only for
direct systems (NOT - OK)
ii IRouteSrv Service – Error: Not Running relevant only
for direct systems (NOT - OK)
iii Modem IP – Modem IP Not Found – Route not installed
correctly (NOT - OK)
d. If any other error is encountered, refer to Running the R.C.C.D.
(Remote Connection Connectivity Diagnostics) on page 8-8.
6.3.1.3.4 Activating the TVA Server
1. Double-click on the iLinq Browser icon on the desktop.

2. Click the Virtual Assist link.
3. Select the TiP Virtual Assist option from the menu.
The Remote Control window opens:
Figure 6-79 Remote Control Window

4. Click the [Change Session Password] button if you want to change

the password for this session.
The Change Session Password window opens, allowing you to change

the password.
Figure 6-80 Change Session Password
The default password of TVA is 2getin

5. Click [Accept] in the Remote Control Window to start the TVA server.
The TVA Control Window appears.
Figure 6-81 TVA Control Window
The TVA Control Window remains on top of all other windows and is
inaccessible to the remote side.
Only persons on the local system can move it and click buttons on it.
To pause the session, click on the Pause TVA button. This will make the
whole screen inaccessible to the remote side.
To finish the session, click on the Exit TVA button. This will terminate the
session and the remote side will be disconnected.
Note After 2 minutes without any mouse movement, the session is paused automatically

6.3.2 Checkout and Connectivity Verification

1. Make sure you have the following Checkout information, according to
the connection type:
Broadband Direct Connection

Indirect Connection
Connection (modem)
System ID System ID System ID

Broadband IP Address Modem Phone number LAN IP Address
LAN IP Address Gateway System ID
2. Call the InSite team in India, and ask to perform Checkout.

3. When Checkout is completed successfully, ask to perform InSite
Connection.
4. Verify that the InSite Connection was successful.
5. Ask OLC to open CSD and verify that it shows correct system
information.
Note InSite will be available only when the Checkout and Connection procedures have
been performed.
Note If a connection problem is encountered, while performing Indirect Checkout, ask to

check that the Local IP address of the checked system is unique in the GSCC
database.
6.3.3 Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting availability of remote connectivity, refer to Section 8.10
– Running the R.C.C.D. (Remote Connection Connectivity Diagnostics) on
page 8-8.

Chapter 7 – Functional Checks
This chapter provides functional checks to verify that the Xeleris system is
working properly, as follows:
z Section 7.1 – Processing Validation on page 7-2, including:
Section 7.1.1 – Checking the Availability of Licensed Options on
page 7-2
Section 7.1.2 – Running an Application on page 7-2
z Section 7.2 – Printing Tests on page 7-3
Section 7.2.1 – Checking the Default Hardcopy Device on
page 7-3
Section 7.2.2 – Checking Other Hardcopy Devices on page 7-4
z Section 7.3 – Archiving Checks on page 7-5
Section 7.3.1 – Archiving Data on an Optical Cartridge / DVD
on page 7-5, if available
Section 7.3.2 – Archiving Data to a CD-R/RW on page 7-6
Section 7.3.3 – Checking the Archive History Log on page 7-7
Section 7.3.4 – Retrieving and Reviewing an Archived Study on
page 7-8
z Section 7.4 – Checking the In-Box Functionality on page 7-9
Section 7.4.1 – Recording an In-Box Task on page 7-9
Section 7.4.2 – Starting the Queued In-box Task on page 7-10
z Section 7.5 – Checking the Color Maps on page 7-11
z Section 7.6 – Review Template Test on page 7-12
z Section 7.7 – Connectivity Tests on page 7-13
Section 7.7.1 – Viewing and Retrieving Data from the Central
Database on page 7-13
Section 7.7.2 – Checking DICOM Transfer on page 7-14
Section 7.7.3 – Checking the OSI Connectivity on page 7-15
Section 7.7.4 – Checking Connectivity With DST Scanners on
page 7-16
Section 7.7.5 – Vision on page 7-17
Section 7.7.6 – Foreign DB on page 7-19
Section 7.7.7 – Foreign Link on page 7-20
Section 7.7.8 – Checking Worklist Connectivity on page 7-26

Functional Checks Processing Validation
7.1 Processing Validation
7.1.1 Checking the Availability of Licensed Options

1. Minimize the Xeleris application.
3. At the system prompt type: checklicenses <Enter>.
The list of installed licenses is displayed.
4. Check that the required licensed options appear in the displayed list.
7.1.2 Running an Application

1. Select a gated rest or stress planar dataset from the patient database.
2. Click the Myovation icon residing in the Cardiac Category on the All
Applications tab.
3. Wait until automatic processing has been completed.
4. Click the Review tab and wait for gated processing to complete.
5. Click the Auxiliaries checkbox, and verify that all four auxiliary options
are selected and appear in the review.
6. Select the Cine tab of the GTools and click the [Play] button.
The slices of the Gated viewports start beating.
7. Drop down the File menu and select the Save and Exit entry.
Two Results Series are created:
z CARDIAC SPECT
z CardView Results
In the following functional check we will use the CardView Results
results series.

Functional Checks Printing Tests
7.2 Printing Tests
7.2.1 Checking the Default Hardcopy Device

1. Select the CardView Results results series (created in Running an
Application on page 7-2), select the MyoVation application and click
[Start].
The Review screen saved before is displayed.
2. Click the [Printer] icon (located at the upper left part of the screen
below the main navigation panel).
The displayed data is captured according to the parameters set in the
default Print Template.
If the default template specifies a hardcopy device as destination, the

capture is sent to the hardcopy device and is printed.
3. Check the printout and verify that the screen was printed correctly.

Functional Checks Printing Tests
7.2.2 Checking Other Hardcopy Devices
For each defined hardcopy device:

1. Click the Printer Extension arrow next to the Print button.
2. From the System Template drop-down list select the template defined
for this device.
3. Click [Print] or,
For a multi-film format imager:

a. Select the screen/region or frames to be included in the first film
section.
In the Frames source area, ensure that Total Pages = 1.
b. Click [Print].
The Submitted field changes from 0/n to 1/n, where n is the total
number of film sections as defined in Film Format.
c. Select the next image to be included in the 2nd film section.
d. Click [Submit]
The second screen/region is collected in the printer stack.
The Submitted field changes from 1/n to 2/n.
e. Repeat selecting the next screen/region and clicking [Submit], until
the last screen/region to be included in the film is selected.
f. Click [Submit & Print].
The last screen/region is collected in the printer stack and the film is
printed.
4. Check the printout and verify that the screen was printed correctly.

Functional Checks Archiving Checks
7.3 Archiving Checks

The following Archive check can be performed:
z Section 7.3.1 – Archiving Data on an Optical Cartridge / DVD on
page 7-5
z Section 7.3.2 – Archiving Data to a CD-R/RW on page 7-6
z Section 7.3.3 – Checking the Archive History Log on page 7-7
z Section 7.3.4 – Retrieving and Reviewing an Archived Study on
page 7-8
7.3.1 Archiving Data on an Optical Cartridge / DVD
Note This procedure is applicable to both Optical Cartridges (MODs) and DVDs, and
should be performed separately on each of these archive media; therefore, every
mention of Optical Cartridge or MOD also refers to DVD.
Note that the DVD media have to be formatted to UDF 1.5 format before being used
on the Xeleris.
1. Make sure the protect switch on an empty optical disk cartridge is set to
allow writing and insert it into the MOD.
2. In case the MOD repository is not defined in the Favorite repository
destinations, select it from the drop-down menu on the right (closest to
the [Delete] button) in the destination repository.
3. Click the MOD destination repository extension and select the Initialize
entry.
The Initialize Medium dialog appears.
4. Enter the label to be assigned to the medium into the Label type-in field.
Follow the displayed instructions, to enter a legal label:
z Max label name is 16 characters
z Label can contain only the following characters: A-Z; a-z; 0-9; _;
[Space]
5. Click [Initialize Medium].
The cartridge is initialized and the dialog is closed.
6. Verify that the Local database is selected as the Source Repository.
7. Select the study used for Running an Application on page 7-2 from the
Study Browser and click the MOD destination repository.
Both the extension of the MOD destination repository and the Archive
icon in the status panel turn green.

8. Click the Archive icon in the status panel to open the Archive
Transfer Log, and monitor the archive status. When the Study moves
to the COMPLETED section, this indicates that it was copied from the
local database to the MOD archive.
9. Click [Close] to close the Archive Transfer Log.
10. In case the MOD repository is not defined in the Favorite repository
sources, select it from the drop-down menu on the rightmost Source
button.
The MOD Study Browser is opened.
11.Verify that all the datasets of the selected study were archived.
7.3.2 Archiving Data to a CD-R/RW
For systems with a CD drive, two source CD repositories are available:

z Dicom CD – to display and retrieve studies that were archived on an
Xeleris system, or any other DICOM compliant system.
z eNT CD – to display and retrieve studies that were archived on an
eNTEGRA system.
1. Insert an empty CD-R/RW into the CD drive.
2. Initialize the Cache repository by clicking its extension, selecting the
Initialize entry and clicking [Continue].
3. Type the label to be assigned to the CD in the Label type-in field.
Follow the displayed instructions, to enter a legal label:
z Max label name is 16 characters
z Label can contain only the following characters: A-Z; a-z; 0-9; _;
[Space]
4. Click [Initialize Medium].
The cache is initialized and its label and initialization date are displayed.
5. Ensure the Local database is selected as the Source Repository.
6. Select the study used for Running an Application on page 7-2 from the
Study Browser and click the Cache destination repository button.
The icon on the Cache repository and the Archive status icon turns
green.
Transfer Log, and monitor the archive status. When the Study moves
local database to the Cache archive.

8. Click Cache repository extension and select the Write Now entry.
The data in the Cache directory is written to the CD, including the
allocated name and the initialization date and time of the Cache
repository.
Transfer Log, and monitor the burning status. When the BurnCD job
moves to the COMPLETED section, this indicates that the CD burning
process has been completed.
WARNING
At the end of the burning process, the CD is ejected and reloaded automatically.
Do NOT interfere with this operation.
10. Press <Eject> on the CD recorder and remove the CD.
7.3.3 Checking the Archive History Log

1. Click the Archive icon on the status panel to open the Archiving
Transfer Log.
2. Click [Archive History] to open the Archive History panel.
3. In the relevant search parameters fields, type the Patient Name,
Patient ID and Study Name of the study archived in Archiving
Checks on page 7-5 or Archiving Data to a CD-R/RW on page 7-6.
4. Click [Refresh].
The datasets logged on the Archive History log that match the search
criteria are listed in a four-level hierarchical structure with the medium
name and initialization date displayed alongside each dataset entry:
Patient
Study
Series
Dataset

7.3.4 Retrieving and Reviewing an Archived Study

1. Delete the archived study from the Local database.
2. Insert the optical Cartridge or CD-RW or DVD, whichever applies into
the archive device.
3. Select the archive device as a Source Repository.
The list of studies archived on the currently mounted medium is shown
in the Study Browser.
4. Delete the study from the local database.
5. Select the archived study and click the [Local] destination repository.
Transfer Log, and monitor the retrieve status. When the Study moves
archive medium to the Local database.
7. Select the retrieved study, click [Cardiac SPECT] icon and click
[Start].
The Review screen is displayed with the previous selected auxiliaries.

Functional Checks Checking the In-Box Functionality
7.4 Checking the In-Box Functionality
7.4.1 Recording an In-Box Task

1. Click [To Do] on the main navigation panel to open the ToDo pop-up.
2. Click [In-box] to open the In-Box dialog.
If the in-box source is accessed via modem, a dialog is opened. Click

[Connect] to connect to the in-box and display the In-Box dialog.
3. From the To In-Box drop-down list, select the in-box to which the task
will be sent.
4. Click [Record] to switch the system to Task Recording mode and to
open the recorded tasks list.
5. Click the in-box [Minimize] button.
6. Select the study used in Running an Application on page 7-2 from the
study list, click the Myovation icon from the Cardiac category and
click [Start].
The data and action combination is validated, and an entry for the
study+action is added to the recorded Tasks list.
7. Click [To Do] on the main navigation panel and from the pop-up click
[In-box].
8. Click [Stop Recording].
9. Click [Exit] to close the In-Box dialog.

Functional Checks Checking the In-Box Functionality
7.4.2 Starting the Queued In-box Task

1. Click [To Do] on the main navigation panel to open the ToDo pop-up.
2. Click [In-box] to open the In-Box dialog.
3. From the In-box drop-down list, select the in-box to which the task was
sent in Checking the In-Box Functionality on page 7-9.
4. Click the New icon to display the queued task.
5. Select the task to be activated and click [Start].
6. The Myovation application is launched and the Review screen is
displayed with the auxiliary options defined in Running an Application
on page 7-2.
7. Close the Myovation ...
8. Make sure that the task is no longer in the list of new tasks.
9. Click the Viewed icon, and locate the task in the Viewed list.
10. Select the task and click the [Delete] button.
11. Click the Deleted icon, and locate the task in the Deleted list.
12. Select the task and click the [Delete] button to completely remove the
task from the In-Box.

Functional Checks Checking the Color Maps
7.5 Checking the Color Maps

1. Sort the studies in the Study Browser by Study Name.
2. Select a WB Bone study.
3. Load the study to a new workspace session according to your system
configuration, as follows:
z Click [Load to New] from the Favorite Applications tab,
or
z Click [Load to New] from the Workspace category on the All
Applications tab, then click [Start].
4. Drop down the View menu and select the Screen Format entry.
5. Select a format for displaying 2 whole body images with 3 static images
(two long vertical and three short horizontal cells).
6. Select the Color Maps tab of the GTools, click the [...] button to open
the list of available color maps, select the INVERSE entry, and click
[OK].
The 5th color map button now corresponds to the INVERSE map.
7. Select a viewport and click [INVERSE] to apply the inverse color map
to the selected viewport.
8. Apply a different color map to each viewport.
9. On the Color Maps panel, click the OFF checkbox to turn off the Color
Bar.
10. Click the down arrow on the Color Maps panel and select the All entry.
11. Click the [...] button on the Color Maps panel, select the Hot Iron
entry and click [OK].
12. Select a viewport and apply the Hot Iron map.
13. Click the down arrow on the Color Maps panel and select the Current
entry.
14. Apply the Default map (GE Colors) to each viewport.
15. Drop down the File menu and select the Exit entry.

Functional Checks Review Template Test
7.6 Review Template Test

1. Select a study.
2. Double-click the study to load it to the workspace.
The screen switches to the Processing & Review screen.
3. If the Screen Format panel is not displayed on the control area,
drop-down the View menu and select the Screen Format entry.
4. Click the black square icon.
Verify that a single image now fills the screen.
5. Click LINEAR on the Color Maps GTool.
Verify that the LINEAR color map is applied to the image.
6. Drop down the File menu and select the Save Review Template
entry.
7. Type-in Test for Template name, select System Study, and click
[OK].
9. Click the Review Template icon in the Review Templates category
and click [Start].
Verify that Test appears in the opened System Review Templates
panel, and is highlighted in blue.
10. Click [Start] and verify that the display is restored as saved above (a
single image fills the screen with linear color table).
The Data Management screen is displayed.
12. Click the Review Template icon in the Review Templates category
and click [Start].
Verify that Test appears in the opened System Review Templates
panel, and is highlighted in blue.
13. Click the extension arrow of the
Start button, and select the Delete
Template option.
Verify that Test disappears from the
System Review Templates
panel.
14. Close the System Review Templates panel by clicking [X] on the
title bar.

Functional Checks Connectivity Tests
7.7 Connectivity Tests
7.7.1 Viewing and Retrieving Data from the Central Database

1. Select the Source Repository corresponding to the Central Database.
Only if the repository is accessed by modem, a dialog with the modem
details opens. Click [Connect] and wait for the connection to be
established.
When the connection is established, the Study List of the Central
Database is displayed in the Study Browser.
2. Select a central database study that is not saved on your local database.
3. Click the Local destination repository.
The icon on the destination repository and the Network icon on the
status panel turn green.
4. Click the Network icon in the status panel to open the Network
Transfer Log and monitor the transfer status. When the Study moves to
the COMPLETED section, this indicates that it was copied from the
Central Database to the Local database.
Figure 7-1 Network Transfer Log
Only if the Central Database repository is accessed by modem, click

[Disconnect] to terminate the connection and to display the Local
database.
5. Verify that the study appears in the [Local] database.
6. Select this study and click [Start] to launch processing on this study.

7.7.2 Checking DICOM Transfer

1. Select the DICOM repository from which you want to fetch data as the
source repository.
The Study List of this DICOM repository appears in the Study
Browser.
2. You can use the Filter facility and/or sort the study list of the DICOM
repository according to the regular criteria.
3. Select the data to be transferred. Make sure that the study is not already
in the local database.
4. Click on the Local destination repository.
The Network icon on the status panel and the icon on the local
destination repository turn green.
remote DICOM station to the Local database.
6. Click on the Local source repository to display its database and verify
that the DICOM study was copied successfully to your local database.
7. Highlight this study and click [Delete] to remove it from the local
database.
8. In the Patient Data Delete dialog, click [Delete Selection] to
confirm.

7.7.3 Checking the OSI Connectivity
To check the Xeleris connectivity to SP and/or StarCam systems:

1. Select the SP/StarCam scanner as a source repository.
The Study List of this SP/StarCam repository appears in the Study
Browser.
2. You can use the Filter facility and/or sort the study list of the OSI
3. Select the data to be transferred.
The transfer icon on the status panel and the icon on the local destination
repository turn green.
remote OSI station to the Local database.
that the SP/StarCam study was copied successfully to your local
database.
database.
confirm.

7.7.4 Checking Connectivity With DST Scanners
To check the Xeleris connectivity with DST cameras perform the following
procedure for both the PET and CT hosts:
1. Select the PET/CT host as a source repository.
The Study List of this station appears in the Study Browser.
2. You can use the Filter facility and/or sort the study list of the DICOM
3. Select the data to be transferred. Make sure the study is not already in the
local database.
remote PET/CT station to the Local database.
that the PET/CT study was copied successfully to your local database.
database.
confirm.

7.7.5 Vision
7.7.5.1 Checking Connectivity with Remote Vision Database
To check the Xeleris connectivity to the Vision system:

1. Select the VisionDB as a source repository.
The Study List of this Vision repository appears in the Study Browser.
2. Select the data to be transferred.Make sure the study is not already in the
local database.
remote Vision station to the Local database.
that the Vision study was copied successfully to your local database.
database.
confirm.

7.7.5.2 Checking Connectivity with PC-Based SMV Cameras

1. Configure Xeleris as the default destination for the acquisition station.
2. Send the data to Xeleris.
The files are transferred to the Xeleris. They can be located in the local
database after a few minutes.
Figure 7-6 Locating Transferred Files.

7.7.6 Foreign DB
To check the Xeleris connectivity to the Picker system:

1. Select the Picker as a source repository.
The Study List of this Picker repository appears in the Study Browser.
2. Select the data to be transferred.Make sure the study is not already in the
local database.
remote Picker station to the Local database.
that the Picker study was copied successfully to your local database.
database.
confirm.

7.7.7 Foreign Link
7.7.7.1 ADAC Connectivity

1. On the ADAC system, right-click a free space on the desktop, and
choose USER CUSTOM MENU → TRANSFER NATIVE
PEGASYS FILES.
Figure 7-8 ADAC User Custom Menu
2. In the Patient Selection dialog, mark patients to transfer; then click

[Proceed].
Figure 7-9 ADAC Patient Selection

3. Mark the images to transfer; then click [Proceed].
Figure 7-10 ADAC Transfer Initiation

The files are transferred to the Xeleris. They can be located in the local
database after a few minutes.
Figure 7-11 Locating Transferred Files

7.7.7.2 ICON Connectivity – Transferring Images from ICON to Xeleris

1. Open Database Utilities in the ICON Desktop window (opened from
the ICON link on the desktop).
Figure 7-12 ICON desktop
2. A list of patients is displayed.
Patient 1
Patient 2
Patient 3
Patient 4
Patient 5
Patient 6
Patient 7
Patient 8
Patient 9
Patient 10
Patient 11
Patient 12
Patient 13
Patient 14
Patient 15
Patient 16
Patient 17
Figure 7-13 ICON Patients List

3. Select the patient(s) you wish to transfer.
Patient 1 Patient 13
Patient 2
Patient 3
Patient 4
Patient 5
Patient 6
Patient 7
Patient 8
Patient 9
Patient 10
Patient 11
Patient 12
Patient 13
Patient 14
Patient 15
Patient 16
Patient 17
Figure 7-14 ICON Patient Selection
4. Open the Utilities menu and select Copy.

5. Highlight the MacLAN shared directory from the list, and click [OK].
Figure 7-15 Selecting Destination

The files begin to transfer to the Xeleris. Patients can be located in the
local database after a few minutes.
Figure 7-16 Deleting Study From Local Database

7.7.8 Checking Worklist Connectivity
7.7.8.1 Connectivity with Worklist Provider

1. Select the NumaList application from the Admin applications.
2. Click on the [Start] button on Xeleris UI ( see Figure 7-17)
Figure 7-17 Start NumaList

The NumaList window opens (see Figure 7-18).
Figure 7-18 NumaList Window
3. Click [Worklist Query]. The Worklist Query Form appears (see

Figure 7-19
Figure 7-19 Worklist Query

4. Verify that the results of the query are displayed in the Worklist
Information box.
7.7.8.2 Connectivity with DS Camera

1. On the DS camera Main Menu, select the [Export] button in the Data
Exchange section.
2. Press [Network Stations] and select the Xeleris station from the list of
stations.
3. Select one of the studies that is not already in the local database.
4. Click the [Validate] button and then [Interactive Transfer].
5. After the transfer is completed, on the Xeleris, click the [Patient List
Refresh] button in the NumaList application.
6. Verify that the data is displayed in the DICOM Files box.
Figure 7-20 NumaList with Data

7.7.8.3 Connectivity with Xeleris

1. Right-click on the file in the DICOM Files box and select [DICOM
Send] option.
2. Verify the data disappears from the DICOM Files Box.
3. Verify the original data from the camera appears in the local database.
Figure 7-21 Local Patient Database

Chapter 8 – Service Tools
The following service tools are described in this chapter:

z Section 8.1 – Philosophy on page 8-2
z Section 8.2 – Checking Xeleris Version on page 8-2
z Section 8.3 – Checking Xeleris Licenses on page 8-2
z Section 8.4 – DICOM Ping on page 8-3
z Section 8.5 – Accessing Service Tools from the Service Folder on
page 8-4
z Section 8.6 – Archive Doctor on page 8-5
z Section 8.7 – Create Infinia User on page 8-5
z Section 8.8 – eFlexTrial Manual Download on page 8–6
z Section 8.9 – System Information on page 8-7
z Section 8.10 – Running the R.C.C.D. (Remote Connection
Connectivity Diagnostics) on page 8-8
z Section 8.11 – iLinq Operation Check on page 8-11
z Section 8.12 – User Administrator on page 8-15
z Section 8.13 – Worklist Tool on page 8-16
z Section 8.14 – DICOM Doctor on page 8-18
z Section 8.15 – Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB on
page 8-20
z Section 8.16 – Checking Network Transfer Jobs on page 8-26
z Section 8.17 – Checking Archiving Jobs on page 8-26

Service Tools Philosophy
8.1 Philosophy
The general repair philosophy for the Xeleris workstation and its Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU) is to repair at a UNIT level for both hardware and
software. The product has been configured and structured to conform to
standard FRU policies and to utilize as many common parts as possible. A
troubleshooting guide, embedded InSite, and internal diagnostics allow fault
isolation to the FRU level.
In the Workstation, no internal components are exchanged with all repairs

being performed by the OEM vendor.
Training is structured to support this philosophy and develop a basic working

knowledge of the Windows XP environment as required for software and
Network troubleshooting.
8.2 Checking Xeleris Version

To check the Xeleris version,
2. Type showVersion.bat <Enter>.
The current Xeleris version is displayed.
8.3 Checking Xeleris Licenses
The Check Licenses tool can be run from the Xeleris Prompt by typing
checklicenses <Enter>.
For a full report, open the SystemInfoReport.txt file (refer to Section 8.9
on page 8-7).

Service Tools DICOM Ping
8.4 DICOM Ping

Used to check DICOM accessibility to DICOM Stations residing on the LAN.
1. Open Xeleris Configuration from the Desktop.
2. Go to the DICOM tab.
3. Select a DICOM station and click the [Echo] button.
The results will be displayed in the Status field.
OR
1. Perform Full shutdown of Xeleris (because the command requires
almost 100% CPU time).
3. At the d:\Einstein\Einstein_Project\exe> prompt:
a. To ping a specific DICOM station, type:
echoscu –host Station AE name <Enter>
where Station AE name is usually the computer name in caps lock.
b. To ping all connected DICOM stations, type:
echoscu <Enter>
If you can not see the entire report, create a text file report, by
typing:
echoscu>c:\echoscu.txt <Enter>
To display the created report, double-click My Computer icon on
the desktop and open c:\echoscu.txt file.

Service Tools Accessing Service Tools from the Service Folder
8.5 Accessing Service Tools from the Service Folder

The following service tools and service documents can be accessed from the
Service Folder on the desktop:
Archive Doctor To perform recover procedure on Archiving

devices.
Create Infinia User To automatically cretae the Infinia User on
Xeleris. This is part of the Hawkeye Registration
flow.
eConf To open the Xeleris configuration utility
eFlex Trial To install manually Xeleris trial licenses. Refer to
Section 8.8 – eFlexTrial Manual Download on
page 8-6
Hawkeye Registration To switch the Hawkeye Registration application
Application Switcher ON/OFF
Problem Report To create a problem report. Refer to Section 9.21 –
Creating Problem Reports on page 9–38
RCCD To create the RCCD.txt report. Refer to Section
8.10 – Running the R.C.C.D. (Remote Connection
Connectivity Diagnostics) on page 8-8
RCCD.txt To display the created RCCD.txt file, by the
RCCD application
Service Manual To display Chapter 8 - Service Tool,
Troubleshooting and Repair of the Xeleris
Service Manual. This document is available if the
Xeleris Service Manual CD is inserted in the CD
drive
SystemInfoReport To create a general system information report.
Refer to Section 8.9 – System Information on
page 8–7.
SystemInfoReport.txt To display the created SystemInfoReport.txt file,
by the SystemInfoReport application
User Administrator To open the Windows User Manager, and to
import/export site User Account user names
Worklist Tool To unhide studies in the database that remain
hidden due to transfer problems from DS camera.

Service Tools Archive Doctor
8.6 Archive Doctor

Used for recovering archive devices, such as MOD, DVD and Cache
directories. This tool scans the files on the archive media and rebuilds the
index file accordingly.
Note This tool does not operate on archive CD.
To activate the tool perform the following steps:

1. Double-click the Service Folder on the desktop.
2. Double-click the [Archive Doctor] icon.
3. Select the device name from the drop-down list and click
[Run Recovery].
4. Answer [Yes] to rebuild the DICOMDIR file.
5. Wait for the completion message.
8.7 Create Infinia User

Used for automatically creating a user named Infinia on Xeleris. This user is
required for Infinia-Xeleris communication, during Hawkeye calibration.

2. Double-click the [Create Infinia User] icon.
3. The tool will create the new user.
Note If a user named Infinia already exists on Xeleris, it is deleted and recreated.
4. Press <Enter> to close the window.

Service Tools eFlexTrial Manual Download
8.8 eFlexTrial Manual Download
Used for manual installation of permanent/temporary licenses that were

downloaded by email from the eLicenses web site. The licenses can be stored
on a floppy diskette to be used on XW5000 and XW4100, or on a CD for use
on XW6200.
3. Double-click the eFlexTrial icon.
4. Insert the diskette/CD with the eFlexTrial licenses into the appropriate
drive.
5. At the Install license dialog, click [Browse].
6. At the Open dialog, check that Look in: is pointing to the relevant
drive).
7. Select the required eFlexTrial license key file (filename.dat) and click
[Open].
8. Wait for the message:
Done: The licence has been successfully installed
and click [OK].
9. Remove the diskette/CD from the drive.
10. For temporary license installation, activate Xeleris and check that during
the Checking licenses... phase the message Xeleris Licenses
Check indicates the temporary license expiration date.

Service Tools System Information
8.9 System Information
Scope
This tool provides general system information to be used for diagnostics.
Overview
The program checks the items listed below and creates a report file called
SystemInfoReport.txt which is located in the
D:\Einstein\ Einstein_User\Resources\Service_Logs directory. The
report file can be accessed remotely by OLC.
Below is a list of the reported system items:

z Hospital Name
z Host Name
z System Date and System Time
z TCP/IP Properties
z Memory Size
z System CPU Type
z Operating System Language
z Disk Drive Information
z Xeleris software version
z HASP ID number
z Licenses status
z Available Databases details
z Available Hosts details
z Available Printers
z Archive details
z Interfile details
z OSI details
z Available DICOM stations details
To create and display the system information report:


Service Tools Running the R.C.C.D. (Remote Connection Connectivity Diagnostics)
8.10 Running the R.C.C.D. (Remote Connection Connectivity

Diagnostics)
This tool provides system configuration information to be used for InSite

diagnostics.
The program checks the items listed below and creates a report file called
RCCD.txt which is located in the
D:\Einstein\ Einstein_User\Resources\Service_Logs directory. The
report file can be accessed remotely by OLC.
To create and display the RCCD report:

2. Double-click the RCCD file to create the report; then wait until the shell
window is closed.
3. Double-click the RCCD.txt file to display the report.
4. Find the diagnostic results at the end of the RCCD.txt file.
a. The last section (or the one before it) should read RCCD Report -
Done.
b. For systems that have not beeen checked out, ignore the following
errors:
z Checkout - System is not checkedout (NOT - OK)
z System ID - File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t exist(NOT - OK)
z modem phone number - File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t
exist(NOT - OK)
z checkout - File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t exist (NOT - OK)
If any additional problem is encountered, refer to the relevant heading, as

listed below; then perform the relevant troubleshooting procedures.
z <Report Date & Time>
z <Hospital Name>
z <Computer Name>
z <IRouteSrv>
If NOT OK, perform the following procedures in the given order:
Perform InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite connection), as
per Section 6.3.1 on page 6-151
Re-run the RCCD report (this section).
If NOT OK, restart, manually, the IRouteSrv, by typing:
net start iroutesrv from the Xeleris Prompt.

Re-run the RCCD report (this section).

If NOT OK perform the following procedures in the given order:
Restart the computer; logon; and perform Full Xeleris
shutdown.
Uninstall InSite, as per Section 9.16.1.2 – InSite Uninstall on
page 9-25
Re-install the InSite software, as per Section 9.16.1.3 – Re-
Installing the InSite Software on page 9-26
Perform InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite connection),
as per Section 6.3.1 on page 6-151
z <Cygwin Service>
page 9-25
z <Modem Status>
Ensure that the Dial out and Receive calls message appears. Refer
to Section 9.16.1.1 – Modem Installation on page 9-20
z <IIPWebServer Status>
z <Ataman Status>
Verify that the status is Not running.
z <IE Version>
Check whether the IE (Internet Explorer) version is 6.00
If not, since the IE version 6.00 is a prerequisite for InSite
functionality, reload the operating system to enable remote
connection capability, as per Chapter 5 – Installations and Upgrades.
z <Insite User Account>
Perform Full shutdown.
page 9-25
z <Pinsite User Account>
Perform Full shutdown.


page 9-25
z <Insite Directory>
Perform Full shutdown
z <cygwin Directory>
Perform Full shutdown
page 9-25
z <Network configuration>
z <IIP Configuration>
If NOT OK, perform InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite
connection), as per Section 6.3.1 on page 6-151
z <CheckOut Status>
In systems that are not checked out, the following error will appear:
ERROR: System is not checkedout (NOT - OK)
z <System ID>
ERROR: File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t exist (NOT - OK)
z <Modem Phone Number>
ERROR: File C:/insite\sclink.cfg doesn’t exist (NOT - OK)
z <Insite Version>
Check that the InSite version is 3.4B-nt.
z <Connection configuration Status>
In systems that IIP was not configured, the following error will
appear: ERROR: File C:/insite\.insiteINFO does not exist
(NOT - OK).

Service Tools iLinq Operation Check
z <Telnet Status>
Check that the Telnet server listening on port 23 (OK).
Otherwise, configure the Interactive InSite Package (IIP), as per
Section 6.3.1.2 on page 6-151.
z <FTP Status>
Check that the FTP server listening on port 21 (OK).
Otherwise, configure the Interactive InSite Package (IIP), as per
Section 6.3.1.2 on page 6-151.
z <Router Registry - BindingIP>
Check that the result string (for example, E190x1) is identical to the
Ethernet Adapter in the Network Configuration section.
Otherwise, perform InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite
connection), as per Section 6.3.1 on page 6-151.
z <Router Registry - ModemIP>
Check that the result reflects your modem IP address.
Otherwise, perform InSite Entitlement (for sites with InSite
connection), as per Section 6.3.1 on page 6-151.
8.11 iLinq Operation Check
The iLinq tool allows the customer to submit a problem directly to the OLC.
The iLinq Browser becomes operational only after a successful InSite
Checkout.
1. Double-click the iLinq Browser icon on the desktop.
2. If the Welcome to Communicator window appears, ensure that the
displayed profile is InSite; then click [Start Communicator].

3. If the Netscape Navigator window appears, click [No]. The iLinq

Application home page will be displayed.
Figure 8-1 iLinq Home Page

4. In the Main Screen (HOME tab), click the Contact GE tab in the left-
hand toolbar. A menu will appear next to the button, allowing you to
choose the preferred language. Click the language of choice, and the
Reason for Contacting GE screen will be displayed.
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Figure 8-2 Reason for Contacting GE Screen
5. Indicate what type of issue you are having, System Problem or App
Question, by selecting the appropriate button in section one at the top
of the page (see Figure 8-2). For testing purposes, select System
Problem.
6. In section two, select the applicable problem.
Note Only ONE selection is permitted
7. Fill in the information requested in section three of the screen. The

following fields are mandatory:
z Submitter
z Phone
z Problem Description

8. Once all the desired fields have been filled, click [Submit] to initiate the
connection to the iLinq server.
Note The dialing and connection process can take up to four minutes.
Please be patient...
After the dialing process is completed, a request status message is

displayed (see Figure 8-3 below).
Figure 8-3 Request Submitted Message
The Request Submitted receipt will display whether the creation of an

iLinq call was successful. In addition, the most recent message sent and the
status of the message, received or failed, will be displayed in the Most
Recent Message box on the iLinq homepage (see Figure 8-1).
If for any reason, the Most Recent Message screen is either not displayed
or inadvertently closed, the Message History may be accessed from the
iLinq homepage. Simply click the Messages tab in the left-hand toolbar;
then choose between the current and the saved messages.

Service Tools User Administrator
8.12 User Administrator
The User Administrator Tool enables you to perform the following activities:
z Section 8.12.1 – Opening the User Manager on page 8-15
z Section 8.12.2 – Exporting the User Accounts on page 8-15
z Section 8.12.3 – Importing the User Accounts on page 8-16
8.12.1 Opening the User Manager
This procedure can be used in every case that the Windows User Manager
needs to be opened.
2. Double-click User Administrator.
3. At the open window, click User Manager.
8.12.2 Exporting the User Accounts
This procedure has to be used when User Accounts that were defined in the
local Xeleris station have to be copied to all the other installed Xeleris
systems.
3. Click Export User Accounts; then, browse to the preferred exporting
medium (Diskette, hard-disk, network).
4. If desired, rename the archived file (the default filename is
user_data.cfg), and click [Save].
Note The exported data includes the User Accounts usernames. It does not include the
passwords.

Service Tools Worklist Tool
8.12.3 Importing the User Accounts
This procedure has to be used when User Accounts that were defined in a
remote Xeleris station have to be copied to all the local Xeleris system.
3. Click Import User Accounts; then, browse to the used importing
medium (Diskette, hard-disk, network).
4. Browse to the archived file (the default filename is user_data.cfg), and
click [Open].
Note The imported data includes the User Accounts usernames. It does not include the
passwords.
5. Log off the current account.

6. Logon with the old username, leave the Password field empty, and
click [OK].
7. At the pop-up message You are required to change you
password, click [OK].
8. In the Change Password window, leave the Old Password field
blank, and type in the new password.
Type the password again in the Confirm New Password field.
9. Click [OK] to acknowledge the new password.
8.13 Worklist Tool

Used for unhiding studies in the database, that remained hidden due to transfer
problems from NumaList application.
8.13.1 Tool Description

NUMA Worklist for DS cameras works between 3 participants:
z Worklist provider
z Xeleris
z DS Camera

Service Tools Worklist Tool
The flow is as follows:

1. Xeleris queries the Worklist from the Worklist provider.
2. Xeleris sends demographic information from/to the DS camera.
The list contains stabs, with patients' demographic information.

3. The DS camera acquire studies, according to the list.
4. The DS camera sends the acquired data to Xeleris.
The data arrives in two locations:

z The NUMA List application
z The database, as hidden studies.
5. The NUMA List application in the Xeleris performs merge operation
between the acquired study and the corresponding Worklist item.
6. After the merge, the study is transferred to the database and the original
hidden study is removed from the database.
The Worklist Tool is provided in order to unhide worklist data in the

database, if for any reason such data remained hidden and unaccessible
in the database.
8.13.2 Worklist Tool Activation

2. Double-click the Worklist Tool icon.
3. If there are hidden studies in the database, they will be displayed in the
Worklist window.
4. Select the studies and click [Unhide].

Service Tools DICOM Doctor
8.14 DICOM Doctor
8.14.1 Tool Description

The DICOM Doctor helps in troubleshooting the site’s DICOM connections.
It is mainly intended for Field Engineers that have DICOM connectivity
knowledge. The tool implements simulators that allow capturing data over
the network or reproducing a communication issue.
DICOM Doctor provides a simulator for the following DICOM services:

z Verification SCU
z Storage SCU
z Storage SCP
z Query/Retrieve SCU
8.14.2 Package Content

z Software version DICOM Doctor 1.0.15.A for Windows 95/98/NT
z DICOM Dr. User Training presentation –
DICOMDoctor_training[1].ppt
8.14.3 System Requirements

Windows 95/98/NT requires 40 MB on disk.
WARNING
Don’t install DICOM Dr. on the Xeleris system.

The package should be installed on the Field Engineer’s laptop!
For DICOM Dr. assistance, call your OLC support.

Important

Service Tools DICOM Doctor
8.14.4 Installation
1. Close all open applications on your laptop.
2. From the Accessories – SW CD, browse to the DicomDR directory and
copy the DicomDR directory to a temporary directory.
3. Open the DicomDR directory, double-click dicomDR.vbs and follow
the displayed instructions.
4. Acknowledge the message that warns you not to install DICOMDR in
the Xeleris, but only in your laptop.
Note During the Setup of DICOM Doctor software installation wizard, install all the
required software components (DICOM Generator 1.5.2, Python Win32
Extensions, Tcl/Tk Extensions for Windows).
Do not acknowledge a computer restart until the installation is completed.
5. At the Setup of DICOM Doctor, Setup Complete screen, click No, I

will restart my computer later and click [Finish].
6. Follow the displayed directions to install the DICOM Generator 1.5.2,
Python Win32 Extensions, Tcl/Tk Extensions components.

Service Tools Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB
8.15 Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB
8.15.1 Software Licenses
This section explains how to acquire licences, as follows:

z Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB – Section 8.15.1.1 on
page 8-20
z Installing the licenses – Section 8.15.1.2 on page 8-23
z Backing up Xeleris Licenses – Section 8.15.1.3 on page 8-25
8.15.1.1 Working with Xeleris Licenses on the WEB
Xeleris licenses can be downloaded from:

The web tool allows you to download new licenses, by using the following
functions:
z Creating New Licenses From an Order on page 8-21
z Creating New Licenses Using Stock Order on page 8-21
Additionally, you can perform the following functions on existing licenses:

z View License Information for an Order on page 8-22
z View Existing Licenses for a System on page 8-22
z E-Mail Licenses on page 8-22
z Save Licenses to your Hard drive on page 8-23
z Reassign Licenses to a Different System on page 8-23

8.15.1.1.1 Creating New Licenses From an Order
1. From the main menu, in the Order Management section, type the
Order number in the appropriate text box; then click [Go].
Note The format options for an order number are displayed under the Examples
heading in the Order Management section.
2. At the Order Information screen, click [Add a System].

3. At the Enter System Information section, enter the Host ID, select
NM from the drop-down menu, and click [Go].
4. At the Enter System Information section, use the drop-down menu
to select the Xeleris model; then click [Continue].
5. At the Order Information section, check the licenses you want to
generate; then click [Generate Licenses].
Note Click [Check All] to select all available catalogs.
6. At the Order Information screen, verify the information you entered,

and click [Confirm Selection(s)].
7. Optional – If more than one system is planned to use licenses from the
same order, click [Add a System].
Note To display license text details, position the cursor over the key icon.
8. Optional – At the Enter System Information section, enter

information of the additional system, and click [Go].
Find the new system column in the table for an additional listed system;
repeat the process as necessary.
8.15.1.1.2 Creating New Licenses Using Stock Order
1. From the main web site menu, click the Admin link at the top of the
screen.
2. At the eLicense Management group, click the Create License For
Stock Order link.
3. At the Stock Order Management, select NM from the Modality
drop-down menu; then type the Stock Order number (numerical) in the
Order Id text box.
4. At the Order Information section, click [Add a System].

5. At the Enter System Information section, type the Host ID and

select NM from the drop-down menu; then click [Go].
6. At the Enter System Information section, select the Model Type
(Xeleris; eNTEGRA; or Powerstation) from the drop-down menu; then
click [Continue].
7. At the Order Information section, check the licenses you want to
generate; then click [Generate Licenses].
Note Click [Check All] to select all available catalogs.
8. At the Order Information screen, verify the displayed information,

and click [Confirm Selection(s)].
8.15.1.1.3 View License Information for an Order
1. From the main menu, at the Order Management section, enter the
Order Number in the Order Number text box; then click [Go].
The requested information is displayed in the table.
8.15.1.1.4 View Existing Licenses for a System
1. From the main menu, at the System Configuration section, type the
Host ID, and select NM from the drop-down menu; then click [Go].
The requested information is displayed in the table.
8.15.1.1.5 E-Mail Licenses
1. From the System Information screen, click [Email Licenses].

2. At the Email License Keys section, in the Address text box, type the
email address of a recipient, and click [Add].
The address is displayed in the table.
3. Repeat Step 2 to enter the addresses of all the recipients; then click
[Continue].

8.15.1.1.6 Save Licenses to your Hard drive
1. From the System Information screen, click [Save Licenses].

2. At the File Download prompt, select Save this file to disk, and
click [OK].
3. At the Save As window, type the filename (with a .bat extension),
select the required directory, and click [Save].
4. When the Download Complete window appears, click [Close].
8.15.1.1.7 Reassign Licenses to a Different System
1. From the System Information screen, click the Edit System

Information link.
2. At the Enter System Information section, type the new Host ID, and
click [Continue].
8.15.1.2 Installing the Licences
This section is applicable for installation of Xeleris permanent/temporary

Licenses that were downloaded by email (in Section 8.15.1.1.5 – E-Mail
Licenses on page 8-22).
3. Double-click the eFlexTrial icon.
4. Insert the diskette with the eFlexTrial licenses into the floppy drive.
5. At the Install license dialog, click [Browse].
6. At the Open dialog, check that Look in: is pointing to the relevant
drive (floppy for XW4100 and XW5000 or CD for XW6200).
7. Select the required eFlexTrial license key file (filename.dat) and click
[Open].
8. Wait for the message:
Done: The licence has been successfully installed
and click [OK].
9. Remove the diskette/CD from the drive.

Activate Xeleris, and in case temporary licenses were installed, check that
during the Checking licenses... phase, the message Xeleris Licenses
Check indicates the temporary license expiration date.
Table 8–1 lists the software options available on Xeleris, along with the
license file names.
Table 8–1: Xeleris SW Options
License Description Basic Option
4DMSPECT Clinical application y
a_connect Adac direct connect y
BPGSPECT Clinical application y
CSAutoReport ARG option y
CSMotCor Motion Correction y
ectoolbox Clinical application y
EmoryAutoReport NRP option y
ImageReg Image Registration y
ioa.6gb DVD y
NeuroGam Clinical application y
NeuroMatching Clinical application y
o_connect Odyssey direct connect y
osi OSI connect y
PerfEX ECToolbox enhancement y
PETTools ECToolbox enhancement y
qgspect Clinical application y
qps Clinical application y
quantem Clinical application y
s_connect Siemense direct connect y
t_connect Toshiba direct connect y
WLCQ Clinical application y
WBSlicingII Clinical application y
Filt3D 3D filtering for PET y
l_archive Legacy Archive devices (tapes) y
osem3d Clinical application y

Table 8–1: Xeleris SW Options
License Description Basic Option
rec.base Reconstructure server y
GatedQC ECToolbox enhancement
ar.base Archive server y
db.base Database server y
hc.base Hardcopy server y
iap.base Cedara servers y
pr.3d Processing server y
pr.base Processing server y
MMGeneral Multimedia creator y
WorklistDS NUMA Worklist for DS cameras y
Xeleris1.1 Xeleris application y
Note For more information about licenses and configuration content, see Table 11–4
8.15.1.3 Xeleris Licenses Backup
3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Backup/Restore tab
4. At the Licenses Backup group, click [Backup].
5. When the Backup completed successfully message appears;
Note The created file is located by default at

D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup\Licenses.tar.z. (or in other user-specified
location).
It is recommended to save this file on a diskette/CD for future use.

Service Tools Checking Network Transfer Jobs
8.16 Checking Network Transfer Jobs

The Networking Log records all the transfer jobs and indicates their final
status: COMPLETED or FAILED.
Transfer Log.
The study to be transferred is listed in the ACTIVE part of the window,
and when transferred successfully it appears in the COMPLETED part
of the window.
In case of transfer failure, the study is listed in the FAILED section.
8.17 Checking Archiving Jobs

The Archiving Log records all the archiving jobs and indicates their final
status: COMPLETED or FAILED.
1. Click the Archive icon on the status bar to open the Archive Transfer
Log.
The study to be archived is listed in the ACTIVE part of the window, and
window.
In case of archiving failure, the study is listed in the FAILED section.

Chapter 9 – Troubleshooting
This section provides instructions for:

z Section 9.1 – Philosophy on page 9–2
z Section 9.2 – Operating System Installation Problems on page 9–3
z Section 9.3 – Xeleris Installation Problems on page 9–3
z Section 9.4 – Post Installation Problems on page 9–4
z Section 9.5 – Assigning Drive Letters on page 9–6
z Section 9.6 – Setting the Virtual Memory on page 9-10
z Section 9.7 – ARG Option Troubleshooting on page 9-11
z Section 9.8 – Changing Network Adapter Properties on page 9-13
z Section 9.9 – Monitor Display Disappears After Recovery CD
Installation on page 9-13
z Section 9.10 – Systems with Two Network Cards on page 9-14
z Section 9.11 – Archive Repositories Not Attaching on page 9-14
z Section 9.12 – Retrieve and Import Errors on page 9-14
z Section 9.13 – Sending Large Print Jobs to a Local Printer on
page 9-15
z Section 9.14 – Adjusting the Display Properties on page 9-16
z Section 9.15 – Communication Problems on page 9–16
z Section 9.17 – Printing Problems on page 9–28
z Section 9.18 – Releasing the System When it Gets Stuck on page 9–29
z Section 9.19 – Restoring Previous Configuration on page 9–29
z Section 9.20 – License Problems on page 9–37
z Section 9.21 – Creating Problem Reports on page 9–38
z Section 9.22 – Recovering Database on page 9–40
z Section 9.23 – Load From Cold on page 9–42
z Section 9.24 – Removing the Second Network Card on page 9–53

Troubleshooting Philosophy
z Section 9.25 – Installing the Second Network Card on page 9–54

z Section 9.26 – Disconnecting Existing Optical Disks or DVD (if
applicable) on page 9–55
z Section 9.27 – Reconnecting Existing Optical Disk Drives/DVD (if
applicable) on page 9–55
z Section 9.28 – Codonics Status Check on page 9–55
z Section 9.29 – Disk Space Problems on page 9–57
z Section 9.30 – Verifying Data Storage on CD on page 9–58
z Section 9.31 – Reinstalling the OSI Option on page 9–59
z Section 9.32 – Recovering Local Database and Archive Log on
page 9–63
z Section 9.33 – Operating System Recovery on page 9–64
9.1 Philosophy
The general repair philosophy for the Xeleris workstation and its Field
Replaceable Unit (FRU) is to repair at a UNIT level for both hardware and
software. The product has been configured and structured to conform to
standard FRU policies and to utilize as many common parts as possible. A
troubleshooting guide, embedded InSite, and internal diagnostics allow fault
isolation to the FRU level.
In the Workstation, no internal components are exchanged with all repairs

being performed by the OEM vendor.
Training is structured to support this philosophy and develop a basic working

knowledge of the Windows environment as required for software and
Network troubleshooting.

Troubleshooting Operating System Installation Problems
9.2 Operating System Installation Problems
Note Xeleris Recovery CD contains Windows Operating System configured for Xeleris
installation. It is recommended to reinstall the operating system from this CD
whenever an OS related problem occurs. However, you can refer to Microsoft
Windows Online Help for solving OS problems as follows:
1. Click Start > Help

and Support > Fixing Problems >
Troubleshooting Problems > List of Troubleshooters
2. Select the appropriate troubleshooter according to the problem found.
9.3 Xeleris Installation Problems

Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action
During system start-up, the A new archive device Perform Section 9.5 – Assigning Drive
EOD is assigned drive D: was added to the system. Letters on page 9–6
instead of drive E:
Computer Operating System Monitor does not match 1. Load the system in safe mode (VGA
does not load. the definitions of the mode).
station. 2. Click Start → Settings → Control Panel.
3. Double-click the Display icon.
4. Choose the Settings tab.
5. Click the Advanced button.
6. Choose the Monitor tab.
7. Change the monitor settings frequency to
be 60 HZ.
8. Accept the settings, and reboot the
computer.
After first time installation of Missing or wrong system 1. Open the file einstein.error.log located in
Xeleris, the application license. D:\Einstein\Einstein_Project/exe
doesn’t start, and the following using Notepad.
error message is displayed: 2. Scroll to the end of the file and check for
“Error while initializing Xeleris, the message:
check servers” No node locking license: 4!
Meaning that the basic Xeleris license is
incorrect or missing.
3. If the above message appears, reinstall
the system licenses as per Section 8.15 –
Working with Xeleris Licenses on the
WEB on page 8-20.

Troubleshooting Post Installation Problems
The IIIPWebServer window The IIIP Web Server is Stop the IIIPWebServer service.
appears with the Java VM running 1. Click Start → Settings → Control Panel.
exit with code 3, restart it? 2. Double-click the Administrative Tools
message icon.
3. Double-click the Services icon.
4. Double-click the IIIPWebServer entry,
and click [Stop].
5. Wait until the process finishes.
6. From the Startup list box, select
Disabled, and click [OK].
7. Verify that the IIIPWebServer status is not
started, and that it is Disabled.
8. Close the Services window].
9. Close the Administrative Tools window.
After upgrading from Corrupted path 1. Right click on the My Computer icon on
eNTEGRA, Xeleris does not environment variable the Desktop.
start, and an error message 2. Select Properties.
about missing dll files 3. Go to the Advanced tab.
appears. 4. Click [Environment Variables] and click
[OK].
5. Click [OK] to close System Properties.
9.4 Post Installation Problems

Troubleshooting Post Installation Problems
During Load From Warm One or more of the Close all Xeleris Servers by clicking the Stop
(LFW) the following message Xeleris Servers are still Servers icon on the desktop and restart
appears: active. LFW.
“An error occurred during the

move of data process: 115”
Xeleris environment does not Files on hard disk are Reload Xeleris application (perform LFW).
open successfully. corrupted.
When starting an application, The protocol is compiled Check the system’s date. If it is wrong, fix it
it takes a long time for the with each activation. (via [Start ] → Control Panel → Date/Time)
card to appear. and reactivate the protocol.
Windows Blue Screen Wrong drive letter 1. While the computer is starting, press and
appears, after Xeleris is assignment in eConf, hold the <SHIFT> key, to avoid the
started. between optical devices. applications from running at startup (If the
Xeleris still opens, close the shell
window).
2. Correct the drive letters in the Xeleris
Configuration Archive tab.
3. Restart Xeleris.
XP firewall messages prevent Changing the network Disable the Firewall service as follows:
Xeleris from starting. configuration from 1. Right-click on My Network Places and
WORKGROUP do select Properties.
DOMAIN, sets the 2. Right-click on Local Area Connection
Firewall service to ON. and select Properties.
3. Go to the Advanced tab and click the
[Settings] button in the Windows
Firewall group.
4. Set Window Firewall to OFF and click
[OK]
5. Click [OK] in the Local Area Connection
Properties Window.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 for each Local Area
Connection in the system.
7. Close the Network Connection window.

Troubleshooting Assigning Drive Letters
9.5 Assigning Drive Letters

This section is applicable only if you have DVD or MOD drives installed in
the system.
WARNING
Failure to correctly assign the Drive Letters will result in failure of the Xeleris
application.
Note Before starting the procedure, verify that if system has a DVD and/or MOD, a
formatted media is inserted in the drive.
1. Right-click on My Computer icon on the desktop and select Manage.

2. The computer management window opens, with all available drives

displayed:

3. To change drive letter, right-click on one of the drives.
4. In the open dialog, click [Change…]

5. Select the desired drive letter from the drop-down list and click [OK]..
6. Confirm the caution message by clicking [Yes].
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for all drives.
Note Assign the drive letters to achieve the following recommended configuration:
C - System drive
D - Second hard drive partition
E - Disk 1, if available (DVD or MOD drive)
F - Disk 2, if available (DVD or MOD drive)
CD-ROM 0 - System CD-ROM / RW drive
CD-ROM 1 - if available (DVD drive)
8. Close the Computer Management window..

9. If asked, click [Yes] to save the changes; then click [OK].
WARNING
Do not change the drive letters in the Archive tab on the Xeleris
Configuration,after performing this procedure.

Troubleshooting Setting the Virtual Memory
9.6 Setting the Virtual Memory

1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop, and from the
dropdown menu choose Properties.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. In the Performence box, click the Settings button.
4. In the Performance Option dialog, select the Advanced tab.
5. In the Virtual Memory box, click the Change button
6. In the Drive [Volume Label] window, highlight D: .
7. The following table details the memory settings according to the
installed memory size:
System Memory Initial Size Maximum Size

Size [GB] [MB] [MB]
1 1300 1500
2 2056 2100
8. Verify that for drive C: the option No paging file is selected.

Click Set.
9. When finished, click Set; then click [OK].
10. Click [OK] to close the Performance Options window.
10. Click [OK] to close the System Properties window.

Troubleshooting ARG Option Troubleshooting
9.7 ARG Option Troubleshooting
9.7.1 Database Connection Failed Error Message

If this error message appears after clicking the ARG Administrator icon on
the desktop, it may indicate that the ARG option was not properly installed.
Workaround:
1. Stop MySQL service as follows:
a. Double-click My Computer > Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Services.
b. Right-click MySQL service from the list, and select Stop.
2. Insert the Xeleris Application CD in the CD Drive.
3. When Xeleris Installation starts, click Cancel.
4. Browse to E:\Options\ARG and run the InstallARG.vbs script.
9.7.2 QGS Starting Error

One of the reasons for QGS Application failure upon starting is the fact that
the ARG license exists, but the ARG package was not installed.
To check if the ARG license exists, look for the file csautoreport under
D:\Einstein\Licenses.
To check if the ARG package is installed:

1. Click on [Start], select Settings, select Control Panel, double click
on Administrative Tools, double click on Services and check that
the service MySQL exists and has started.
Or
2. Open Windows Task Manager, go to the Processes tab and check
if mysqld-nt.exe exists.
z If the site did not purchase the ARG option, remove the license by
deleting the file from the D:\Einstein\Licenses directory.
z If the ARG option was purchased by the site, re-install the ARG
option.
Note The MySQL service must be stopped before starting ARG installation.
Refer to Section 9.7.3 below.

Troubleshooting ARG Option Troubleshooting
9.7.3 Error During ARG Installation
A problem occurs when ARG is re-installed over a previous ARG installation.
More specifically, the problem occurs when MySQL is being installed while
MySQL service is still running. In that case, an error message box appears:
"MySQL Servers and Clients 4.0.18

An error occurred during the move data
process: -103
Components: Servers
File Group:
File:"
To overcome this problem, the MySQL service must be stopped.

1. Click on [Start], select Settings, select Control Panel, double click
on Administrative Tools, double click on Services and check the
service MySQL.
2. If the Status is "Started", highlight the MySQL service, right-click and
select [Stop].
3. After the service is stopped, start the ARG installation.

Troubleshooting Changing Network Adapter Properties
9.8 Changing Network Adapter Properties

When applying changes to Network Adapter Properties (i.e. Link Speed &
Duplex) the dialog might freeze. To release the dialog, OSI services must be
stopped.
1. Browse to D:\Einstein\Einstein_Project\exe\service_tools\
2. Run OSI_Stop.vbs script.
Note You must restart the computer to enable OSI connectivity.
9.9 Monitor Display Disappears After Recovery CD

Installation
The computer has two VGA outlets. The system is configured to work with
Outlet #1 which is marked with a white label.
z Make sure that the monitor is connected to Outlet #1.
z If the problem persists, the monitor refresh rate should be changed.
To change the refresh rate settings, do the following:

2. During computer boot-up, before the Window XP screen appears, press
the F8 key. You should get a Boot-up Mode menu.
3. Select VGA mode and continue the boot sequence.
The computer will use the lowest screen resolution possible.

4. To change the resolution and refresh rate, right-click on the desktop and
select Properties.
5. Go to the Settings tab and set the resolution to 1280x1024, using the
slider.
6. Select the Highest Color Quality from the list box.
7. Click the [Advanced] button.
8. Go to the Monitor tab and select refresh rate of 60 Hertz.
9. Click [OK] twice, to close both windows.
10. Reboot the computer.

Troubleshooting Systems with Two Network Cards
9.10 Systems with Two Network Cards

In systems with two network cards installed, the Xeleris Inbox feature and
OSI connectivity may not work properly. This happens when the priorities
of the network cards are not set correctly causing an irrelevant IP address to
be reported to the network.
Solution: Check the Network Card priority settings and change if necessary
as follows:
1. Right click My Network Places on the desktop and choose
Properties.
2. In the opened window click on Advanced located on the upper toolbar
and then choose Advanced settings...
3. In the upper opened window you will find all your LAN connections.
Make sure that the Network card with the correct IP address for this
network is listed first. If not, move it to the top of the list.
4. Disconnect the second network card.
5. Run D:\Einstein\Einstein_Project\exe\OSIUpdate.exe from Xeleris
command prompt.
6. Reconnect the second network card.
9.11 Archive Repositories Not Attaching

In case after the upgrade the archive repositories are red and the Attach does
nothing, do the following:
1. Open Econf and go to Archive tab.
2. Disable the Archive functionality and enable it again.
3. Press [OK] twice and restart the server.
9.12 Retrieve and Import Errors

In case after the upgrade retrieve from archived media or importing DICOM
data fails with the following error: "Out of Resources - Memory!", do the
following:
1. Open Econf and go to the Database tab.
2. Find an empty database definition (no name, ip address etc.) and remove
it from the databases list.
3. Press [OK] twice.
4. Perform a partial shutdown and restart Xeleris.

Troubleshooting Sending Large Print Jobs to a Local Printer
9.13 Sending Large Print Jobs to a Local Printer
InWindows XP, the Print Spooler service sometimes does not function
properly when sending large print jobs from the workstation to a local printer.
This can be rectified by restarting the spooler as follows:
z Reboot the computer. This will restart the spooler.
OR, to restart the spooler without rebooting:

1. Right-click My Computer icon on the desktop and choose Manage.
The Computer Management Window opens.
Figure 9-1 Print Spooler Application
2. Open the Services and Applications folder in the left pane and
select Services.
3. Scroll down the list of services in the right pane and select Print
Spooler.
4. Right-click the Print Spooler and select Restart from the drop-down
menu.
The printer should now process larg print jobs with no problems.

Troubleshooting Adjusting the Display Properties
9.14 Adjusting the Display Properties

1. If the Invalid Display Settings window is opened, click [OK].
2. The Display Properties window is opened to the Settings tab.
3. From the Color Quality list, select Highest (32bit).
4. Move the slider in the Desktop Area to display a resolution of
1280 by 1024 pixels.
5. Click [Advanced].
6. Go to the Monitor tab.
7. Click the down arrow under Refresh frequency and select the
applicable value:
Monitor Type Frequency [Hz]
LCD 60
Other 75
8. Click the [Apply] button.

9. Click [Yes] if the image on the screen appears properly.
Otherwise, reduce the refresh frequency, as per your display monitor
requirements.
10. At the Display Properties window, click the [OK] button.
9.15 Communication Problems
Table 9–1: Communication Problems
After configuring the network Wrong remote station 1. Click System Setup → [Config...].
settings, the Xeleris settings in the Xeleris 2. Check the definition of the configured
application does not re–open. configuration utility. remote stations in the relevant
communication configuration tab.
No communication with Remote station failure or 1. Double-click the Xeleris Prompt icon on
configured stations. OFF. the desktop.
2. Type ping Hostname <Enter>, where
Hostname refers to the hostname of the
remote station.
3. If the remote station does not reply, it is
not available.

Troubleshooting Communication Problems
Table 9–1: Communication Problems (Continued)
DICOM connectivity problems Station not connected to 1. Click System Setup → [Config...] →
the network Dicom tab.
2. Select the problematic DICOM node, click
Wrong configuration (AE
[Echo] and check the Status. Proceed
or port number)
according to the status:
DICOM Server is down.
Undefined error – the station is not connected
to the network.
Remote station is offline or wrong
parameters – check the configuration and the
correct it if necessary.
If configuration is OK, perform Full Xeleris
shutdown, double-click Stop Servers icon on
the desktop, restart Xeleris, and repeat Steps 1
and 2 above. Verify that the Status is Remote
station is online.
Not receiving data from other DICOM disables data 1. Click System Setup → [Config...] →
stations reception from unknown Dicom tab.
users, 2. At the Local machine group click
[Advanced...].
3. At the Advanced Local station
configuration dialog, deselect Allow to
receive data from unknown user and
click [OK].
4. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click
[OK].
5. Acknowledge the request to restart
servers by clicking [OK].
6. Perform Full Xeleris shutdown and restart
the application.
The status of one or more LMHOST Lookup of Enable the LMHOST Lookup as follows:
Remote Database(s) changes TCP/IP properties is 1. Iconize Xeleris to view the desktop.
several times between disabled. 2. Right-click My Network Places icon
Querying and Checking size residing on the desktop and select
and then turns to Error. Properties.
3. Right-click the Local Area connection
and slect Properties.
4. Double-click TCP/IP Protocol.
5. In the Microsoft TCP/IP Properties
window, click [Advanced] and go to WINS
tab.
6. Click the checkbox next to Enable
LMHOSTS Lookup and click [OK].
7. Click [OK] three times to close open
windows.
8. Close the Network Connection window.
9. For the new setting to take affect
shutdown and restart the computer, as
prompted.

Troubleshooting Communication Problems
Table 9–1: Communication Problems (Continued)
Data is not transferred There are two entries in Delete one of the entries from the Database
correctly to the Local the Database tab for the tab.
database. Local database.
3. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog,
choose the Database tab.
4. If there is more than one database listed
as Local, select it, and click the Remove
button.
5. Click [OK]; then, choose Save to the
prompt.
Transfer of studies between The network card Change the network card settings to 100mbs
stations is slow. settings are wrong. Full Duplex as follows:.
1. Right-click on the My Computer icon and
select Manage.
2. Click Device Manager and double-click
Network Adapters.
3. Right-click on the adapter and select
Properties.
4. Go to the Advanced tab.
5. Select the Speed & Duplex property and
set the value to 100 Mb Full.
6. Click [OK].
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for each network
adapter on the system.
8. Close the Computer Management
window.
Ignite™ does not work when SW version on the Make sure that the camera SW version is 4.0
sending data from GenieAcq camera's side doesn't and up and that the LSW000521 patch is
cameras. include patch installed.
LSW000521. Patch spare part number is UGP0001609.
FTP/telnet communication to FTP/telnet servers are 1. Double-click the iLinq Shell icon on the
Xeleris doesn't work. not running on Xeleris. desktop.
2. At system prompt, type: setService
<Enter>.

Troubleshooting Remote Connectivity Problems
9.16 Remote Connectivity Problems
Note This procedure should be performed only by an OLC engineer.
9.16.1 Remote Connection Troubleshooting Procedures

z Section 9.16.1.1 – Modem Installation on page 9-20
z Section 9.16.1.2 – InSite Uninstall on page 9-25
z Section 9.16.1.3 – Re-Installing the InSite Software on page 9-26
z Section 9.16.1.4 – Check Modem Connection on page 9-27

9.16.1.1 Modem Installation

z Xeleris is configured to work with Multitech modem by default.
z The Multitech modem driver is installed during the Recovery CD
Installation.
z If the system is connected by USRobotics modem and the system
does not automatically detect it, the driver should be updated
according to the following steps:
1. Right click My Computer icon and select Properties.

2. Go to the Hardware tab and click Device Manager.
The Device Manager window opens.

3. Rightclick on the MultiTech modem and select Update Driver...
4. In the Wizard window, select Install from a list or spesific location

(Advanced) and click [Next>].

5. Select Don't search, I will choose the driver to install and click
[Next>]
6. Uncheck the Show Compatible hardware checkbox.

All available drivers will be displayed .

7. Select U.S. Robotics Corporation in the Manufacturer list at the left
and select Courier V. Everything EXT PnP (V90-x2) Version
5.1.2535.0 (3/9/2000) Click [Next>].
8. A warning message will be displayed.
9. Click [Yes]
10. After the installation is complete, click [Finish].

9.16.1.2 InSite Uninstall

1. Restart the computer, and log in as wsservice, password #bigguy1.
2. Perform Full Xeleris Shutdown.
3. Backup IIP from Xeleris Configuration (refer to Section 6.2.15.1 on
page 6-129)
4. Insert the Xeleris CD into the CD drive.
5. Click [No] when asked if performing LFC.
automatically loaded. The following window is displayed (refer to
7. Click [Other].
The Other options are enabled.
Note If the Uninstall InSite option is disabled, this means that the InSite option is not
installed.
8. From the InSite group, select the Uninstall InSite option.

9. Click [Finish].
Note If the system hangs during the Uninstall procedure, do the following:
a) Open iLinq Shell.
b) Type iipadmin uninstall <Enter>
c) Wait for the procedure to complete and restart the computer (a hard reboot might
be necessary)
10. Wait until the process is finished, and restart the computer.

9.16.1.3 Re-Installing the InSite Software
The procedure in this section re-installs the InSite Software package.
Note This procedure can be done only if the InSite package is not currently installed.
1. Restart the computer, and log in as wsservice, password #bigguy1.

2. Perform Full Xeleris Shutdown.
3. Insert the Xeleris CD into the CD drive.
4. Click [No] when asked if performing LFC.
automatically loaded. The following window is displayed (refer to
Figure 5-3 on page 5-18)
6. Click [Other].
The Other options are enabled.
Note If the Install InSite option is disabled, you must Uninstall the InSite Software
package first (refer to Section 9.16.1.2 on page 9-25); then repeat this
procedure.
7. From the InSite group, select the Install InSite option.

8. Click [Finish].
9. Wait until the process is finished, and restart the computer.
10. Restore IIP from Xeleris Configuration (refer to Section 9.19.1 on
page 9-30)
11. Open iLinq Shell.
12. Type: configlink [Enter].
13. When done, close iLinq Shell and reboot the system.
Note There is no need to perform check out. The system is ready for connection.

9.16.1.4 Check Modem Connection

1. Check that the modem is properly connected, and is turned on. If it is,
proceed to the next step.
Otherwise, if you reached this procedure due to a modem connectivity
during InSite Entitlement, return to Step 6.ii in Section 6.3.1.2 –
Configuring the Interactive InSite Package (IIP) on page 6-151.
2. Check that the modem serial port that was configured in the Device
connection tab, is the same as the one physically connected to the RS-
232 connector at the rear of the computer. If it is, proceed to the next
step.
3. Verify that all the entries in the Device Connection tab are correct. If
they are, proceed to the next step.
4. If you reached this procedure due to a modem connectivity problem
during InSite Entitlement, to restart and re-configure the IIP, go to
Section 6.3.1.2 – Configuring the Interactive InSite Package (IIP) on
page 6-151.
9.16.2 Remote Problem Report

To create a problem report remotely, in Silent Mode (user will not be aware
of the process) perform the following:
1. Open the CSD from the Connect Tool in VOLC.
2. Go to the Utilities tool.
3. Click the “Create Problem Report” link.
4. Wait for the Problem Report to be created.
When the Problem Report is ready, the page will indicate it by changing
color.
5. Click the “Get Problem Report” link and save it to your computer.

Troubleshooting Printing Problems
9.17 Printing Problems

Table 9–2: Printing Problems
TCP/IP printers printing Wrong Configuration on 1. Open the Xeleris Configuration dialog.
problems. local system 2. Check the printer settings in the Printer
tab, and correct if necessary.
Printer disconnected 1. Double-click the Xeleris Prompt icon on

the desktop.
2. Type ping Hostname <Enter>, where
Hostname refers to the hostname of the
remote station.
3. If the remote station does not replay, it is
not available.
No printouts. At the Print HcServer Perform Full shutdown of Xeleris and restart it
dialog, the Status is No to restart the HcServer.
media or Unknown.
Codonics printing Wrong configuration on Connect to Codonics using telnet and check
problems (in addition to the Codonics the printer status, as per Section 9.28. If not,
TCP/IP problems) contact Codonics service.
Missing Codonics 1. Connect to Codonics using telnet, as per

software patches Section 9.28 Step 1 through Step 4.
The telnet session will display any
communication between the Xeleris and
the Codonics.
2. At the UNIX prompt, type
more /etc /updates <Enter>.
3. Verify that the ’lpd’ and ’snnpd’ patches
are loaded. If not, contact Codonics
service.
Printing to default printer Printer name in Econf is 1. Change printer name in Econf to be one
(without opening the not one word word
Print Dialog) fails with 2. Perform full shutdown of Xeleris.
Serious System Error 3. Reload Xeleris
(SSE) 4. Load any data to Workspace
5. Open the print Dialog
6. For each user template, using the changed
printer name as a destination, Press the
Save Button.
Following the installation The printer driver is using Try connecting the printer to one of the USB
of a printer connected to the same port as the ports. Try to install the latest driver for the
the parallel port, the HASP driver printer.
HASP is not recognized
by the system

Troubleshooting Releasing the System When it Gets Stuck
9.18 Releasing the System When it Gets Stuck
When the system is stuck:

1. Press <Alt><Ctrl><Del> to display the Task Manager window.
2. Verify that the Applications tab is selected.
3. Using the Down Arrow key, move the cursor to highlight the
d:\einstein\einstein_project\exe\einstein.exe file and click [End
Task].
4. Exit the Task manager, by clicking the [x] in the top right of the
window
5. Restart Xeleris.
9.19 Restoring Previous Configuration
When problems are encountered following any system configuration change,

restore the previous configuration.
Xeleris supports restoring from both Xeleris and eNTEGRA 2.5 software versions.
Important
Restore can be done from one of the following media:

z Section 9.19.1 – Restore from Hard Disk on page 9-30
z Section 9.19.2 – Restoring from Network on page 9-33
z Section 9.19.3 – Restore from Removable Medium on page 9-35
z Section 9.19.4 – Importing Vision Configuration on page 9-36
WARNING
In order for the Xeleris configuration to be restored, the application and servers
have to be shut down as follows:
1. From the Main Xeleris screen, click the [ X] (shutdown) button at the upper
right corner of the screen.
3. Wait until the Xeleris application and its servers are closed.

Troubleshooting Restoring Previous Configuration
9.19.1 Restore from Hard Disk
For restoring all options, according to the backed-up files in Section 6.2.15.1
– Backup on Hard Disk on page 6–129, two phases need to be done. First,
all options excluding the Archive History, second, only the Archive History.
All options excluding the Archive History

Click the Restore radio button.
Figure 9-2 Restore Configuration
3. Choose the groups to be restored, by clicking the appropriate

checkboxes.

Note • Only the groups that were backed up can be restored; all the others are
dimmed (disabled).
• The syntax of the file name is XELERIS_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmxxx].tar.Z
located under d:\einstein\einstein_user\\backup
Click [Restore].
The system warns you that all changes made after last backup will be
lost.
Click [Yes] to acknowledge the warning.
4. If the message Restore completed successfully appears,
acknowledge it by clicking [OK]
Otherwise:
a. Click [OK] to display the Backup\Restore error log.
b. Click [Close].
The system tries to undo the failed restore.
c. Click [OK].
5. Click [OK] to acknowledge the request to perform Full Xeleris
shutdown.
Ignore this direction, because Xeleris is not running.
Archive History Only

2. At the Xeleris Configuration window, click the Backup\Restore
tab.
3. Click the Restore radio button.

Figure 9-3 Restore Archive History
4. Deselect all options; then select Archive History only.
Note The syntax of the file name is XELERIS_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmxxx].tar.Z

located under d:\einstein\einstein_user\\backup
5. Click [Restore].
Click [Yes] to the prompt You should only restore the Archive
History if it has been corrupted. Continue?
acknowledge it by clicking [OK]
Otherwise:
b. Click [Close].


c. Click [OK].
shutdown.
Note To undo the last restore click the [Undo Last Restore] on the
Backup\Restore tab.
9.19.2 Restoring from Network

Restore from network can be done by two methods:
z Restoring Directly from a Remote Station on page 9-33
z Restoring by Using the Backup\Restore Tool on page 9-34
z Restoring by Using FTP on page 9-35
9.19.2.1 Restoring Directly from a Remote Station

For accessing a station connected to the network, perform the following:
1. Double click the My Computer icon on the desktop.
2. Browse to D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup.
3. Open the remote station Windows Explorer, as follows:
a. Click Start → Run
b. Type \\<Computer Name>\d$ <Enter>
Note The Computer Name is case sensitive.
c. If you are prompted to login:

For Xeleris remote stations login with
username wsservice
password #bigguy1
and click [OK].

For eNTEGRA remote stations login with
username entegra
password entegra
and click [OK].

4. At the local Explorer, copy the compressed backup file from the remote
station.
9.19.2.2 Restoring by Using the Backup\Restore Tool
9.19.2.2.1 Prerequisites:
z Shared, temporary directory on a remote station connected to the
LAN, which can be accessed from the local station.
9.19.2.2.2 Procedure:

tab.
3. Click the Restore radio button.
4. Browse to the Shared temporary directory on the remote station and
click [OK].
5. At the Restore Details group, select the checkboxes of the groups to
be restored, and click [Restore].
The system warns you that all changes made after last backup will be
lost.
Click [Yes] to acknowledge the warning.
Otherwise:
b. Click [Close].
c. Click [OK].
shutdown.
Note To undo the last restore click the [Undo Last Restore] on the
Backup\Restore tab.

9.19.2.3 Restoring by Using FTP
9.19.2.3.1 Prerequisites:
InSite installed on remote eNTEGRA 2.5 or Xeleris system (Host name or
IP) connected to the LAN, with the compressed Backup file in a temporary
directory, an FTP server up and running.
9.19.2.3.2 Procedure:
2. Change directory to D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup
3. Type ftp <IP or Hostname> <Enter>.
7. Browse to the temporary directory (on the remote station), where you
intend to store the backup file.
8. Type bin <Enter>.
9. Type get <Backup Filename> <Enter>.
10. Wait for the successful transfer message.
13. Proceed to Section 9.19.1 – Restore from Hard Disk on page 9-30.
9.19.3 Restore from Removable Medium

tab.
3. Insert the backup medium (diskette, CD-R or CD-RW) labeled Xeleris
Configuration Backup, Version Number, Backup Date into the
appropriate drive.
4. Browse to the backed up file on the removable medium using the
[Browse...] button and click [OK].
Verify that the selected file is displayed next to Restore Filename.
The Restore Details group enables only the backed up groups.

5. Click the [Restore] button.

The system warns you that all changes made after the last backup will be
lost.
6. Click [Yes] to acknowledge the warning.
7. If the message Restore completed successfully is displayed,
Otherwise, click [OK] to display the Backup\Restore error log. Click
[Close]. The system tries to undo the last restore.
Note To undo the last restore you can use the [Undo Last Restore] button on the
Backup\Restore tab.

shutdown.
9. Right-click on the DirectCD icon at the right part of the Tasks Bar and
select the Eject entry.
9.19.4 Importing Vision Configuration
The DICOM and printer configurations from a Vision Powerstation installed

at the same site can be imported and added to the Xeleris configuration.
Note The IP of the destination station must be written down in the last file of the Vision
Station.
9.19.4.1 To import the DICOM and Printer configurations:

tab.
3. Enter the IP Address of the Powerstation in the “Host IP” Edit box.
4. Press [Import] and wait until the operation finishes.
5. Close the Xeleris Configuration.
6. If needed, perform a full shutdown of Xeleris.

Troubleshooting License Problems
9.20 License Problems
The licenses in the D:\Einstein\Licences directory must match the system

activator.
1. If the system detects expired licenses, a warning window appears, with
the list of problematic files and the following question:
Do you wish to see this message again?
2. Find out if the expired license file is necessary for this site. If so, arrange
for a valid license file to be placed in the D:\Einstein\Licences
directory.
3. If the expired license file is no longer needed, click [No]. Otherwise
click [Yes].
4. If you have clicked [No], the following message appears:
Do you wish to move the following files into a backup
directory?
Confirm the message by clicking [Yes].

The expired files are moved to the TMP directory, so that they will be
ignored in the next activation.
Note Files with HaspID conflicts are not touched.
5. If files with HaspID conflicts (i.e., the licenses in the

D:\Einstein\Licences directory do not match the activator) are
encountered (but not yet expired), a critical window appears with the list of
the files.
6. Write down the problematic license files and click [OK].
7. Move the problematic files from D:\Einstein\Licences to a TEMP
directory, and contact the OLC for assistance.
To check the licenses:

1. Open the Xeleris Prompt from the desktop.
2. Type in CheckLicenses -w <Enter>.
If licenses with HaspID conflicts are detected, a pop-up window appears,
displaying the problematic files.

Troubleshooting Creating Problem Reports
To restore the Xeleris licenses:
4. At the Licenses Backup group, click [Restore].
5. When the Restore completed successfully message appears;
shutdown.
9.21 Creating Problem Reports
In case of unsolved problems:

z For DICOM transfer problems only, proceed to Section 9.21.1 on
page 9-38
z For all other problems proceed to Section 9.21.2 on page 9-39
9.21.1 Enabling DICOM Problem Analysis
To enhance problem analysis, save the DICOM messages issued during the
unsuccessful DICOM transfer on the disk, as follows:
1. Click System Setup on the main navigation panel, at the Xeleris
Configuration dialog click [Config...], and click the Dicom tab.
2. At the Local machine group, click [Advanced...].
3. At the Advanced Local station configuration dialog, select
Error And Info from the Debug Level drop-down list and click [OK].
5. Click [OK] to acknowledge the request to restart servers.

Troubleshooting Creating Problem Reports
6. Perform Full Xeleris shutdown and restart the application.

7. When the problem occurs, create a problem report as described in
Section 9.21.2 – Creating a Problem Report on page 9-39.
8. When the problem report was generated, return the Advanced DICOM to
its default configuration, as follows:
a. At the Dicom tab of Xeleris Configuration dialog, click
[Advanced...] located at the Local Machine group.
b. At the Advanced Local station configuration dialog, select
Error Only from the Debug Level drop-down list and click [OK].
10. Click [OK] to acknowledge the request to restart servers.
11. Perform Full Xeleris shutdown and restart the application.
9.21.2 Creating a Problem Report

1. Double-click the Problem Report icon residing on the desktop.
The main dialog titled Xeleris Problem Report opens. This dialog
includes options for textual problem description, date and time
indication, as well as attaching a Patient Study - read online from the
database.
2. In the date and time picker indicate when did the problem occur.
3. In the Problem Description field, type a description of the problem
encountered, including the operations that preceded the problem, the
expected results of these operations and the actual results.
4. In case of DICOM transfer problems, type in the name of the Patient/
Study whose transfer failed and the date and time of the transfer.
5. If you wish to attach a Patient Study from the database:
a. Select the appropriate Data source (database host) and click the
[Refresh study List] button.
An updated list of patient names will appear.
b. Select the appropriate patient name.
c. Click the [Build Report] button.
The program will process and collect all the relevant data (this will
take a few minutes).
Eventually, a compressed ZIP file is created in the following path:
D:\Enstein\ProbReport.tar.z (provided that you have enough
disk space on your D: drive.

Troubleshooting Recovering Database
Note that the database files can be relatively large.

6. Mail the ProbReport.tar.z file to your service office.
7. In case of DICOM Transfer problems, go to Section 9.21.1 on page 9-38
and continue from Step 8.
9.22 Recovering Database

At every Xeleris Startup, the database integrity is automatically checked. Whenever
Important
the database is found to be corrupted, the recovery procedure is automatically
activated.
9.22.1 Scope
This procedure is applicable when the database appears to be corrupt.
9.22.2 General
Operating this tool on a non-corrupt database, leaves that database intact.
This tool fixes corrupt database tables, and verifies their status.
The database recovery process can extend to a substantial period, depending

on the database size, and the PC platform.
The process is completed, after the Done! row is displayed.
9.22.3 Prerequisites
The Database server must be down.
9.22.4 Procedure
1. From the Main application screen, click the [X] (shutdown) button at the
3. Wait until the application and its servers are closed.
4. Double-click the Stop Servers icon on the desktop, and wait for the
shell to close.
Stopping the servers (especially the database server) is crucial for the database
Important
recovery process.

Troubleshooting Recovering Database
5. Browse to D:\Einstein\Einstein_Projects\exe\service_tools.
6. Double-click the ForceDBRecovery.bat file.
The open shell displays the following information:
For every corrupt table, a Recovering table xxx row is displayed.
After the table fixing process, a Checking table xxx passed (or failed)
row is displayed for each table in the database.
The bottom of the list displays a Database consistency check passed
(or failed) summary row.
7. If database consistency fails, do the following:
a. Backup the following files to a temporary directory
D:\Database\#error.1
D:\Database\#REF.1.dups
D:\Database\#REF.3.dups
D:\Database\#SCHEME.1.dups
D:\Database\#VSREF.1.dups
D:\Database\#config.1
D:\Database\#table.1
D:\Database\#user.1
D:\Database\#vspace.1
b. Repeat Step 6 as above.
8. If database still fails to recover, do the following:
a. Double-click the Xeleris Prompt icon on the Desktop.
b. Type cd D:\Database <Enter>.
c. Rename the file #ERROR.1 by typing
ren #ERROR.1 #ERROR.1.bak <Enter>.
d. Type dbck -root d:\database -recover #ERROR <Enter>
e. Wait for the process to finish and restart the computer.
Note In case database recovery fails again, call OLC.

Troubleshooting Load From Cold
9.23 Load From Cold
WARNING
This procedure includes reinstallation of both C: and D: drives. The result is a

complete loss of all data on the hard disk.Make sure that all patient data and
user files are backed up before proceeding.
9.23.1 Installing Windows
9.23.1.1 Scope
This procedure was referred to as software Load From Cold, in the past,
and should be used when installing Xeleris from scratch.
9.23.1.2 Overview
This section provides detailed instructions for installing the Window

operating system on HP XW6200, HP XW4100, HP XW5000 and IBM T42
computers from the OS image CD/DVD.
CAUTION
Installing the Windows operating system is a destructive procedure and all the
data on Drive C:\ on the disk will be lost. Note that Drive D:\ may also be optionally
formatted during this procedure.
Verify that all patient data is backed up.

For existing systems in the site, perform system configuration backup. Refer to
Section 6.2.15 – Backup on page 6-129.

Table 9–3: Media Type for Computers
Computer Media
HP XW5000 HP-XW5000 Recovery CD
HP XW4100 HP-XW4100 Recovery DVD
IMB T42 IBM T42 Recovery DVD
9.23.1.4 Time Required
The time required to complete the installation of the basic software is about
40 minutes.
9.23.1.5 Procedure Overview
The procedure consists of the following procedures, to be performed in the

given order.
Note If possible, before starting the load from cold, archive the patient data and backup
as necessary.
z Section 9.23.1.6 – Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration on

page 9-44
z Section 9.23.1.7 – Saving Backup Files on page 9-49.
z Section 9.23.1.8 – Creating Xeleris 1.1 Licenses Diskette/CD on
page 9-50.
z Section 9.23.1.9 – Disconnecting the Computer from the Network on
page 9-51.
z Section 9.23.1.10 – Installing the Windows Operating System on
page 9-51
z Section 9.23.1.11 – Installing the Add-On CD on page 9-52.
z Section 9.23.1.12 – Reconnecting the Computer to the Network on
page 9-53
z Section 9.23.1.13 – Retrieving Backup Files on page 9-53
z Section 9.23.1.14 – Continuing the Xeleris Installation on page 9-53
z Section 9.23.1.15 – Copy Backup Files on page 9-53

9.23.1.6 Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration


User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1




Drive D:\
z D:\ArcLog - the system archiving index

file.

z Computer Name
z Regional Settings

z User List

Backup/Restore tab.
Review Templates.

window.
presentations.

b. Right-click a printer and select Properties. The General tab opens.



Address.
9.23.1.7 Saving Backup Files
All backup files are saved on drive D: and you must save them on a different
location, on the network or on CD.
Copy the following files and directories to the network/CD:

z D:\ImageBackup
z All files in D:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup
z D:\einstein\Einstein_User\Resources\Service_logs\RCCD.txt
z D:\einstein\Einstein_User\Resources\Service_logs\SystemInfoReport.txt

9.23.1.8 Creating Xeleris 1.1 Licenses Diskette/CD
Note The XW6200 computer does not have a floppy drive. License backup must be
performed using a CD.
If Xeleris is running on an XW6200 computer, create a licenses CD as

follows:
3. Burn a CD with the contents of the licenses directory.
Otherwise create a licenses diskette as follows:

floppy drive.
During Xeleris 1.1 installation, use this diskette/CD when prompted to install
Xeleris licenses.

of the computer.
9.23.1.10 Installing the Windows Operating System
Note If not already done, perform Backup of all data, including Backup of the Xeleris

or DVD, and restart the computer.
============================================
Recovery for Xeleris Workstation
for the #### Workstation
============================================
9. Exit
Enter option
The following options exist:
z 1 to restore only drive C: – this means that the Operating System
Manufacturing Department, and if there is an installed database, it
will not be affected.
z 5 for Full restore.
z 9 to exit.
By selecting Option 5, all data currently on the system will be lost, including the
Important
Xeleris database and all configuration parameters. Make sure that you perform
backup before continuing.
Note All additional software, including the Xeleris application, will have to be reinstalled.
3. Type 5 to fully restore the hard disk.


5. Remove the Recovery CD/DVD from the drive, and restart the
computer, by pressing <Alt><Ctrl><Del>.
User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1
Click [OK].
Important
with Section 9.6 – Setting the Virtual Memory on page 9-10.
IBM T42 laptops are loaded with 2 GB of memory.

Important
If you are installing IBM T42 laptop, be sure to change the virtual memory settings
as described in Section 9.6 – Setting the Virtual Memory on page 9–10.

2. A message will appear, detailing the content of the Add-On CD to be
installed. Confirm the installation by clicking [Yes].
Note Installation of the Add-On CD takes about 5 to 20 minutes to complete depending

on the computer model.


Troubleshooting Removing the Second Network Card
9.23.1.12 Reconnecting the Computer to the Network

1. Connect the Network cable to the RJ45 connector of the on-board NIC
[1] on the rear panel of the computer.
9.23.1.13 Retrieving Backup Files
Copy the directory ImageBackup from the network/CD to drive D:
9.23.1.14 Continuing the Xeleris Installation

page 5-108 (in Chapter 5 – Installations and Upgrades). Perform the steps in
that section on the computer running Xeleris.
9.23.1.15 Copy Backup Files
Copy the backup files from the network/CD to

d:\Einstein\Einstein_User\Backup and perform manual restore as
described in Section 9.19.1 – Restore from Hard Disk on page 9-30.
9.24 Removing the Second Network Card
This section is applicable only for systems that have a second network card
installed (e.g., Discovery ST Systems).
If a second LAN Adapter exists, remove it from the computer, as follows:

1. Shutdown Xeleris and the computer, if needed.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
3. Remove the Computer cover, referring to your PC Guide.
4. Disconnect the internal network cable (PET, Discovery ST) from the
RJ45 connector on 2nd NIC [6] on the rear panel of the computer.
5. Remove the Second Network Card.
6. Connect the power cable to the power outlet.

Troubleshooting Installing the Second Network Card
9.25 Installing the Second Network Card

This section is applicable in systems in which a second network card needs
to be installed (e.g., DS Series Systems).
1. Shutdown Xeleris and the computer.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
3. Connect the internal network cable (PET, Discovery ST) from the RJ45
connector on 2nd NIC [6] on the rear panel of the computer.
4. Install the Second Network Card.
5. Assemble the computer cover onto the computer, referring to your PC
Guide.
6. Connect the power cable to the power outlet.

Troubleshooting Disconnecting Existing Optical Disks or DVD (if applicable)
9.26 Disconnecting Existing Optical Disks or DVD (if

applicable)
1. Shutdown Xeleris and the computer, if not already done.
2. Remove the computer cover, referring to your PC Guide, if not already
done.
3. Disconnect the DC power cable and the SCSI flat cable from the optical
and DVD drives.
9.27 Reconnecting Existing Optical Disk Drives/DVD (if

applicable)
1. Shut down the Xeleris system, and the computer, if needed.
2. Connect the DC power cable, and the SCSI flat cable to the optical and
DVD drive, if any.
3. Reinstall the computer cover.
4. Power up the computer.
9.28 Codonics Status Check

1. Click the [–] (minimize) button on the Data Management Screen
Header to view the system’s desktop.
2. Double click the Xeleris Prompt icon on the Desktop.
3. Type telnet codonics <Enter>.
The telnet session will display any communication between the Xeleris
and the Codonics.
Connected to codonics.
Escape character is '^]'.
UNIX(r) System V Release 4.0 (np1600)
login:
4. Type: root <Enter>.

Last login: Wed Apr 2 12:11:25 from 3.28.127.70
Sun Microsystems Inc. SunOS 5.3 Generic September 1993
#

Troubleshooting Codonics Status Check
5. To look at the configuration parameters, type at the UNIX prompt:

stat Xeleris hostname
The system responds with the following information:
Status: Ready Date: 16-Apr-1997 09:04
Media: A-Size Paper Printer ID: 8033-d354
Ribbon: CMY E-net Addr: 08:00:20:1f:65:55
Mem Config: 16MB RAM
Queue: 0 jobs in image queue Hard Drive: 270MB Quantum
0 jobs in image queue SW Version: 1.3.2
Caption: none
Keys: POSTSCRIPT Key=00QIEKQZFO Permanent
ISG_1 Key=40QRC3BRIU Permanent
Defaults: Printer (root) User (Xeleris)
-------------------------- ------------------------------------------
TCR 0 TCR NOT SET
Gamma 1.00 Gamma 2.0
Antialias None Antialias NOT SET
Rotate Auto Rotate NOT SET
Scale Bilinear Scale NOT SET
MCM 1 MCM 2
6. Verify that:
a. The ISG_1 key is listed under keys.
b. The Defaults for User (Xeleris) are set to the values configured
during installation (Section 6.2.6.3.9 – Image Quality Configuration
on page 6-33).
7. To quit the telnet session type: exit <Enter>.
The telnet session will display any communication between the Xeleris and
the Codonics. It can also be used to look at the configuration parameters using
the stat utility or verify which patches have been loaded.
For complete details on using the telnet session for troubleshooting, refer to
the Codonics Users Manual.
9.28.1 Checking Status
The stat utility provides basic configuration information for the Codonics.
This includes the printers software revision, license keys activated and default
printer settings. To use:
1. Open a telnet session.
2. At the UNIX prompt type:

Troubleshooting Disk Space Problems
9.29 Disk Space Problems
9.29.1 Compressing the Einstein Directory to Free Up Disk Space
When a warning about less than 200 MB free space available is displayed, it
is recommended to compress the Einstein directory as follows:
3. Double-click (D:).
4. Right-click Einstein and select Properties.
5. Click [Advanced], select Compress contents to save disk
space and click [OK].
6. Click [OK] and verify that the option Apply changes to this folder,
subfolders and files option is selected.
7. Click [OK] and wait for the compression to complete.
If a message notifying that a certain files cannot be compressed is
displayed, click [Ignore all].
9.29.2 Removing the Swap File to Free Up Disk Space on Drive C:\
Set the Swap File size, as described in Section A.6 – Setting Swap File Size
on page A–12.
After these settings, the Swap File may still exist on drive C and use disk
space.
To remove it, perform the following steps:

1. Double click My Computer and browse to drive C:.
2. Select Tools Î Folder Options from the menu.
3. Go to the View tab and uncheck the "Hide protected operating
system files" check box. Confirm the warning message by clicking
[Yes].
4. Click [OK] to exit the Folder Options window.
5. If the file pagefile.sys exists on drive C, delete it by selecting it and
pressing the Shift and Delete keys concurrently.
6. Select Tools Î Folder Options from the menu.

Troubleshooting Verifying Data Storage on CD
7. Go to the View tab and check the "Hide protected operating

system files" check box.
8. Click [OK] to exit the Folder Options window.
9.30 Verifying Data Storage on CD

When data storage on CD errors occur, verify the data storage integrity, as
follows:

4. Select the Verify Burned CD checkbox.
Note As of this moment, the system will perform a CRC integrity check at every data
storage onto the CD.
If a problem is encountered, an appropriate message is displayed.
5. Click [OK].
Xeleris.

Troubleshooting Reinstalling the OSI Option
9.31 Reinstalling the OSI Option
9.31.1 Overview
The OSI option is required for any Windows based Xeleris P&R system that
needs to communicate with other systems that do not support TCP/IP.
Thesesystems include Starcam systems running Starlink V4 protocol and
SPX systems residing on the ApexNet.
The Starlink protocol and the SPX systems use the OSI network stack as its
transport software.
Installing the OSI shareware package requires the following steps:
1. Remove the old OSI software - Section 9.31.2 on page 9-60.
2. Install the IMPART ISO 8073 Network Driver – Section 9.31.3 on page
9-61.
3. Install the Boldon James ADI program – Section 9.31.4 on page 9-62.
4. Configure the Remote OSI Stations (Starlink and ApexNet systems) on
the Xeleris system – refer to Section 6.2.9 on page 6-95.
5. Configure the Xeleris on the Remote Starlink/SP systems – Section
6.2.9.1 on page 6-97.
Note If the procedure that follows is not successfull, it is recommended to perform system
recovery as described in Section 9.33 as OSI software package is included in the
Operating System Image CD/DVD.

9.31.2 Remove the old OSI software

1. Login as
username: wsservice
password: #bigguy1
2. Remove the Boldon James ADI program:
Remove IMPART components by using the Control Panel Add / Remove
Programs dialog. Note that shortcuts/icons may remain in the IMPART 32
program group after the software has been removed: you can delete them or
they will be replaced if IMPART is reinstalled.
3. Remove the Protek ISO 8073 Network Driver:
a. Right click My Network Places and select properties.
b. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, select the
Local Area Connection item.
c. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog, click on the
[Properties] button.
d. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog, select the
Protek ISO 8073 Transport component and click on the
[Uninstall…] button.
e. A prompt will appear asking you to confirm the uninstall operation.
f. Click on the [Yes] button.
You will be prompted to shut down and restart the computer before the
new settings will take effect.
9.31.3 Installing the IMPART ISO 8073 Network Driver

1. Login as:
username: wsservice
password: #bigguy1
2. Perform full Xeleris shutdown and double click the [Stop Servers]
icon.
3. Insert the Accessories - Drivers CD into the CD drive.

4. Browse to the CD according to the following:
XW4100 - E:\Drivers\HP XW4100

IBM T42 - E:\Drivers\IBM-T42
and double click the .exe file.
5. Right click My Network Places and select Properties.
6. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, double click the
Local Area Connection item.
7. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog, click on the
[Properties] button.
8. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog, click on the
[Install…] button.
9. In the Select Network Component Type dialog, choose Protocol
as the type of network component to install and click on the [Add…]
button.
10. In the Select Network Protocol dialog, click on the [Have Disk…]
button.
11. In the Install From Disk dialog, select
C:\HP\Drivers\OSI\IsoTsp2000.
The Select Network Protocol dialog should now show the Protek
ISO 8073 Transport protocol highlighted.
12. Click on the [OK] button.
The installation process will copy files and will then display the Licence
Agreement for acceptance.
A Protek Installation dialog box will appear which allows you to

choose the licence file to be used. In this release, you cannot use the
‘Default licence from installation media’ option which is checked
by default: you must choose ‘New licence from the file entered
here’ and either enter the fully qualified name of the impcli.lic file, or
use the [Browse] button to select the file.
Note The licence file islocated in IsoTsp2000 directory.
13. You will be prompted to shut down and restart the computer before the
new settings will take effect. This completes the installation.

9.31.4 Installing the Boldon James ADI Program

1. Perform full Xeleris shutdown and double clic the [Stop Servers]
icon.
2. Run the installation program from:
C:\HP\Drivers\OSI\Impart5\Disks\disk1\setup.exe.
3. Select “Yes” in the license agreement dialog.
4. In the License File Location window, select “Continue” to use the
default license.
5. Click [Continue] to use the default path.
6. In the Select Components to Install dialog, mark ONLY the ADI
component and click the [OK] button.
7. In Type of Addressing window, click [OK] to use the default ICAD
format.
Note The path of the configuration file will be changed later.
8. In IMPART 32 Installation Complete, click [OK].

9. Reboot the system.

Troubleshooting Recovering Local Database and Archive Log
9.32 Recovering Local Database and Archive Log
This section is applicable if one of the following occurs:

z The local database seems to be corrupt, or seems to be not functioning
well.
z The Archive Log seems to be corrupt, or seems to be not functioning
well (e.g., archive activities do not appear to be properly logged).
1. From the Main application screen, click the [X] (shutdown) button at the
3. Wait until the application and its servers are closed.
4. Double-click the Stop Servers icon on the desktop, and wait for the
shell to close.
5. Double-click the Xeleris Prompt icon on the Desktop.
6. Type:
service_tools\ForceDBRecovery.bat -port 8100 <Enter>

7. Verify that no error messages are displayed, and that the Done! message
informs that the recovery process was completed.

Troubleshooting Operating System Recovery
9.33 Operating System Recovery
WARNING
WARNING! This procedure includes reinstallation of drive C: The result is a

complete loss of all data on this drive.
Make sure that all patient data and user files are backed up before proceeding.
9.33.1 Installing Windows
9.33.1.1 Overview
This section provides detailed instructions for installing the Window

operating system on HP XW6200, HP XW4100, HP XW5000 and IBM T42
computers from the OS image CD/DVD.
CAUTION
Installing the Windows operating system is a destructive procedure and all the
data on Drive C:\ on the disk will be lost. Note that Drive D:\ may also be optionally
formatted during this procedure.
Verify that all patient data is backed up.

For existing systems in the site, perform system configuration backup. Refer to
Section 9.33.1.4 – Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration on page 9-66.

Table 9–4: Media Type for Computers
Computer Media
HP XW5000 HP-XW5000 Recovery CD
IBM T42 IBM T42 Recovery DVD
9.33.1.3 Procedure Overview
The procedure consists of the following procedures, to be performed in the

given order.
Note If possible, before starting the load from cold, archive the patient data and backup
as necessary.
z Section 9.33.1.4 – Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration on

page 9-66
z Section 9.33.1.5 – Disconnecting the Computer from the Network on
page 9-71
z Section 9.33.1.6 – Installing the Windows Operating System on
page 9-72
z Section 9.33.1.7 – Installing the Add-On CD on page 9-73
z Section 9.33.1.8 – Reconnecting the Computer to the Network on
page 9-73
z Section 9.33.1.9 – Continuing the Xeleris Installation on page 9-73

9.33.1.4 Automatic Backup of Xeleris Configuration


User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1




Drive D:\
z D:\ArcLog - the system archiving index

file.

z Computer Name
z Regional Settings

z User List

Backup/Restore tab.
Review Templates.

window.
presentations.



opens.


Address.
of the computer.

9.33.1.6 Installing the Windows Operating System
Note If not already done, perform Backup of all data, including Backup of the Xeleris

or DVD, and restart the computer.
============================================
Recovery for Xeleris Workstation
for the #### Workstation
============================================
9. Exit
Enter option
The following options exist:
z 1 to restore only drive C: – this means that the Operating System
Manufacturing Department, and if there is an installed database, it
will not be affected.
z 5 for Full restore.
z 9 to exit.
By selecting Option 1, all data currently on Drive C:\ will be lost. Make sure that
Important
you backup any user files located on Drive C:\ before continuing.
Note All additional software, including the Xeleris application, will have to be reinstalled.
3. Type 1 to fully restore Drive C:\.

5. Remove the Recovery CD/DVD from the drive, and restart the
computer, by pressing <Alt><Ctrl><Del>.


User name wsservice
Password #bigguy1
Click [OK].
Important
with Section 9.5 – Assigning Drive Letters on page 9-6.


9.33.1.8 Reconnecting the Computer to the Network

1. Connect the Network cable to the RJ45 connector of the on-board NIC
[1] on the rear panel of the computer.
9.33.1.9 Continuing the Xeleris Installation

page 5-108. Perform the steps in that section on the computer running Xeleris.

Troubleshooting Rebuild Archive History
9.34 Rebuild Archive History
9.34.1 Overview
The Rebuild Archive History feature is used for recovery of archive
information to the Archive Index, directly from the archived media.
It can be used in order to recover a lost Archive History, or to add to an

existing Archive History information of a media that was not previously
included (i.e. a media that was not archived on the same system or at the same
site).
9.34.2 Supported Media

The feature can recover data from CD, MOD or DVD that were archived on
Genie, eNTEGRA or Xeleris systems.
The feature does not support media that were archived on Xpert, Starcam or
Vision.
9.34.3 Operation Instructions

1. Start Xeleris.
2. Insert the medium into the drive.

3. Select the [Rebuild Archive History] option from the Archive

repository extension menu.
Figure 9-20 Rebuild Archive History
4. The operation is logged in the Archive Transfer Log.

5. When the operation is completed, all the data archived on the medium is
available in the Archive History.

9.34.4 Recovered Information in the Archive History
The recovered information in the Archive History contains information at the

Patient and Study levels - Patient ID, Patient Name, Study ID, Study Name.
Figure 9-21 Recovered Information
Series and Dataset information is marked "Unavailable".
The date and time listed in the Archive History will be the Study Date rather
than the archive date.
Note It is also possible to use the Rebuild Archive History feature when the Archive History
is defined on a remote system (eNTEGRA / Xeleris).

Chapter 10 – Component Return Kit Procedure
This chapter provides detailed instructions for maintaining the Xeleris

system.
10.1 Purpose
The Gold Seal Component Return Kit procedure was developed to utilize
displaced components resulting from Nuclear IB upgrades. This process will
help in getting the eNTEGRA workstation back from the field; these
workstations will be used for GoldSeal Offerings (all GoldSeal offerings
include eNTEGRA Workstations).
10.2 General
The instructions in this section shall be preformed after finishing a Hardware

upgrade (LFC) to the Xeleris system, specifically for the following part
numbers that use Dell precision 330 computers:
z H3700JC, H3700JD – Full Hardware Upgrade from eNTEGRA to
Xeleris.
z HJ3700JE – Full Hardware Upgrade from PowerStation LNX to
Xeleris.
z H3700KD – Full Hardware Upgrade from eNTEGRA View to
Xeleris.
The Component Return Kit procedure was devised to enable GE to refurbish

replaced parts (such as computers) and resell them to customers.
In order to enable minimum time of handling the packaging, GE has supplied

an envelope containing labels and a pre-filled airway bill, according to the
following list:
z Package Part number: 2352804.
z Contents: 2358604 - 2x Preprinted waybill
2357240 - 5x Return labels

Component Return Kit Procedure Procedure
10.3 Procedure
After finishing the Installation of the new computer, locate the Component
Return Kit envelop inside the supplied package, and proceed with the
following instructions:
1. Verify that all connections have been disconnected from the old
computer tower. (Network cable, power cord, keyboard, mouse etc.)
2. Verify that all hardware options have been disconnected from the interior
of the computer tower. (2nd network, optical disk etc…)
3. Pack the replaced computer tower into the package of the new computer
tower.
The size of both towers should be the same, so there should be no
problem.
4. Pack the old keyboard, mouse, and power cords with the computer
tower.
5. Close the box with a suitable packing tape.
6. Fill in the information on the supplied Return labels and attach them to
the Box.
7. Fill in the supplied way bill, according to the instructions below, attach it
to the package, and call BAX SAVER Company at:
US: 866-229-7877 next. 25 for a pickup.
Note If there are any questions regarding the return of workstations to GoldSeal please
call the toll free number 877-251-4468.

Component Return Kit Procedure Procedure
Figure 10-1 Way bill
Way Bill filling instructions (Section numbers refer to the green numbers
on the bill)
Section 1: Fill In The FE / Site Information from which the system is to be

shipped.
Section 2: Shipment designation – Already filled.
Section 3: Service requested – Please Mark the BAXSAVER as the
recommended service.
Section 4: Billing Information – Already filled.
Section 5: Please fill in the number of pieces to be shipped, and their overall
weight, length, width & height. Approximated values are sufficient.
Section 6: Leave Blank.
Section 7: Fill in the name and signature of the person who is shipping.

Chapter 11 – Renewal Parts
This section contains listings of the renewal parts for the Xeleris system. The
renewal parts are classified in two groups:
z Hardware on page 11-1
z Documentation on page 11-3
11.1 Hardware
Table 11–1 provides a list of the Xeleris hardware FRUs. To identify the
components, please refer to Figure 3-1 on page 3-3.
Table 11–1: Hardware FRU List
F.I. GEMS
Description Notes
Part Number Part Number
HP XW4100, 3.2 GHz Prescott CPU 2407220 Loaded with XP; includes
keyboard and mouse
Intel pro 1000HT - Server (NIC) 2405846
3Com Ethernet Card (3C905B-TX) CP00113907B 3Com 905B Combo Second

Network Card for HP XW5000
SCSI Flat Cable CBL000939
NEC 19” LCD Monitor 1980SXi-BK 5117545-2
21” hp p1130 CRT Monitor CP000521130 for HP XW5000
Sony Optical Disk Drive (4.1 GB) CP00041551F
DVD Archive Package 2374284
1 GB Memory Upgrade 2411479 1 GB DDR Ram for HP XW4100
VGA Adapter 2411618 Adapter cable for two monitors for

HP XW4100
IBM T42 Laptop with 2GB memory UGP002078
Isolation Transformer 110v -120v 2118082
Isolation Transformer 2210v -240v 2118082-2

Renewal Parts Hardware
Table 11–1: Hardware FRU List (Continued)
F.I. GEMS
Description Notes
Part Number Part Number
DASM/LCAM (self contained) OPT000076 T3455CD
US Robotics MODEM Check with local 2135816-2

OLC for country specific models.
Multitech European Modem 2245794
Power Cable 2119862
Modem Cable, RS232. 2117638-7
CAT 5 UTP Cable (5m) 2215028-4
PS2 Carbon/Silver HP Mouse 2376098 HP XW5000
PS2 Carbon/Silver HP Keyboard 2411616
French Keyboard CP00024725F 2376100-2
Spanish Keyboard CP00024725E 2376100-3
German Keyboard CP00024725D 2376100-4
Italian Keyboard CP00024725Z 2376100-5
Swedish Keyboard CP00024725S 2376100-7
USB Optical Scroll Mouse 2411617 HP XW4100
HP XW6200 PC 5142394
HP XW6200 Keyboard 5242323
HP XW6200 SCSI Controller 5143518

Renewal Parts Documentation
11.2 Documentation
Table 11–2: Xeleris Documentation – English
GEMS
Description
Part Number
Xeleris Operator’s Manual 2414240-100
Xeleris Service Manual (this manual) 2414377-100
Xeleris Site Preparation Manual 2410575-100
Xeleris CIS 2414376-100
* The English on-line help files are provided on the Xeleris application
SW CD.
Table 11–3: Vendor Supplied Manuals
Description
Monitor User Guide
Modem User Manual
For Operating System related issues, use the Online Help as follows:
1. Start > Help and Support.
2. Choose a topic from the list, or type in the Search field and click the
green arrow.

Renewal Parts Catalog Product Structure
11.3 Catalog Product Structure
The basic Xeleris system is delivered in several configurations with respect

to the regulatory kit (one of two available) and an optional localization kit,
which includes a matching keyboard and Operator’s Manual.
In all delivery options, Windows XP and Xeleris V1.1 (or current version)
are pre-loaded.
Table 11–4 summarizes the available license keys according to the

installation type.
Table 11–5 summarizes the available hardware and software options by

Catalog number.
Table 11–4: Xeleris 1.1 Installtion Types and Available License Keys
XELERIS 1.1 INSTALLATION TYPE AVAILABLE LICENSE KEYS
New installations - Desktop
Xeleris1.1 NM/PET Xeleris1.1, ar.base, db.base, hc.base, iap.base,

pr.3d, pr.base, rec.base
Xeleris1.1 PET Console Xeleris1.1, ar.base, db.base, hc.base, iap.base,

pr.3d, pr.base, rec.base,ioa.6gb
Xeleris1.1 View NM/PET Xeleris1.1, ar.base, db.base, hc.base, iap.base,

pr.3d, pr.base
New installations - Laptop
Xeleris1.1 Laptop NM/PET Xeleris1.1, ar.base, db.base, hc.base, iap.base,

Xeleris1.1 View Laptop NM/PET Xeleris1.1, ar.base, db.base, hc.base, iap.base,

pr.3d, pr.base
Misc
Xeleris1.1 View to Full rec.base
SW Upgrades
Xeleris1.1 SW Upgrade from Xeleris1.0 Add License key's On site. +Xeleris1.1
Xeleris1.1 SW Upgrade from eNTEGRA Add License key's On site. +Xeleris1.1
HW Upgrades
Xeleris1.1 HW Upgrade from Xeleris1.0 Add License key's On site. +Xeleris1.1
Xeleris1.1 HW Upgrade from eNTEGRA Add License key's On site. +Xeleris1.1

Table 11–4: Xeleris 1.1 Installtion Types and Available License Keys
XELERIS 1.1 INSTALLATION TYPE AVAILABLE LICENSE KEYS
Xeleris1.1 HW Upgrade from Other WS Xeleris1.1, ar.base, db.base, hc.base, iap.base,

Options
Xeleris1.1 DVD Drive ioa.6gb
* Each Manual Package includes:

z Operator Manual - Hardcopy
z CIS - Hardcopy
z Xeleris On-line Help CD

Table 11–5: Xeleris Options – Catalog Numbers
TYPE CATALOG # DESCRIPTION / CONTENTS
Accessories H2508LK SONY, 5,25: re-writable multi functional optical

disk drive.
Note: does not support reading data archived
using the PIONEER DE-UH7101 drive.
H2508LG Digital Laser Camera Interface (DASM/

LCAM). Provides host control and digital 3M
952 interface to supported lasercameras.
Separate stand alone unit.
H3800JP HP P1130 21" CRT Monitor (Carbon/

Silver)
H3700KP RAM upgrade for HP XW5000 from 1GB

to 2GB
H3800MA Internal DVD Drive for Xeleris
H3700KS 2nd NIC for Xeleris
H3700KT External Archive SCSI Tower for MOD Up

to 2 drives
H3800MB RAM UPG to 2GB for HP XW4100
H3800MC RAM UPG to 2GB for HP XW6200
H3800MD SCSI Controller for HP XW6200

Appendix A – System Procedures
A.1 Changing Default Computer Name
skip it, and proceed with the next procedure.

2. Right-click the My Computer icon located on the desktop, and select
the Properties entry.
3. If Change default computer name was selected, the Network
window appears, with the Computer Name tab selected. Perform the
following procedure:
a. In the Computer Name tab, click the [Change] button.
b. Overwrite the default computer name by the new host name.
WARNING
Never change the Computer Name to XELERIS!!!
The name is limited to 17 characters: A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9 and "_".
Modifying the Computer Description will not change the Computer Name.
Important
c. Click [OK] and confirm the name changes message.

d. Click [OK].
Note If the System Setting Change message appears, click [No] to prevent computer
restart.
4. Change the Local Machine A.E., as follows:
a. Activate Xeleris, click [System Setup].
b. At the System Setup pop-up, click [Config...].

c. At the Xeleris Configuration dialog, click the Dicom tab.
d. At the Local Machine group, change the Application Entity, by
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual A–1 Rev. 3

System Procedures Updating/Setting the Local IP Address and Subnet Mask for the Network Adapter
entering the new Computer Name (in CAPITAL LETTERS).

e. Click [OK], and acknowledge Full Xeleris shutdown, by clicking
[OK].
5. At the System setup window, click [OK].
A.2 Updating/Setting the Local IP Address and Subnet

Mask for the Network Adapter
Note The second network card is intended to connect the Xeleris to a second network

2. Close all running applications.
3. Right-click My Network Places icon on the desktop and select
Properties.
4. Right-click the first local area connection and select [Properties].
5. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP); then click [Properties].
6. Verify that Use the following IP address is selected.
7. Type the following addresses, as defined in the Pre-installation checklist,
or as recorded previously.
z IP Address:
z Subnet Mask
z Default Gateway (Optional)
8. Under the Use the following DNS Server addresses, type the
following:
z Preferred DNS Server IP
z If there is a Secondary DNS Server, type its IP address in the
Alternative DNS Server IP .
9. Click [Advanced...].

System Procedures Updating/Setting the Local IP Address and Subnet Mask for the Network Adapter
10. Select the WINS tab.

a. Click [Add...].
b. Type in WINS Server IP
c. Click [Add].
d. Repeat steps a. to c. for any additional WINS Server.
11. Click [OK] to close the Advanced window.
12. At the Local Area Connection Properties window, click [OK];
then [Close].
13. If a second card exists, proceed to Step 14, below. Otherwise, close the
Network Connection window.
14. For DS Series systems, skip to Step 15, below.
For configuring the second network connection for PET connection,

refer to the PET installation manual, and when done proceed to Step 15,
below.
15. Right click Local Area Connection 2 and select the Properties
entry.
16. Select the TCP/IP protocol and click Properties.
17. Type-in the following addresses:
z IP address: aaa.bbb.ccc.xxx
z Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
where:
aaa.bbb.ccc. correspond to the first three fields of the Discovery
ST IP address.
xxx should be the same for both the Xeleris network cards (= the last
field of the Local IP address).
18. Click [OK] to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog.
19. Click [OK] to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.
20. Close the Network Connection Window.

System Procedures Updating Date Format and Regional Settings
A.3 Updating Date Format and Regional Settings
1. Minimize the Xeleris application by clicking [–] on the upper right-hand

corner of the Data Management screen.
2. Click [Start] on the Task Bar, and select: Setting → Control Panel.
3. On the Control Panel window, double-click the Regional and
Language Options icon.
4. In the Regional Options tab, select the relevant language and location.
5. Click the Customize button, go to the Date tab; then click the down
arrow at the Short date format list, either select the format:
M/d/yyyy, or, if not available, type it in.
6. Click the [OK] button in the Customize Options and Regional
Options dialogs and close the Control Panel window.
Note These settings affect the date shown in the Patient Selector and also the date
formats which are accepted by the patient selector filter mechanism.
A.4 Assigning Drive Letters

This section is applicable only if you have DVD or MOD drives installed in
the system.
WARNING
Failure to correctly assign the Drive Letters will result in failure of the Xeleris
application.
Note Before starting the procedure, verify that if system has a DVD and/or MOD, a
formatted media is inserted in the drive.

System Procedures Assigning Drive Letters
1. Right-click on My Computer icon on the desktop and select Manage.

2. The computer management window opens, with all available drives

displayed:

3. To change drive letter, right-click on one of the drives.
4. In the open dialog, click [Change…]

5. Select the desired drive letter from the drop-down list and click [OK]..
6. Confirm the caution message by clicking [Yes].
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for all drives.
Note Assign the drive letters to achieve the following recommended configuration:
C - System drive
D - Second hard drive partition
E - Disk 1, if available (DVD or MOD drive)
F - Disk 2, if available (DVD or MOD drive)
CD-ROM 0 - System CD-ROM / RW drive
CD-ROM 1 - if available (DVD drive)
8. Close the Computer Management window..

9. If asked, click [Yes] to save the changes; then click [OK].
WARNING
Do not change the drive letters in the Archive tab on the Xeleris
Configuration,after performing this procedure.

System Procedures Setting Group Policy
A.5 Setting Group Policy

1. Click Start > Run..., type gpedit.msc and click [OK]. The Group
Policy window will open.
Figure A-1 Group Policy Window
2. Under Computer Configuration, click Windows Settings then

click Scripts (startup/shutdown).

3. Double click the shutdown item, the Shutdown Properties dialog

will open.
Figure A-2 Shutdown Properties
4. Click [Add]. The Add a Script dialog will open.
Figure A-3 Add a Script

5. Click the [Browse…] button and choose the shutdown.bat option.
Figure A-4 Shutdown.bat
6. Click [OK] twice to close the dialog.

7. Close the Group Policy window.

System Procedures Setting Swap File Size
A.6 Setting Swap File Size

1. Perform Full Shutdown of Xeleris and close any other open
applications.
2. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop, and select
Properties.
3. From the System Properties panel, click the Advanced tab.
4. From the Performance section click [Setting].
5. Select the Advanced tab, then from the Virtual Memory section, click
[Change...].
6. Select D: from the list of drives.
7. Under Paging File Size for the Selected Drive, enter the following
in the editable fields according to the physical memory size:
1GB Memory 2GB Memory
Initial Size (MB) 1300 2058
Maximum Size (MB) 1500 2100
8. Click Set.
9. Select C: from the list of drives.
10. Select No Paging File.
11. Click Set.
12. Click [OK].
13. At the opened System Properties window, click [OK].
14. Confirm system reboot.

Appendix B – Norton Antivirus Installation
B.1 Installing Norton AntiVirus
Note • The Xeleris 1.1 Workstation is shipped with Norton Anti-Virus CD for
WindowsXP. This SW is delivered with one year of free web update, after a
simple subscription process. It should be configured for daily scan for viruses.
• Live update is recommended at least once a week but can be defined
according to the customer workflow and local hospital policy.
• Live update method can be through the web site or media received from
Symantec according to the upgrade contract the customer signed with
Symantec.
• The following Norton Anti-Virus versions are approved and supported on
Xeleris 1.1 and are for WindowsXP.
NA2004OEM for XW4100 and IBM T42
• Other Anti Virus SW should not be used on Xeleris 1.1 as they might damage
the functionality of the system.
• It is recommended that the customer purchase a Norton Anti-Virus update
contract (continuous subscription for virus definition table) by contacting the
Symantec local representative.
Note Live updates require Internet connection. In order to enable this feature, the Internet
Explorer needs to be configured. Refer to the procedure on page 14-3 of the
Operator Manual.
Installation of Norton AntiVirus on HP XW6200 consists of the following:

z Norton AntiVirus 2005 Software Installation and Configuration on
HP XW6200 on page B-11
Installation of Norton AntiVirus on HP XW4100 and IBM T42 consists of

the following steps, to be performed in the given order:
z Norton AntiVirus 2004 Software Installation on HP XW4100 and
IBM T42 on page B-3
z Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP XW4100 and
IBM T42 on page B-9
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual B–1 Rev. 3

Norton Antivirus Installation Installing Norton AntiVirus
Installation of Norton AntiVirus on HP XW5000 consists of the following

steps, to be performed in the given order:
z Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000 on
page B-21
z Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2002 on HP XW5000 on
page B-21

B.1.1 Norton AntiVirus 2004 Software Installation on HP XW4100 and

IBM T42
windows.
2. Insert the Norton AntiVirus 2004 CD into the CD drive.
The following message appears:
3. Click [No]. The following screen appears:

4. Click Next. The following screen appears:

6. Click Next to start installation. An installation progress bar appears.
7. After successful installation, click Finish. The following screen
appears:

8. Click Next. The License Agreement screen appears:
9. Select I Accept the License Agreement.

10. Click Next. The Registration screen appears:
11. Choose a country, fill up the other fields if required and then click Next.
The following screen appears.
12. Enter your address details in the next registration window if required,
and then click Next. The Ready to send data screen appears.
13. Click Next.

If the following error message appears, you will need to configure your
Internet connection before proceeding.
14. Click Next in the Norton AntiVirus Subscription screen.

15. Accept (or modify) the Post Install tasks and then click Next.
The Configuring Norton AntiVirus screen appears and then a Summary

screen shows the summary of post install tasks and configuration
settings.

16. Click Finish. The Welcome to Live Update screen appears.
17. Click Configure. The Live Update Configuration screen appears.
18. Select the FTP tab:


19. Select the HTTP tab:

20. Proceed to Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP
XW4100 and IBM T42 on page B-9 after removing the CD from the
drive.

B.1.2 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2004 on HP XW4100

and IBM T42
described in Section B.1.3 on page B-11.


Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
windows.

confirm.

the window.

B.1.3 Norton AntiVirus 2005 Software Installation and Configuration

on HP XW6200
1. If not already done, perform Full Xeleris shutdown, stop all servers and
close all open windows.
2. Insert the Norton AntiVirus 2005 CD into the CD drive and wait for
the disk to "auto start".
Note If the Norton Installation disk does not start automatically, navigate to the current
CD-ROM drive and double click the file cdstart.exe located in the root directory
of the CD.
Figure B-1 Norton Antivirus 2005 Installation - 1

The Norton Antivirus 2005 Setup screen will appear.
3. Click [Next] to continue the installation process.

4. At the Preinstall Scanner screen click [Next].
Do not press the [Start Scan] button.

5. At the Select the destination folder screen click [Next].
6. Wait for the installion program to finish coping the files.

7. Click the [Finish] button to restart the computer.

8. Logon as administrative user and click [Next].
9. At the License Agreement screen, select I accept the license

agreement and click [Next].

10. At the registration screen, click the Register Later button.
11. At the Norton Antivirus Subscription screen, note the expiration

date and click [Next].

12. At the Security screen, click [Next].
13. At the Thank You screen, click [Finish].
14. The Live Update window will open. Click [Next] to begin the update
process.
Note In order to run Live Update, the Proxy Settings should be configured and the
computer should be connected to the Internet.

15. Wait for the Antivirus to finish scanning the computer for the first time.

When the main screen opens, click the [Option] button.

17. Navigate to Auto-Protect and then to Exculsions. Using the [New...]

button, add the following directories:
z D:\Einstein
z D:\Database
z C:\Temp\Xeleriss
Verify that the subfolders are included.

18. Navigate to the Script Blocking screen (second item in the System
box) and uncheck the Enable Script Blocking (recommended)
option .
19. Click [OK].

20. Navigate to the Internet Worm Protection screen and uncheck the
Enable Internet worm protection (recommended) option.

21. Click [OK]. The Protection Alert screen will appear.

22. At the Protection Alert set the duration to Permanently and click
[OK].
23. Close the main program window.

B.1.4 Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000

Please use the original Norton AntiVirus 2002 CD provided with the original
Important
XW5000 computer. Only the Norton AntiVirus 2002 SW should be used on
Xeleris1.1 running on HP XW5000 computer. Do not install other versions of Norton
AntiVirus or other anti virus SW.

windows.
2. Insert the Internet Security CD into the CD drive.
3. In the Compaq... Symantec window, ensure that the Install Norton
AntiVirus radio button is selected, and click OK.
4. In the Norton AntiVirus 2002 Setup window, click Next.
6. Click Next to start installation.
Note Installation in process...
7. Click Next in the Readme Information window.

8. Click Finish to finish installation.
9. Proceed to Norton AntiVirus 2002 Software Installation on HP XW5000
on page B-21 after removing the CD from the drive.
B.1.5 Configuring and Setting Norton AntiVirus 2002 on HP XW5000

5. Click Next to continue

described in Section B.1.3 on page B-11.

Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
windows.
confirm.
the window.

Appendix C – Upgrade from Xeleris 1.1 (M3 Version)

Username: wsservice
Password: #bigguy1
C.1 Installing the Add-On CD


C.2 Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software

1. Make sure that the network cable is connected to the computer.
3. If the ICON DirectConnect Option was installed before the upgrade, the
system will display a message requesting the PCMacLAN S/W
installation. If this happens, install the PCMacLAN S/W after the Xeleris
SW installation is complete.
Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual C–1 Rev. 3

Upgrade from Xeleris 1.1 (M3 Version) Installing the Xeleris 1.1 Software
4. The Xeleris Installation Configuration utility is automatically

loaded. The following window is displayed.
Figure C-1 Xeleris Installation Configuration – Screen 1


Figure C-2 Xeleris 1.1 Installation Configuration – Screen 2


be set up to 56 GB.
8. For sites under HIPAA rules, select Use HIPAA, otherwise select Don't
Use HIPAA.
the applicable option as follows (use Table C–1 below, as a guideline).
Table C–1: Installation Options by Scenarios
SW Upgrade on
Load from Cold
HP XW5000
Configure Windows networking automatically performed automatically performed
Change default computer automatically performed automatically performed

name
Change regional settings automatically performed automatically performed
Install additional network card automatically performed automatically performed
Add licenses 9 automatically performed
a. Configure Windows networking - automatically restored, no need

b. Change default computer name - automatically restored, no need
c. Change regional settings - automatically restored, no need to
perform manually.
d. Install additional network card - automatically restored, no need to
perform manually.
e. Add licenses - Not relevant for LFC. Before starting the Xeleris 1.1
software installation, you will be prompted to insert a diskette
containing the licenses files.

11. Click [Finish].
WARNINGS
reboot.
completed.

Do not remove the CD from the drive until after rebooting and Xeleris
appears.
Insert the Xeleris 1.1 license diskette, and click [Yes].
Login with
Username wsservice
Password #bigguy1
18. If ICON DirectConnect option was installed, re-install the PCMacLAN
S/W as described in Configuring Link to ICON Siemens on page 6-116.
19. Perform Functional Checks as described in Chapter 7 – Functional
Checks.


XELERIS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XELERIS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

g GE Medical Systems

Xeleris™ Functional Imaging Workstation

Copyright© 2005 by GE Medical Systems

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N´EST DISPONIBLE QU´EN ANGLAIS.

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual iii Rev. 3

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVIÇO SÓ ÉDISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS. CASO O

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLO IN LINGUA

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual iv Rev. 3

P.C.N Rev Date Description Chapters/Pages Appr.

02033 000 Dec. 2004 M4 Release All E. Aloni

2017171 2 June 2005 M4 Release Version 1.1324 All E. Aloni

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual v Rev. 3

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual vi Rev. 3

Chapter 2 – Safety Guidelines and Regulations

Chapter 3 – Theory of Operation

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

3.2.2 Hardware Components ..............................................................................3–4

Chapter 4 – Installing Hardware Options

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

4.6 Installing and Configuring the Second Network Card..................................4–30

Chapter 5 – Installations and Upgrades

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

5.2.8 DASM/LCAM Option..............................................................................5–11

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

5.3.2.3 Adding Physicians ...............................................................................5–64

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

5.6 Upgrade from Genie P&R, XPert and Vision.............................................5–106

Chapter 6 – Xeleris Configuration

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

6.2.7.1 Remote Database Access by LAN ......................................................6–74

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

6.3.1.1 InSite Prerequisites ............................................................................6–151

Chapter 7 – Functional Checks

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

7.7.8.2 Connectivity with DS Camera.............................................................7–28

Chapter 8 – Service Tools

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

9.2 Operating System Installation Problems.........................................................9–3

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

9.21.2 Creating a Problem Report .......................................................................9–39

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

9.32 Recovering Local Database and Archive Log ..............................................9–63

Chapter 10 – Component Return Kit Procedure

Chapter 11 – Renewal Parts

Appendix A – System Procedures

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

Appendix B – Norton Antivirus Installation

Appendix C – Upgrade from Xeleris 1.1 (M3 Version)

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual Rev. 2

In this chapter you will find the following information:

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual 1–1 Rev. 3

1.1 How to Use this Manual

This Class A Service documentation set provides:

1.1.1 Other Documentation

Each system includes the following manuals:

For information about installing and troubleshooting the PC/Laptop, refer to

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual 1–2 Rev. 3

The following conventions are used throughout this manual

Xeleris™ FI Workstation Service Manual 1–3 Rev. 3

1.1.3 Where to Look

Workstation Operation • PC User’s Guide

Xeleris Operation • Xeleris Version 1.1 Operator Manual,

Site Preparation / pre-Installation • Site Preparation Manual, Direction No.